by
Manuel J. Andrade
MICROFILM COLLECTION OF MANUSCRIPTS
ON
MIDDLE AMERICAN CULTURAL ANTHROPOLOGY
SERIES 7
No. 41
UNIVERSITY OF CHICAGO LIBRARY
CHICAGO, ILLINOIS
1955
The present
volume was substantially completed by Manuel J. Andrade before his
untimely death in l94l. During the war years S.L. Bradshaw pulled the
materials together and completed the typing of the manuscript before
illness forced him, too, to return the material to the Mayan Linguistic
Research Project.
It was hoped that it would be possible to prepare
a complete index of the contents of the volume before publication.
This, too, was frustrated, because of the press of other duties on the
undersigned who inherited the responsibility.
At long last, the manuscript is being made available to the general
public essentially in the form in which it was received from Bradshaw.
We have left a few marginal notes pencilled in during our first reading
of the manuscript on the chance that they may be useful. We still hope
to be able to prepare the index and to publish the materials in
book-form at a future date. We hope that this interim availability in
microfilm will serve its purpose.
Norman A. McQuown
A GRAMMAR OF MODERN YUCATEC
by
Manuel J. Andrade
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Preface
Introduction
Part 1: Phonology
Part 2: Brief Grammatical Description
Part 3: Morphology
Part 4: Usage
Notes
The program of investigation which the Division of Historical
Research of the Carnegie Institution has been carrying out in Mexico
and Central America includes a study of the Maya family of languages.
It is expected that a comparative study of these languages will provide
information utilizable in the main enterprise of which the linguistic
project forms a part. An indispensable prerequisite in an inquiry of
this sort is obviously that there should be adequate knowledge of each
of the languages dealt with. The acquisition of such knowledge is for
the present the chief concern in this project.
The descriptive
information available on the languages of the Maya family is for the
most part inadequate to the demands of a historical study. On some of
the languages there is hardly any information of the kind required, and
that which is available for the rest is insufficient in one respect or
another. Due to the circumstances which preceded the formulation of a
plan of research, the work of this linguistic project began where there
was the least need of collecting descriptive data; namely, in Yucatan.
But even there, despite the abundant literature available, there was a
lack of unequivocal information on the sounds of Yucatec, and a need of
describing the language as a whole in a manner that would facilitate
comparison with adequate descriptions of the other members of the
family. In this publication an attempt is made to meet these
requirements insofar as the Yucatec spoken at present is concerned. The
Yucatec known to us through the literature of previous centuries will
be the subject of a future study.
The work of collecting data on Modern Yucatec was financed in 1930 by
the University of Chicago, and in two subsequent years, 1931 and 1933,
jointly by the Carnegie Institution of Washington and the University of
Chicago. Thanks are due to the persons through whom the aid of these
institutions was obtained, particularly to Professor Fay-Cooper Cole,
head of the Department of Anthropology of the University of Chicago,
and Dr. Alfred V. Kidder, chairman of the Division of Historical
Research of the Carnegie Institution of Washington. Much time and
expert advice were generously given by Messrs. Salomon N. Trevińo and
Ivar Kalberg, both of the University of Chicago, while designing and
constructing the sound-recording equipment used in this research. The
names of other persons to whom credit is due wil1 be mentioned later in
connection with that which they contributed. For numerous personal
favors the writer is indebted besides to many residents of Yucatan and
33 to whom his gratitude has already been expressed orally.
Manuel J. Andrade
University of Chicago
October, 1940
The language dealt with in these pages is commonly called Maya, and equally common is the use
of this name to denote the whole family
of which this language is a member. Further ambiguity is involved in the
use of the phrase 'a Maya dialect', since by this expression sundry
writers have referred to any member of the family, or to any but the
Huastec dialects, or exclusively to any of the four dialects which,
according to them, constitute the Maya division of the Tzeltal-Maya
sub-group. Ordinarily, the scope of the ambiguity is not so wide, but
still to assert that this or that is true of Maya is equivocal whenever
the context does not suffice to preclude ambiguity.
Maps and various influential agencies have established quite firmly the
habit of
terming 'Maya' the whole linguistic family. An attempt to restore the
old use of the word to designate exclusively the aboriginal language of
Yucatan is likely to be futile. It has seemed advisable, therefore, to
call this language Yucatec.
In so doing we conform to an old precedent, as shown in Note 1, but the
fact that this appellation precludes ambiguity may sufficiently justify
its adoption.
Chiefly to facilitate reference, two periods of the history of
Yucatec will be distinguished by the designations Old Yucatec and Modern Yucatec.
By the former we shall refer to the language known through the
literature of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries (Note 2).
Beltrán's grammar, written during the first half of the
eighteenth
century, may conveniently be said to describe the language in the
beginning of the transition to Modern Yucatec. The period of Modern
Yucatec may be assumed to begin during the first half of the nineteenth
century or thereabout. In the dictionary compiled by Pio Perez about
this time, one finds usages of the sort which constitutes the main
grammatical differences between Old Yucatec and the language spoken at
present. It is true that some of the phrases chosen by Pio Perez to
illustrate various special uses are now obsolete or obsolescent, but
the majority are not.
Modern Yucatec differs from Old Yucatec at
least with respect to vocabulary, morphology, and syntax. The syntactic
and morphologic differences cannot be specified properly in these
introductory remarks. Concerning vocabulary, one observes that
approximately one-fifth of the words listed in the Motul dictionary are
now obsolete. With respect to the uses of those which constitute the
main body of the present vocabulary, one notices that as a rule they
retain most of the senses in which they were formerly employed. The
main lexical innovations consist in the adoption and adaptation of
Spanish words.
As one would expect, there is more admixture of Spanish in and near the
larger towns than in the more isolated districts, although there are
some exceptions to this rule. But the extent of this admixture has been
much exaggerated by those who deplore its occurrence. In a few
samplings of discourse amounting roughly to 8,500 running words, the
total number of different Spanish words, excluding proper names, was
found to be 9. The samplings were chosen at random from phonographic
records of extemporaneous discourse. In some localities much of the
Spanish admixture seems to have taken place within one or two
generations. By way of experiment, we would occasionally point out to
an informant the fact that he had used a Spanish word. The reaction
varied roughly with the age of the individual and the locality. In
Chemax, state of Yucatan, two of the oldest men would in most instances
replace the Spanish word by a native term, and it would be done as
readily as when one corrects a mere slip of the tongue. On the other
hand, some of the expressions that were so readily recalled in this
locality, and which conformed to Old Yucatec usage, were nearly as
strange as alien words to our informants in other localities,
regardless of the age of the individuals.
Concerning phonetic differences between the old and the modern
language, it may be obvious that all that can be done is to infer with
various degrees of uncertainty what is more likely than unlikely
the case. It is commonly assumed, at least by implication, that Yucatec
pronunciation has not changed much during a period of more than three
centuries. Making allowance for differences of opinion as to what is
much or little in this respect, we venture to say that there are more
reasons for entertaining this assumption than for holding the contrary.
This question is discussed at length in Note
3.
Yucatec is spoken at present throughout the peninsula of Yucatan; in some villages of the districts of Corozal and El Cayo, British Honduras; and, according to some reports, in some localities in El Peten, Guatemala. From the census of Mexico of 1930 we extract the following data on the number of individuals 5 years of age and older who speak only Yucatec, or Yucatec and Spanish, in the three political divisions of the peninsula of Yucatan:
Yucatec only | Yucatec and Spanish | Totals | |
Yucatan | 113,121 | 129,100 | 242,221 |
Campeche | 16,213 | 15,091 | 31,304 |
Quintana Roo | 1,362 | 1,325 | 3,687 |
131,196 | 146,016 | 277,212 |
It is officially stated that no census was taken in some of the localities in the interior of Quintana Roo, where, according to all accounts, there are villages in which no one understands Spanish. In 1921 the Yucatec-speaking population of British Honduras was "about 6,000", according to the Handbook of British Honduras, London, 1925. With regard to Guatemala, we find that the census of 1931 classes a portion of the population as "Indians", but it does not indicate what languages they speak. The "Indian" population of the whole province (departamento) of El Peten is there said to be 2,471. This may include peoples who native tongues are Mopan, Lacandon, and Yucatec. For the reasons stated in Note 4, we leave out of consideration the so-called Peten or Itza dialect which Dr. Berendt is supposed to have discovered in that region. Since El Peten and the portion of Quintana Roo not covered by the census are sparsely populated, it seems that roughly 283,000 individuals speak Modern Yucatec.
As one would expect, there are local and regional differences of
speech within the area roughly delimited above. It would be idle, of
course, to say that the differences are negligible, or that they are
noteworthy, without attempting to specify the criterion with respect to
which one chooses to evaluate them. If we choose to evaluate them with
respect to mutual intelligibility, it seems justifiable to hold that
the local and regional differences in the use of Modern Yucatec are of
negligible consequence. The natives of any two distant localities can
understand one another adequately to their needs in nearly all
instances. There are occasional difficulties in understanding a word or
a phrase of some local vernacular, but the interlocutors can generally
dispose of such momentary obstacles by resorting to paraphrase or
explanation.
It need scarcely be said that what is negligible with
respect to the above criterion can be worthy of note with respect to
the task of describing a given language or dialect. Consider, for
example, what would be the case in dealing with American English. An
American from Alabama may understand another from Ohio satisfactorily,
although one may pronounce a special kind of /r/ where the other
pronounces none. To say the least, it would hardly conform to
professional standards to make no mention of this and many other
differences in a description of American English as it is actually
spoken throughout the United States. Similar conditions prevail in the
Yucatec speech-area.
Many of the speech differences we must take into account in describing
Modern Yucatec are apparently due to the circumstance that various
linguistic devices and usages which became obsolete in some communities
are still prevalent in others, or are preserved only in the speech of
their oldest members. But we do not know whether all the differences
observed are of that sort. When the differences are lexical, the Motul
dictionary provides in nearly all instances the information required to
decide which of two or more given variants conforms to Old Yucatec
usage. But when differences of some other sort are involved the matter
is not so simple. The grammars of the Old Yucatec period, San
Buenaventura's and Coronel's, are too concise and otherwise inadequate.
Additional grammatical information can be deduced from the legal
documents, and other texts of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries,
as well as from the numerous sentences which illustrate lexical uses,
particularly in the Motul dictionary. But the work required to deduce
such information in a reliable manner remains to be done. The texts
themselves cannot be assumed to be equally reliable. On general
principles one must obviously discriminate between translations of the
Catholic Catechism and texts which are not translations. The former may
be reliable, but their reliability will have to be tested. Moreover,
translations are not the only texts which require critical examination.
We all know that some of the Chilan Balam manuscripts are probably
copies made by individuals who can justifiable be suspected of not
knowing Yucatec. Thus, a careful scrutiny of most of the material
available must be made before undertaking to deduce grammatical
information from it.
Assuming that in the fututre we shall possess more extensive and
reliable knowledge of Old Yucatec usage, it does not follow that we may
be able then to decide in every case which of two given usages observed
at present is a later development. Suppose neither of two given
variants is found in the old literature. We cannot conclude that what is not found there did not occur, and it is possible, besides, that both variants be later developments. Also, in the Motul dictionary one finds references to the "speech of the coast", and to "the speech of Campeche", which indicate unequivocally what one would suspect on general principles, namely, that there were regional differences within the Old Yucatec speech-area. Some of the present variants may well be remnants of those differences, or later
developments from them.
The procedures employed here in dealing with variants are expected to
yield results which are non-committal with regard to the preservation
of old usages or the development of new ones. We have tried, however,
to treat variants in as orderly a manner as our information permits. We regard as insufficiently informative a description which states simply that such and such variants occur in a given speech-area, without indicating which of them concur in the speech of a single individual, and which concur in the speech of one or more specifiable localities or regions. The division into speech-types employed in our description rests on observations of such occurrences.
Throughout the description presented in these pages, variants are
distinguished by the terms A-variant,
B-variant, and X-variant. As explained less loosely in Note 5, A-variants concur and are common in speech of Type A;
B-variants are likewise
ascribable to speech of Type B, while X-variants
are those which, so far as our information goes, do not distinguish
either of those two speech-types from the other. Conforming to the
procedures outlined in Note 5, this description of Modern Yucatec is
based on Type A. It deals explicitly with Type B, and with X-variants
only when their deviations from Type A are discussed. As may be
gathered from what is said in Note 5, the labels 'A' and 'B' do not
imply any puristic evaluation. The fact that the speech we labeled
'Type A' seems to conform to older Yucatec usage in more instances than
that labeled 'Type B' is purely accidental so far as our procedures are
concerned; for, as stated in Note 5, the choice of the speech-type
which can serve conveniently as the basis of the description is
determined solely by the exigencies of the task.
The following
statements on the distribution of the two speech-types are based both
on the texts recorded and on information procured in the manner
specified in Note 6. Guided by the data available
on the distribution
of the Yucatec-speaking population and by our information on the
speech-types, we conjecture that the individuals whose speech is
prevalently of Type A constitute perhaps no more than one-fourth of the
Yucatec-speaking population. The Yucatec of the Corozal district of
British Honduras, that of our Quintana Roo informants, and that of
Lunkini, state of Campeche, is prevalently of Type A. In the state of
Campeche, Type A seems to be common also in Bolonchen and other
villages of that district, but our information on that portion of the
peninsula is of unknown reliability. In the state of Yucatan, Type B is
decidedly prevalent. In some districts, however, according to various
reports the speech of the older folk is Type A, or has some of the
characteristics of this speech-type, while the speech-type of the young
generation is prevalently Type B. So far as our own observations go,
that is the case in the villages of Chemax and Chaczinkin. The same
condition was observed in Calkini, state of Campeche, although this
town is only a few kilometers from the village of Lunkini where Type A
prevails. According to some of the oldest natives of Calkini, the
differences between their speech and that of the people of Lunkini were
greater fifty or sixty years ago. Some of the characteristics of Tye A,
particularly the suffix -il which is equivalent to the
B-variant -i,
occur under special circumstances in the speech of individuals whose
discourse is ordinarily of Type B. When translating Spanish words or
expressions, or when demonstrating how a given Yucatec expression is
pronounced, some of our informants would use some A-variants which did not occur in the
texts they dictated. It should be noted, however, that this does not
hold for all the A-variants.
The samplings of connected discourse on which our description of
Modern Yucatec is based consist of folk-tales, autobiography,
narratives more or less of a historical sort, descriptions of
ceremonies, of agricultural and hunting techniques, and of several
other pursuits. Some of these pieces of narrative and description, as
well as a few dialogues, were recorded on 112 double-faced ten-inch
aluminum discs, and the rest were taken down at dictation. To each
narrative, description, or dialogue, recorded in either of these two
ways, we shall refer as a text.
The total number of texts is 214, and the length of each varies,
approximately, from 200 to 12,000 words. There are 13 texts of 5,000
words or more, and 98 containing from 1,000 to 4,000 words.
Three-fourths of the folk-tales spoken before the microphone are at
least twice as long as the longest tales recorded at dictation. Also,
the longest and most complex sentences occur in the texts recorded
phonographically.
The texts are samplings of the speech of 32
informants whose ages vary from 20 to 93. All but 2 of the informants
were male. Two of the texts were dictated by individuals whose command
of Spanish was about equal to that of their native tongue. All but 6 of
the 32 informants were illiterate, and 14 spoke only Yucatec.
The localities where these texts were recorded are as follows: Merida,
Chichen Itza, Chankom, Chemax, Valladolid, and Peto, State of Yucatan;
Calkini and Lunkini in the State of Campeche; Pachacaan, Xaybe, and
Paraiso, in the Corozal district of British Honduras. Some natives of
other localities were brought to the above places, or happened to come
there on a visit, or some errand, or had resided there no longer than
five years. These were from Piste, Xocenpich, Sotuta, Chacsinkin, and
Xbox, State of Yucatan; and from Chunpon, Bacalar, and Icayche,
Quintana Roo. The above total does not include some informants who were
utilized for phonetic observations and tests of other sorts. These
informants were from the states of Yucatan and Campeche.
Bilabial | Labiodental | Alveolar | Palato-alveolar | Palatal | Velar | Glottal | |
Plosive | p p' b | t t' d | k k' g | ʔ | |||
Nasal | m | n | ɲ | ||||
Lateral | l | ||||||
Fricative | f | s | ʃ | h | |||
Affricate | ʦ ʦ' | ʧ ʧ' | |||||
Rolled | r | ||||||
Frictionless continuants | w | j |
Notes:
i e a o u |
Notes:
Study of the phonologic characteristics of Modern Yucatec shows a variety of sound changes, ranging from a few instances of phonetic change, through a number of phonologic changes of varying degrees of consistency, to a rather large number of variations, particularly in connection with vowels, regarding which no definite statements can be made. All the types of changes occurring in the illustrative material used in Part 4 are listed below, together with some indication of the consistency and frequency of their occurrence.
Many instances are observed of occurrence of the vowel of stems (3.1) and of certain suffixes, otherwise in quantity or quality than would be expected on the basis of their occurrences elsewhere. In some cases fairly definite statements may be made governing the conditions under which these "abnormal" forms occur; in others, however, only a general phonologic tendency may be described. Some types of vowel change seem to be morphologically determined.
Primarily in speech of Type B, frequent and in some cases extreme contraction is observed. Some typical examples are listed:
Relative stress within a word has been indicated in this work
by primary and secondary accents (ˈ and ˌ) preceding the
stressed
syllable. The relationship between pitch and accent in Modern Yucatec
has not been studied sufficiently to permit generalization; it may be
said, however, that frequent examples occur in which greater stress
accompanies lower pitch and lesser stress accompanies higher pitch
(e.g., le nuukuloobo’, 'the
utensils', with high pitch on -loo-, lower pitch on
-bo’).
Accent in Modern Yucatec appears to be determined lexically; with few
exceptions, a sharp division can be made between those verbs in which
the stem is accented, regardless of whether one, two, or more suffixes
are added, and those whose stem is invariably unaccented. Regarding
nouns, somewhat more complex behavior is noted.
The accent patterns which occur most frequently in the texts are
summarized below. For convenience, stems and suffixes containing double
vowels are treated as monosyllabic.
This part is intended, as its title indicates, to serve as a brief presentation of the most important Modern Yucatec forms and their uses, and to serve incidentally as an introduction to the detailed treatmant of Parts 3 and 4. An attempt is made to relate the relatively familiar and inexact classifications of Part 2 to the classifications based on usage which are employed in Part 4.
We shall define a stem (3.1) as the lexical element remaining when in the process of analysis identifiable suffixes are removed from a form. Most Yucatec stems are monosyllabic: hanene'x, 'Eat!',-e'x, 2nd. pers. plur. ending; -en, imperative verb suffix; han, intransitive verb stem 'to eat'. hanlil, 'cooked food'; -il, non-particular noun suffix (4.60); -(a)l, noun suffix (4.52); han, stem.
When the verb stem begins with a vowel, prefix w- is required after pronouns in or a, and prefix y- is required after pronoun u (3.2). in wile, 'I see it'; u yile, 'he sees it'; il, 'see'.
For convenience, suffixes are classified in this Part according to
their position in the form. Terminal suffixes are preceded by
pronominal suffixes, verbal suffixes, stem formatives, and stem
suffixes.
tan u nohochtaloobe’, 'They are getting large'.; noh-och-t-al-o'b-e’;-e’, terminal suffix; -o'b, pronoun 'they'; -al, verbal suffix; -t, stem formative; -och, stem suffix; noh, 'large', stem.
Three sets of personal pronouns are identified; they will be called pronouns of Class A, B, and C. Pronouns of Class A are used as subjects of certain verbal constructions and as possesives:
Singular | Plural | |
1st. person | in | k, k ... -e'x |
2nd. person | a | a ... -e'x |
3rd. person | u | u ... -o'b |
The notation ' ... ' in the
plural pronouns represents the verb or noun stem and the suffixes which
intervene between k, a, or u and
-e'x or o'b.
k, 'we', the exclusive form of the 1st. pers. plur. is
employed (1) when the listener is excluded: 'he and I (but not you)';
k aalik tech, 'we (he and I) say to you';
(2) when k includes only one listener: 'you (sing.) and I';
tan k tal, 'we (you and I) were coming'. k ...
-e'x, 'we', the inclusive form, includes more than one
listener; 'you (plur.) and I'; (tu yo’lal) k
ts'onike'x,
'(in order that) we (both you two and I or we) may shoot'. The context
of the communication must determine the persons included or excluded in
'we'.
The terminal component -o'b of u ...
o'b is omitted in about half the examples of its use as a
pronoun of Class A. When -o'b is omitted there is
usually some sign of plurality in the context. ts'ook u
lah tal in mahano'b, tat. 'All my helpers have come,
sir.' lah, 'all'; in mahano'b, 'my
helpers'; expected verb form,&nsp;ts'ook u
tal-o'b (4.15).
Where a verbal suffix and a direct object pronoun (2.5) are required, the order for the plural pronouns
is: k, a, or u : verb stem + verb suffix +
direct object pronoun + -e'x or
-o'b. yan a
tsentikoone'x, 'you have to feed
us'; tsen, 'to feed'; -t, formative;
-ik, verbal suffix; -o'n, 'us', object
pronoun; -e'x, terminal component of pronoun of
Class A a ... -e'x, 'you'. For yan
see 4.18.
Pronouns of Class A are used as possesives: in na, 'my
house'; a na, 'your house'; a
nae'x,
'your (plur.) house'; etc. When there is both a thing possessed and a
possessor, the order is: pronoun of Class A + possessed item +
possessor. u p'ok in sukun, 'my elder brother's hat';
u p'ok le paalo’, 'that boy's hat'. Similar
to these but without a possessor in the strict sense are: u
hahal le che’, 'the chips of the tree'; u
hol k'o ben, 'the kitchen door'; u chi’
k'iwik, 'the mouth of the plaza'.
These are used as subjects of certain verbal constructions and as direct object pronouns:
Singular | Plural | |
1st.person | -en | -o'n, -o'ne'x |
2nd. person | -ech | -e'x |
3rd. person | -o'b |
The 1st. pers. plur. pron. Class B has
both an exclusive and an inclusive form. -o'n, 'we',
'us', excludes the listener or includes only one listener;
lubo'n, 'he and I fell' or 'you and I fell',
depending on the context. -o'ne'x, 'we',
includes more than one listener;
luboone'x, 'you (plur.) and I
fell'.
The 3rd. pers. sing. pron. Class B is a null sign.
luk'ak, 'he had left'; luk', 'to leave';
-ak, a verbal suffix; null sign for 'he'. The 3rd. pers.
plur. -o'b is omitted in a third of the examples, many
of wich have another plural sign in the context; e.g., hel u
pa’to'b, 'they stopped (hel) to
wait'; expected form: hel-o'b.
A pronoun of Class B used as subject or object follows the verb stem
and its suffixes. alkabnaho'b, 'they were
running'; alkab, 'to run'; -n-ah,
intransitive suffixes; o'b,
'they'. As indicated above, pronouns of Class B are followed by the
terminal components of plural pronouns of Class A and by the terminal
suffixes: u hats'enoobe’, 'they
hit me'; hats', 'to hit'; -en, 'me',
pronoun of Class B; -o'b, terminal component of
u ... o'b, 'they', pronoun of Class A;
-e’, terminal suffix.
When pronouns of Class B are used as direct objects, only the exclusive
form -o'n is found for 'us'. There is frequent
omission of the 3rd. pers. plur. pron. -o'b, 'them'.
ch'ae, 'Take him' or 'Take them';
ch'a, 'to take'; -e, verbal suffix for
imperative; null sign for 'him' or 'them'.
Except for the 3rd. person, pronouns of Class C are the pronouns of Class B with the prefix t-:
Singular | Plural | |
1st. person | ten | to'n, toone'x |
2nd. person | tech | te'x |
3rd. person | leeti’ | leetio'b |
Pronouns of Class C have two primary
functions. They are used as devices for emphasis, signifying 'you
yourself', 'it is he who', 'as for me', etc.
techk'askuntik, 'It is you who are spoiling
it!'; leeti’ in konike’, 'That's
what I sell!' Pronouns of Class C often supplant the pronoun ordinarily
required by the verbal construction; e.g., leeti’
yoohel, 'he himself knew' (expected construction,
leeti’ u yoohel). Although
usually preceding the verb in this use, Pronouns Class C follow the verb
in imperative sentences: ts'a
teechi’, 'Take it yourself!'
The second function of pronouns of Class C is as indirect object; in
this use they follow the verb: p'atak tech, 'let
it be yours (let it remain to you)'. The 3rd. pers. pronouns are
preceded by ti, 'to', when used as indirect objects; e.g.,
ma ta taasahe'x teeni’ ti
leeti’, 'You (plur.) did not give it to me but to
him.'; ten-i’, 'to me', pronoun of Class C and
terminal suffix -i’ti (4.59); ti,
'to'; leeti’, 3rd. pers. sing. pron. Class
C. A few examples have been noted of other pronouns of Class C preceded
by ti; e.g., ma tin ts'ah ti
teechi’, 'I did not give it you'.
More frequently 'to him' and 'to them' are expressed by
ti’ and tio'b, respectively,
rather than by pronouns of Class C. The former is probably
ti (variant ti’), 'to', followed by 3rd.
pers. sing. pron. Class B null sign; tio'b is
ti or ti’ followed by pron. Class B
-o'b; aalab ti’, 'it was
told to him'; ts'abak tio'b, 'let it
be given to them'.
These consist of the reflexive sign -ba preceded by pronouns of Class A in, a, u, or k:
-in-ba | in | xot-in-ba | I cut myself |
-a-ba | a | xot-a-ba | you cut yourself |
-u-ba | u | xot-u-ba | he cut himself |
-k-ba | k | xot-k-ba | we cut ourselves |
-a-ba | a | xot-a-ba-e'x | you (plur.) cut yourselves |
-u-ba | u | xot-u-ba-o'b | they cut themselves |
Reflexive forms are also used as reciprocals; e.g., tan u luxikubao'b, 'they were fighting with each other'.
mak, 'one', 'man', 'people', 'person', is sometimes used
as an impersonal pronoun analogous to French on. mak u naakal tu k'ab, 'one
gets on the branch'; u taata mak, 'one's
father'; le makoobo’
yaanoobo’, 'the persons that may be
present'; mix mak tu beetah, 'no one made
it'.
u lak' and u hel, 'another', 'the other',
'its other' are comparable in most of their uses to impersonal pronouns:
hant u hel, 'Eat another.'; naakak u
lak', 'Let another climb!'.
The most prevalent use of the following constructions is to express
completed action occuring in the past:
t-PA V-ah (4.9), the transitive form, consists of t-, an unidentified auxiliary prefixed to PA, a pronoun of Class A; V, the verb stem;
-ah, a verbal suffix (3.10).
Verb stem beet, 'make, do'
tin beetah | I did it | t-in beet-ah |
ta beetah | you did it | t-a beet-ah |
tu beetah | he did it | t-u beet-ah |
t beetah | we did it (excl.) | t-(k) beet-ah |
t beetahe'x | we did it (incl.) | t-(k) beet-ah-e'x |
ta beetahe'x | you (plur.) did it | t-a beet-ah-e'x |
tu beetaho'b | they did it | t-u beet-ah-o'b |
The PA for 1st. pers. plur. is t or t ... -e'x, since k, 'we', is always omitted after t- (2.4).
V-PB, the intransitive form, consists of V, verb stem, and PB, pronoun of Class B.
Verb stem lub, 'fall'
luben | I fell | lub-en |
lubech | you fell | lub-ech |
lub | he fell | lub-null sign |
lubo'n | we fell (exl.) | lub-o'n |
luboone'x | we fell (incl.) | lub-o'n-e'x |
lube'x | you (plur.) fell | lub-e'x |
lubo'b | they fell | lub-o'b |
The passive form, V-ab, consists of V, verb stem, and -ab, verbal suffix (3.9).
Verb stem il, 'see'
ilaben | I am seen | il-ab-en |
ilabech | you are seen | il-ab-ech |
ilab | he is seen | il-ab-null sign |
ilabo'n | we are seen | il-ab-o'n |
ilabe'x | you (plur.) are seen | il-ab-e'x |
ilabo'b | they are seen | il-ab-o'b |
For the use of the pronouns and for the lack of an inclusive form of the 1st. pers. plur., see 4.10.
The following constructions are often used in statements that
involve a continuing action which is either past, present or future:
The transitive form is tan PA V-ik (4.14); tan has no independent meaning in
this use and is not conjugated; PA indicates a pronoun of Class A; V,
verb stem; -ik, verbal suffix (3.20).
Verb stem beet, 'make, do'
tan in beetik | I was (am, will be) doing it |
tan a beetik | you were (are, will be) doing it |
tan u beetik | he was (is, will be) doing it |
tan k beetik | we were (are, will be) doing it |
tan k beetike'x | we were (are, will be) doing it |
tan a beetike'x | you were (are, will be) doing it |
tan u beetiko'b | they were (are, will be) doing it |
The intransitive form commonly used for durative expressions is tan PA V-(a)l, with tan, PA and V as defined above and -(a)l the verbal suffix (3.48). The vowel of the verbal suffix agrees vocalically with that of the verb stem.
Verb stem lub, 'fall'
tan in lubul | I was (am, will be) falling |
tan a lubul | you were (are, will be) falling |
tan u lubul | he was (is, will be) falling |
etc.
Although the form usually used as a durative passive has several variants (3.49), it will be denoted by the formula tan PA V-(aa)l:
Verb stem hant, 'eat (something)'
tan in hantaal | I was (am, will be) being eaten |
tan a hantaal | you were (are, will be) being eaten |
tan u hantaal | he was (is, will be) being eaten |
etc.
The constructions most frequently used to express the beginning of an act which occured in the past are: hoop' PA V-ik, transitive; hoop' PA V-(a)l, intransitive; hoop' PA V-(aa)l, passive (4.17). hoop', 'to begin to occur' is an impersonal verb which is also found in the conjugational forms: (k)u hoop'ol and hoop'ok. In our samplings the constructions corresponding to the above formulas occurred only in the 3rd. person (for constructions used to express the past inceptive in the 1st. and 2nd. persons, see 4.22).
Transitive
hoop' u beetik | he began to do it |
hoop' u beetiko'b | they began to do it |
Intransitive
hoop' u lubul | he begann to fall |
hoop' u lubulo'b | they begann to fall |
Passive
hoop' u hantaal | it began to be eaten |
hoop' u hantaalo'b | they began to be eaten |
Forms used when reference is made to the perfective are:
ts'ook PA V-ik,
ts'ook PA V-(a)l, and
ts'ook PA V-(aa)l, for transitive,
intransitive and passive, respectively. ts'ook,
the intransitive verb 'to end', 'to be over' is unconjugated in these
forms (4.15).
Transitive
ts'ook in beetik | I had (have, shall have) done it |
ts'ook a beetik | you had (have, will have) done it |
ts'ook u beetik | he had (has, will have) done it |
Intransitive
ts'ook in lubul | I had (have, shall have) fallen |
ts'ook a lubul | you had (have, will have) fallen |
ts'ook u lubul | he had (has, will have) fallen |
etc.
Passive
ts'ook in hantaal | I had (have, shall have) been eaten |
ts'ook a hantaal | you had (have, will have) been eaten |
ts'ook u hantaal | he had (has, will have) been eaten |
The following symbolize the constructions used to express actions repeated often but not in immediate succession (4.27); i.e., descriptions of habits, customs, rituals, or common practices of any kind: k-PA V-ik, transitive; k-PA V-(a)l, intransitive; k-PA V-(aa)l, passive. They may refer to past, present or future occurrences. The first component, k-, combines with the pronouns to form kin, ka, ku; the 1st. pers. plur. has k instead of k-k. k beetike'x, 'we (you plur. and I) do it time after time; k-(k) beet-ik-e'x.
he PA V-ik-e’, he PA V-(a)l-e’ and he PA V-(aa)l-e’ are the forms which are commonly used when the speaker is sure of his prediction, or is determined to carry it out. he is otherwise used as a demonstrative (4.16); -e’ is a terminal suffix (3.6). he in tasike’, 'I will bring it (I certainly will and don't worry about it); he u kimile’, 'he certainly will die'.
Certain forms are frequently used to express a prediction which involves some certainty that an event will occur in the immediate future. The transitive and intransitive forms are bin PA kah PA V-(e) and bin PA kah V-(a)l; for passive forms see 4.56. bin, the irregular verb 'to go' is unconjugated in these forms; kah is a remnant of an Old Yucatec durative construction. -(e) is the symbol used to indicate use of either -e or a null sign. bin in kah in beete, 'I am going to do it'; bin PA kah V-e. bin in kah in k'ub tech, 'I am going to deliver it to you'; bin PA kah V-null; k'ub , 'to deliver'; tech, 'to you'. bin in kah lubul, 'I am going to fall'; bin PA kah V-(a)l.
bin PA V-(e), transitive, bin V-(a)k-PB, intransitive and bin V-(aa)k-PB, passive, (4.42) are commonly used to predict remote events which have low certainty or relation to fact; e.g., bin kimikech,'you will die (a curse)'. For -(a)k and -(aa)k see 3.11 and 3.49.
To conform to the terminology used in Part 4, holistic formulas t-PA V-ah, V-PB, and V-ab will be called AHAB constructions, from the transitive and passive suffixes -ah and -ab. One prediction formula (above) and the durative, inceptive, and perfective formulas have in common PA V-ik, PA V-(a)l, PA V-(aa)l, which will be called IKAL constructions, from the transitive and intransitive suffixes -ik and -al. The habitual forms k-PA V-ik, k-PA V-(a)l, k-PA V-(aa)l will be called k-IKAL constructions. Forms PA V-(e), V-(a)k-PB, V-(aa)k-PB, with certain variants, are used for remote predictions and for many other functions (4.37); these will be called NULLAK constructions, from the transitive and intransitive suffixes 'null' and -ak.
The transitive forms V-(null) and V-e are used as
imperative references which occur, respectively, as the initial
component and as the sole component of a clause or sentence
(4.38): ts'a ti’, 'Give it to
him!'; hante, 'Eat it!'. V-en is the
only form found for intransitive imperative references addressed to the
2nd. pers. sing. (4.57): emen,
'Come down!'. Forms used when the imperative reference is addressed to
the 2nd. pers. plur. are V-e'x, transitive, and
V-en-e'x, intransitive:
chae'x, 'You (plur.) turn it loose!';
emene'x, 'You (plur.) come down!'.
For constructions addressed to 1st. pers. plur. and other persons see 4.21, 4.38.
NULLAK constructions preceded by ka (4.38), and k-IKAL
forms (4.36) are usual for transitive and
intransitive imperative
references which are preceded by some other component of the sentence.
The former constructions are more common for orders, the latter for
petitions: mas ka k'ub, 'You had better deliver it!';
mas, Spanish 'better'; ka (a) k'ub, NULLAK
transitive (4.37). le kan
t'aanake’, ka nukik ti’, 'When she
speaks, answer her!'; le kan t'an-ak-e’, 'when she
speaks'; k-a nuk-ik, k-IKAL transitive (4.27).
The usual construction for a negative imperative reference is the
negative term ma (2.24) plus an IKAL
construction (4.24): ma hantik,
'Don't eat it!'; ma (a) han-t-ik, IKAL transitive; for
elision of pronoun a see (1.5). The use
of negative bik and B variant mik is common
for negative imperative references wich recommend caution, give warning
or ridicule (4.43): bik
lubke'x, 'Don't you (plur.) fall!',
lub-(u)k-e'x, NULLAK intransitive.
Two devices which serve to express the kind of interrogation answered by 'Yes' or 'No' are:
The following devices are used as initial or sole components of questions to be answered by information (4.31): baax, 'what'; max, 'who'; bix, 'how'; tuux, 'where'; bahux, 'how much'; bik'ix, 'when'; and expressions beginning with these terms, such as baax ten, 'why'; baax tu men, 'for what reason'. baax is derived from baal (Old Yuc. bal and balx), a universal word of reference signifying 'thing', 'things'; max, 'who', is derived from mak, 'one' (Old Yuc. mac and macx). These devices, used also as relative pronouns, end in x, etymologically identical with the x (Old Yuc. ix) in xma, 'without' (2.24). The constructions which may follow these interrogative devices are those found otherwise in declarative sentences; the AHAB and k-IKAL forms are found most frequently; e.g., baax ka wuuyik?, 'What do you hear?'; k-a w-uy-ik, k-IKAL transitive. tuux yan le #679;an paalo’?, 'Where was the child?'; yan, 'to be', AHAB intransitive; le chan paalo’, 'the child'.
wa, 'if', wa tu men, 'if perchance',
esak tu men, 'in case that',
haali,
'provided that' (4.44) commonly occur as the
initial component of a
unit comparable in use to a conditional clause. The differentiation
between wa and wa tu men is not consistent;
but the latter sometimes indicates that the protasis is a mere
assumption, or a contingent condition ('if it happens that ...').
The k-IKAL constructions are those usually used after one
of the above terms (4.35); e.g., wa tu men ku
pahtal, 'if it is possible'; k-u pah-t-al,
k-IKAL
intransitive. A NULLAK construction, however, is preferred when the
conditional clause expresses a provisory promise, a supposition about
the future or a statemant contrary to fact (4.44):
haali ka ts'a ten, 'provided you give it to
me'; ka ts'a, NULLAK transitive. wa ka
tak, 'if he had come (and he had not)'; ka
ta(l)-(a)k, NULLAK intransitive (Cf. 1.5).
For the circumstances in which AHAB constructions are used in
conditional clauses see 4.11.
Construction with uses corresponding to purpose clauses consist of an IKAL or NULLAK form introduced by u ti’al, 'in order to', 'so that', or tu yo’lal, 'on account of', 'on his account' (4.23, 4.41): u ti’al a bisikene’ ..., 'so that you may take me ...'; a bis-ik-en-e’, IKAL transitive with terminal suffix -e’. Where a NULLAK construction is required and the purpose clause and the main clause have the same subject, u ti’al and tu yo’lal are seldom used: (ka hok'ok) u yuk'o'b, '(They come out) in order to drink'; u y-uk'-o'b, NULLAK transitive.
Most of the common verbal constructions have uses which correspond to
those of English relative clauses: ... ts'ab
tie’, '(the clothes) which where given to him';
ts'a-(a)b, AHAB passive;
ti(’)-e’, 'to him', pron. of Class C and terminal
suffix -e’ (4.58); no formal
device for 'which'. Often the devices
baax,'what', max, 'who', etc.
(2.19) serve as relative pronouns and as initial
components of relative clauses:... baax
hantik, '(He could not catch) what he eats'; (u)
han-t-ik, IKAL transitive; for omission of pronoun u
see 4.34.
Constructions introduced by he baax,
'whatever', he max,'whoever', wa
baax,
'whatever' are used as relative clauses with non-specific antecedents
(4.45).... he ˈbaaʃ ka waːl
tiˈeʔ, '(See to it that he
obeys) whatever you tell him'; ka (a) w-al, NULLAK
transitive; ti(’)-e’, 'to him', pronoun of Class
C and terminal suffix -e’ (4.58).
Units introduced by tuux, 'where', he
tuux, 'wherever', he bix, 'as',
'like', and similar terms, are equivalent to various delimiting
clauses.... tuux kin bisaal, '(He couldn't
see) where I was being taken'; k-in bis-aal,
k-IKAL passive. ... he bix tin waalah
tioobe’, '(They did) as he told them';
t-in w-al-ah, AHAB transitive;
ti-o'b-e’, pronoun of Class C and terminal suffix
-e’.
A device whose function is comparable to that of a temporal clause
in English is usually the initial component of a sentence. When a
k-IKAL construction is used as a temporal clause (4.33), it denotes an
event which occured, is occuring, or will occur before something else
happens: ku tahale’ ..., 'After it was cooked,
(he ate)'; k-u tah-al-e’, k-IKAL
intransitive; tah, 'to cook'; -e’ (4.58). NULLAK constructions are preceded by
ken, kan, le ken, le
kan, in references to an unspecified future time (4.46); e.g., ken
taakene’, 'when I come';
ta(l)-(a)k-en-e’, NULLAK intransitive.
Various verbal constructions, most frequently IKAL or
k-IKAL,
are used in temporal clauses when preceded by one of a large group of
time expressions (Cf. 2.25 and 4.20). Examples: ichil u
weenele’, 'while he was asleep';
ichil, 'while'; u wen-el, IKAL
intransitive; -e’ (4.58).
chen p'elak u bisaal, 'as soon as he was
sent'; chen p'elak, 'as soon as'; u
bis-aal, IKAL passive. When a verbal construction is preceded by
le,
the unit may denote 'as soon as (x occured)'. When the verbal
construction is an AHAB form, a very short time interval is indicated
(4.62): le ka tu
beetahe’, 'the very moment he did it'.
-e’ is the final morpheme of nearly all temporal
clauses.
ma or maa, variant
ma’ before a vowel, is used as the sign of simple
negation and immediatly precedes the verbal construction: ma’
ilaabi, 'he was not seen'; il-ab-i, AHAB
passive with terminal suffix -i (4.59). baax ten maa ta
beetik?, 'Why don't you do it?'; maa tan a
beetik, IKAL transitive (4.14);
for contraction of tan a see 1.5.
ma is apparently not found before constructions
k-IKAL (4.34), ka NULLAK
(4.62), bin + NULLAK (4.42) and bin PA kah (4.56); the negative statement corresponding to the
affirmative assertion using one of these forms consists of a
ma(+ tan)+ IKAL construction.
ma tech is used for emphatic negation before an IKAL
construction (4.59): ma tech u
kimil, 'He is not dead'. mix mak, 'no
one', 'nobody' and mixbaal, 'nothing' are used
before k-IKAL constructions (4.33):
mix mak kin bisik, 'I did not take anyone
away'; k-in bis-ik, k-IKAL transitive.
mix bik'in, 'never' and bik
(B-variant mik) are found before certain NULLAK
constructions (4.42; 4.43):
mix bik'in bin k xule'x,
'never are we to cease'; bin k xul-e'x,
bin + NULLAK transitive. minaan
signifies 'not to have', 'not to exist' (4.61):
minaan u kaaho'b,'there are no
towns'; kah-o'b, 'towns'.
With uses comparable to those of adverbs of time and place in English
are many forms such as ti’, la’,
tun, 'then', 'there'; kaachi,
'previously'; leyli, ichil,
'while'; napulak, 'right away'; sam, 'a
while after'; tak, 'until'; nach, 'far';
nats', 'near'. Except for
kaachi, 'previously', these forms usually preceed
the verbal construction: seb
taakene’, 'I will come soon';
seb, 'soon'; ta(l)-(a)k-en-e’, NULLAK
intransitive; for contraction of tal-ak see 1.5; -e’ (4.58).
As in various European languages, particularly in colloquial speech,
many words in Yucatec are used without morphologic differentiation for
both adjectival and adverbial functions; e.g., a chan
anteene’, 'you help me a little';
chan, 'little'; a ant-en-e’, NULLAK
transitive. le chan paalo’, 'the little
boy'; le paalo’, 'the boy'.
The construction designated as "adjunct verbal stem" (4.50) has the
adverbial use of intensifying or varying the significance of the verb
stem which it immediately precedes. Common adjunct verbal stems are:
han, 'right away', 'in a hurry'; sen,
'extremly', 'much'. a han ch'ak a
sie'x, 'You will cut your wood in a hurry';
a ch'ak, 'you will cut'; si’, 'wood'
(1.3).
For the uses of duplication and reduplication to perform functions
corresponding to those of adverbs see 4.69.
The uses of the following forms correspond closely to those of
English adjectives: (1) simple stems such as sak, 'white';
uts, 'good'; (2) stems with suffixes
-(o)ch, -tsil, or -ben,
as in nohoch, 'large',
oltsil, 'poor', ch'aben,
'acceptable' (3.40, 4.71, 4.57); (3) verb stems with suffixes
-(a)k, -(a)l, -aan, or
-bil, similar to participles in European languages, as in
le he’kachale’, 'the broken egg';
kach-al, constr.V-(a)l; le
chakbil kaaxo’, 'the cooked
chicken'; chak-bil, constr.V-bil. Forms in
the first two groups usually precede the noun: le nohoch
kaaha’, 'this large town'. Those in the third
group either precede or follow the noun.
hach, 'very', preceding the adjective, is used for the
comparative and superlative: le hach oltsil,
'the poorer one', when two objects are compared; 'the poorest one' when
more then two objects are compared. For Yucatec numerals and "numerical
classifieres" see 4.68; for demonstrative
adjectives see 4.51.
There are no forms that correspond specifically to the English
articles 'the', 'a', and 'an'. In many instances the pronoun
u (2.4) is used to signify 'the', no
possessive sense being indicated; e.g., u nuukul,
'the tool'; u before parts of the body; e.g., u
hool, 'the head'; u kal, 'the neck'; u
yok, 'the foot'. In some instances the suffix -il is
required by the noun preceded by u signifying 'the':
u kaxilo'b, 'the chickens' (4.60). Expressions corresponding to 'the other', 'the
one', 'another' consist of u followed by lak'
or hel (Cf. 2.8).
hun p'el, hun tul and other terms for 'one'
(4.88)
are frequently equivalent to 'a' or 'an': hun p'el kah, 'a
village'; hun tul chan paale’, 'a little
boy'.
le ... -o’, 'that', is often equivalent to 'the' (4.51): le hach
k'aaso’, 'the worst one'.
The following forms have uses which correspond to those of English
nouns: (1) simple stems such as kah, 'village',
k'in, 'day'; (2) compound stems (3.1)
such as okk'in, 'evening',
k'anhool, 'pillow'; (3) stems with a suffix
such as -ben (3.41), -ab
(3.9), -(a)m (3.39) and very frequently -(a)l (4.52) and -il (4.60)
affixed to a number of verb stems; e.g., kimil,
'death' (kim, 'to die'); siypil, 'sin'
(sip, 'to err'); hanal, 'cooked food'
(han, 'to eat'); ch'akil, 'action of
chopping' (ch'ak, 'to chop'). Stems used as nouns
become nouns with changed denotation when suffixed by -il;
e.g. k'inil, 'time', 'season' (k'in,
'day', 'sun').
Forms used as nouns, particularly proper nouns, follow the verb when
they are equivalent to the English "subject": tu yilah
pedro, 'Peter saw him'; when both "subject" and "object"
are nouns, the former follows the latter: tu yilah hwan
pedro, 'Peter saw John'. If the speaker wishes to emphasize
the subject, the statement is:pedro hwan tu
yilah, 'Peter saw John'.
Plurals are indicated by the suffix -o'b (Cf. 2.5): le naoobo’,
'those houses'; le makoobo’, 'the
men'; le ... -o’ (4.51). The
plural suffix is omitted in about one-fourth of the specimens
studied.
ti or ti’ corresponds to a general
preposition signifying 'to', 'of', 'at', 'on', 'in', 'for', 'by':
ti’ u taata, 'to the father'; ti hun
p'el k'anche’ , 'on a stool'; ti le
k'aano’, 'in the hammocks'; te
beo’, 'by the road' (for contraction of ti
le to form te Cf. 1.5).
tu men is often equivalent to the English preposition
'by': ka t'an tu men le baxal
taak'ino’, 'she was called by the
gambler'; ka t'an, irregular AHAB passive.
tin wiknal, ta wiknal, tu
yiknal correspond to the prepositional phrases 'near me',
'in your presence', 'under his care', 'to where you are', or to the
French chez: ka
ch'ayk ta wiknal, 'Take him with you (to your
house)'; ma k'uchuk tu yiknal, 'He could
not reach him (come next to him, get at him)'.
Certain verb stems with suffix -(a)l have prepositional
uses (4.52): ichil, 'in',
'within';yanal, 'under'; yok'ol,
'on'; yetel, 'with': ichil le
k'aak'o’, 'into the fire'; yok'ol le
pilao’, 'over the basin'; ka bin
yetel pedro, 'and they went with Pedro'.
ka is commonly used for 'and' although
yetel, 'with', often signifies 'and' when it occurs
between two nouns: a kumpale yetel a
kumale, 'your compadre and your comadre'. xan, 'also',
leyli, 'still', and the sequence of one sentence
after another are each equivalent to 'and' in a number of examples (4.62).
tu men, 'by' also signifies 'because', 'so that', 'since',
'on account of': tu men aalab
teene’, 'because I have been told'.
wa is equivalent to 'if', 'whether', 'or' (4.70): wa a iho wa a watan,
'whether your son or your wife'; wa ka wolte, '(I'll
go) if you wish'.
The purpose of Part 3 is to enumerate the formal devices in Yucatec.
In the analysis of forms, conclusions have been based, in so far as is
possible, on the contemporary language. In a few instances, however, it
has been found necessary to resort to etymologic analysis, this
practice having been considered preferable to presenting certain
phenomena without explanation. The monosyllabic lexical elements which
comprise a large proportion of the morphemes occurring in the texts are
treated only incidentally in this part; they are, of course, more
properly the subject matter of a dictionary than of that part of a
grammar which deals with forms. Verb forms, because of their complexity
and variety, receive major attention.
Application of the terms
'transitive', 'intransitive', and 'passive' to Yucatec verb forms is
determined ultimately by morphologic considerations, although in almost
every instance the criterion in English and other Indo-European
languages ('takes an object,' 'does not take an object,' etc.) is also
satisfied. Thus, in the expression: tu cheehtah
nasario, 'Nasario laughed', we have called the verb
transitive; in u ts'ookol u bel,
'to finish one's affair', the verb is classed as intransitive; and a
few other exceptional instances were observed in our specimens in which
the classification of the verb was not determined by its taking or its
ability to take an object, but by its form, the decision being counter
to that which would be made on the basis of English habits. For the
unusual behavior of certain passive forms, see 4.10.
We deal below
with stems, prefixes, terminal suffixes, pronominal suffixes, and,
finally, with a large number of suffixes, difficult to characterize
either by position in the form or by function, which have been arranged
rather arbitrarily in five groups. In the concluding paragraphs (3.50
ff.), irregular verb forms are registered.
With regard to stem formation, it is convenient to postulate two classes of stems: (1) simple stems, and (2) composite stems. The first class is morphologically simple, consisting almost exclusively of monosyllabic lexical elements; the second class is more diffuse in character. So far as concerns the elements comprising composite stems, the following broad statements may be made:
Simple and composite stems differ with respect to the suffixes which
follow them in certain intransitive and passive forms (3.49., 4.32),
namely: -(a)l, -(a)h, -al,
-aal, -ak, -aak. Suffixes
-(a)l and -(a)k follow simple stems; the
suffix vowel and stem vowel agree vocalically. Suffixes
-al, -aal, -ak and
-aak follow composite stems, the vowel quality being
invariable (Cf. examples below).
Exceptional examples are found of apparently simple stems which are
followed by suffixes required by composite stems. Some examples can be
explained by etymological evidence; e.g., beet,
'make'; boot, 'pay' (Old Yuc. belt and bolt);
u beetaal, 'it is made'; u
be(l)-t-aal; -t (3.26);
-aal (3.15). A few others occur for
which no explanation is offered; e.g., il, 'see'
(ilaal, ilaak); tub, 'spit at'
(tubaal). For the irregular intransitive forms with
suffix -ak, where -(a)k might be expected, see
3.51.
In the analysis of verb forms, transitive composite stems are generally
given with the suffix of Group 2 included, but intransitive composite
stems are given without the suffix: kins, 'kill'; but
alkab, 'run' (occurs frequently as
al-kab-n).
This convention derives from the fact that in transitive stems the
suffix of Group 2 is invariable, while in intransitive stems certain
variations of suffix occur (Cf. 3.51 ff.).
Examples of simple and composite stems:
Required after pronouns in, a, u (2.4) before stems with an initial vowel. Prefix y- is found after u and w- after in or a. Neither prefix is found before Spanish words which begin with a vowel. The occurrence of y- without a preceding pronoun is observed in irregular forms such as yetel, 'with', and yok'ol, 'on' (4.52), and in other irregular constructions (3.50).
As in Old Yucatec, x- is used to indicate the female, often in disparaging terms. It also occurs without apparent reference to the female in certain names of insects, snakes, and trees; and in the term xla’, 'old'.
From Old Yucatec prefix ah, of wide occurrence, h- is now found preceding only the stems men and kuch in speech of Type A. In speech of both types, occurrence of these stems without h- is common.
Found as the final suffix of demonstrative device bey, he(l), le(l), te(l), or way; or as the final suffix of any morpheme ending a phrase, clause, or sentence which begins with bey, he(l), etc. (4.51). The demonstrative device is omitted occasionally before nouns which are preceded by a possessive pronoun. The demonstrative device is used but the terminal suffix frequently omitted: (1) when -o’ is required after a word ending in o; (2) when -a’ is required after a verb form ending in a; (3) when the form ends in -o'b; (4) when -o’ is required after a rather long, complex unit introduced by le; (5) when two terminal suffixes are required in close succession, in which case the first is omitted; and (6) when -o’ and -e’ are both required as final morphemes of a word, in which case -o’ is more frequently omitted.
Observed mainly in two kinds of instances: (1) preceded by demonstrative devices he(l), le(l), or way (4.13., 4.51); and (2) as the final suffix of a word which is the last or only word in a clause (4.38). It is also observed occasionally at the end of a sentence; in a random sampling of 800 sentences, about 10% ended in -e’ .
Found almost invariably as the final morpheme of a sentence, -i (variant -i’) occurs frequently and with high predictability after constructions which require a pronoun of Class B. -i or -i’ is never observed, however, when -a’ or -o’ is required, and it is omitted occasionally when -e’ is required. See 4.59 for descriptions and examples of many uses of -i, -i’.
It was considered advisable to give in Part 2 (2.4 ff.) a relatively complete presentation of the Yucatec pronoun system. Listed below are the suffixes which are pronouns or terminal components of pronouns:
Pronouns of Class B | Reflexive Pronouns | Pronouns of Class A | |||
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sing. | Plur. | Sing. | Plur. | Plur. | |
1st. person | -en | -o'n | -in-ba | -k-ba | -e'x |
2nd. person | -ech | -e'x | -a-ba | -a-ba | -e'x |
3rd. person | --- | -o'b | -u-ba | -u-ba | -o'b |
Included in this group are suffixes of the sort which might be termed "main verbal devices", with reference to their most common occurrences. They serve as complete or partial indices of such phases of verbal action as voice, mood, tense, or transitivity-intransitivity (Cf. above). With few exceptions, they occur either in final position or followed only by a pronoun suffix or a terminal suffix.
Suffix found in passive form V-ab (4.10). -ab usually occurs as -aab before another suffix (1.4). In archaic forms and after stems ending in a vowel -ab precedes passive suffixes -al and -ak (3.49) when these suffixes are required.
Suffix in transitive form t-PA V-ah (4.9). If a pronominal suffix is required,
-ah is frequently omitted when the verb stem is composite
or reduplicated; when the stem is simple, the vowel a of
-ah is often elided, particularly in speech of Type B (Cf.
1.4).
As an intransitive formative, -ah is found frequently in
formulas V-ah-PB, V-l-ah-PB, and
V-n-ah-PB, constructions in certain irregular intransitive
conjugations (3.51.ff.). In V-ah-PB
forms, the a of -ah is often elided.
For the restricted use of suffix -ah in formulas PA
V-ah-ma and V-ah-aan-PB see 3.21 and 3.47, respectively.
Found in the intransitive and passive form V-(a)k-PB, where V is a simple stem. The vowel of -(a)k agrees vocalically with the stem vowel. In the passive forms the stem vowel is often doubled if the accent is on the stem and no other suffix follows -(a)k (4.37). In certain intransitive uses, -(a)k may be preceded or followed by a number of formatives, as described in 4.49.
Suffix in intransitive and passive forms V-ak-PB (4.37). V is a composite stem; in passive forms, V is most frequently polysyllabic.
Found in passive form V-aak-PB (4.37). The suffix -aak is almost invariably in final position; i.e., PB is a null sign for 3rd. pers. sing., and there is no terminal suffix (2.5, 3.5 ff.). In non-final position, -aak is found as -aak or -ak, in most instances.
Suffix in intransitive and passive form PA V-al (4.13). V is a composite stem, and in passive forms is frequently polysyllabic. Suffix -al is found after composite stems in a few nouns (4.52).
Suffix in passive form PA V-aal (4.13). In most instances, V is a monosyllabic composite stem, and -aal is the final suffix in the form.
Found in the intransitive form tan PA V-ankil; the verb stem is frequently reduplicated (4.54).
Suffix found in passive form V-bil-PB (4.55). With kaxt, 'find', in speech of Type A, instead of the common form kaxtbil, 'it should be looked for', we find kaxanbil (kax-an-bil). For -bil followed by -ak see 4.49.
Suffix in transitive forms PA V-e and V-e, the latter found in imperative uses (4.37). Suffix -e, always in final position, occurs in a form which is the last or only component of the clause or sentence.
Found in intransitive imperative forms V-en and V-en-e'x for 2nd. pers. sing. and plur., respectively (4.57).
Suffix in transitive form PA V-ik (4.13 ff.).
Suffix found in transitive form PA V-ma, variant PA V-ah-ma (4.66). The occurrence of -ah-ma is unpredictable. -ma is usually followed by -h when a terminal suffix is required.
The suffixes of this group serve primarily or exclusively (1) to convert intransitive or non-verbal stems into transitive stems, or (2) to convert non-verbal stems into intransitive verb stems. They occur frequently as components of composite stems (3.1), and are almost invariably found in medial position.
Suffix which converts certain non-verbal stems into transitive stems. Formative -in is always followed by -s or -t (3.25, 3.26).
Suffixes which convert stems otherwise found in irregular intransitive conjugations into transitive stems. Always followed by -s or -t, -kin-s or -kin-t is used when the stem vowel is o or u; -kun-s or -kun-t is used when the stem vowel is a, e, or i. No determinants are observed for the use of -s or -t after -kin and -kun.
Converts Spanish words into irregular intransitive verbs of the V-n-ah conjugation (3.53). This suffix is required by monosyllabic composite stems and by nearly all polysyllabic stems used intransitively. For the conjugation of such stems, see the V-n-ah forms (3.53). Suffix -n is observed in a few noun forms.
Serves to convert many monosyllabic intransitive stems into transitive stems. The morpheme -es, archaic form of -s, is found when the stem has no other suffix and is not accented. Formatives -in-s, -kin-s, and -kun-s are registered above; for -b-es see 3.29.
Converts most polysyllabic stems and a number of monosyllabic stems,
otherwise found in intransitive verbal units or in nouns, into
transitive verb stems.Spanish verbs and, so far as our limited data
indicate, Spanish nouns, are converted into Yucatec transitive verb
stems by means of formative -t.
This suffix is required in such transitive stems as ant,
'help', and beet, 'do', which are never found without
-t. It is observed in certain transitive stems only when
these are preceded by an adjunct verbal stem (4.50).
Formative -t is required in these intransitive forms: PA
V-t-al, a verbal unit found in most of the irregular
intransitive conjugations (3.51 ff.); and
S-aan-t-ak (4.49), a form restricted
to plural references in certain uses. Suffix -t is found in
a few nouns: e.g., kuxtal, 'life';
kux-t-al.
Followed by -h (3.31); -cha-h converts a number of non-verbal stems into irregular intransitive stems, for the conjugation of which see 3.54. Many verbal units with -cha-h signify entrance into a state or condition. The suffixes -cha-l are observed only in the intransitive forms S-cha-l-ak (4.49).
In this group we include a rather heterogeneous set of suffixes. Some of them may be analogous to those of Group 2; but their occurrences are either too infrequent ot too equivocal for inclusion in that group. Others are apparently used to modify the significance of the stem more radically than do the suffixes of Group 2.
Component of several irregular intransitive stems and a few nouns; the vowel of the suffix usually agrees vocalically with that of the stem. In most instances, the stem without -(a)t has different significance or is not found.
Usually followed by -es (3.25). Formatives -b-es convert certain stems into transitive verbs. The occurrence of -b without -es is probable in two or three composite stems of doubtful analysis.
Found in a few intransitive stems: e.g., lemba, 'shine'; kilba, 'thunder'. Required in the intransitive constructions S-(a)k-ba-l and S-ba-n-ak (4.49), and in a few stems which are used transitively, intransitively, and as nouns. For reflexive -ba see 2.7.
Found after suffix -pa, -cha, or -k'a (Cf. 3.37, 3.28).
Indicates repeated action, as in Old Yucatec, but is found in our sampling with only two stems.
Indicates rapid action or action which takes place on the ground; found in a few transitive and intransitive verbs. This morpheme is also found in compounds (cf. luumkab, 'Earthman'; kolkab, 'milpa-tiller').
Suffix required by certain stems which are found in verbal units of the V-l-ah conjugation (3.52); it is also found in the intransitive form S-(a)k-ba-l (4.49) and after composite stems ending in a vowel in the irregular intransitive form PA V. For -l after -cha, -pa and -k'a see 3.37, 3.28.
Signifying 'all', -lah is found affixed to stems of passive and intransitive verbal constructions (4.64).
Suffix found in certain transitive and passive verbal constructions specified in 4.65; it is always followed by -t (3.26).
Suffixes required in certain composite stems which are conjugated as regular intransitive verbs. -pa and -k'a are followed by -h (3.31) except in the forms S-pa-l-ak and S-k'a-l-ak (4.49). With a few stems, -k'a is interchangeable with -pa or -cha (3.27).
The following suffixes are found primarily as components of nouns or other non-verbal forms, and secondarily as components of verb forms derived from non-verbal forms.
Found in a number of names for tools and utensils, and in various unclassified nouns. The stems of some of these nouns occur without -(a)b as simple verb stems, or with -(a)b and a suffix of Group 2 as composite verb stems.
A suffix found in some nouns, the majority of which are names of animals.
Suffix found in certain nouns and in many forms which are comparable in function to English adjectives. A number of instances were observed of verbal use of forms with -(a)ch.
Component of nouns and other non-verbal forms. In some specimens -ben is comparable to English suffixes -ible and -able; in others it signifies 'worthy of' (4.57).
A suffix found in many collective nouns referring to parts of the body. These are preceded by pronouns of Class A (2.4). Miscellaneous instances of -el include such words as paasel, 'milpa-hut', kolel, 'lady', ohel, 'to know' (3.56).
Suffix found in nouns, the stems of which are otherwise used in verbal units or as nouns with different significance. -il also serves to convert both verbal and non-verbal constructions into nouns. For the conditions governing the use of pronoun u before forms with suffix -il see 4.60.
Found after verb stems in the following non-verbal specimens:
Required by kinship terms which are not preceded by a possessive pronoun. Found in various noun forms and in certain intransitive verbal units. For uses see 4.71.
The three suffixes included in this group involve characteristics of two or more of the preceding groups; their functions and their position in the form are unusually diverse.
Suffix in intransitive form V-ki (4.63), found only in 3rd. pers. sing. The few stems with suffix -ki are reduplicated. Formatives -ki-n are found after the non-verbal stem ich, and serve to convert it into an intransitive verb stem.
Affixed to a transitive or intransitive stem in form
V-aan-PB, which is roughly comparable in function to the
English past participle (4.53). Variants of
-aan are: -an (or infrequently
-aan), which usually occurs when this suffix is
unaccented, and -en (after kim, 'die'). With
the stem bin, 'go', -aan is preceded by
-ah; with a few polysyllabic stems -aan is
preceded by -n-ah; and in certain uses -aan is
followed by -ak or -t-ak (4.49).
In a number of specimens -aan or -an
is a component of non-verbal forms and in many cases is apparently
equivalent to a noun suffix; by addition of a suffix of Group 2 (3.22
ff.), certain of these forms are converted into verbal stems.
When -an is followed by formative -s (3.25), -an-s serves to convert the
intransitive stem alkab, 'run', into a transitive
stem.
Suffix in intransitive or passive form PA V-(a)l. The
verb stem is always simple. Omission of -(a)l or
substitution of -el is
observed in intransitive specimens after certain stems (3.53, 3.57). In
passive forms, the stem vowel is usually doubled and the accent is on
the stem.
Suffix -(a)l is also found in intransitive forms
S-(a)l-ak-PB and V-(a)l-PB, which are
comparable in function to V-aan-PB (4.49, 4.52).
A number of stems, many of which are intransitive verbs, are converted
into nouns and other non-verbal forms by means of -(a)l (4.52). Certain nouns with suffix -(a)l
occur as stems of intransitive verbs of the V-n-ah
conjugation (3.53) or, without other formatives, as
transitive stems.
The most common verbal formulas are:
Usage Class (Cf. 2.17) |
Transitive |
Intransitive |
Passive |
---|---|---|---|
AHAB |
t-PA V-ah |
V-PB |
V-ab |
IKAL |
PA V-ik |
PA V-(a)l |
PA V-(aa)l |
k-IKAL |
k-PA V-ik |
k-PA V-(a)l |
k-PA V-(aa)l |
NULLAK |
PA V-(e) |
V-(a)k-PB |
PA V-(aa)k |
Examples
with al, 'say'; han, 'eat'; k'ub,
'deliver' (3rd. pers. sing.) | |||
AHAB |
tu yaalah |
han |
k'ubab |
IKAL |
u yaalik | u hanal |
u k'uubul |
k-IKAL |
ku yaalik | ku hanal |
ku k'uubul |
NULLAK |
u yaale | hanak |
k'uubuk |
Variants represented by these formulas are:
PA V-(e): |
PA V-null or PA V-e |
PA V-(a)l: |
PA V-(a)l when V is a simple stem. PA V-al when V is a composite stem. |
V-(a)k-PB: |
V-(a)k-PB when V is a simple stem. V-ak-PB when V is a composite stem. |
PA V-(aa)l: |
PA V(doubled stem vowel)-(a)l for simple stems. PA V-aal for monosyllabic composite stems. PA V-al for polysyllabic composite stems. |
V-(aa)k-PB: |
V(doubled stem vowel)-(a)k-PB for simple stems. V-aak-PB for monosyllabic composite stems. V-ak-PB for polysyllabic composite stems. |
The k-IKAL forms differ from the IKAL forms only with respect to the preceding k (4.27). In certain uses the NULLAK forms are preceded by ka (4.37). IKAL forms are usually preceded by a cooperant such as tan (4.14), ts'ook (4.15), or yan (4.18).
The PA of an intransitive IKAL form is omitted when the form follows another verbal construction with a pronoun (PA or PB) of the same person. PA is more frequently omitted than employed in IKAL forms which follow (1) ma, negative sign (4.24); (2) koox or kone'x (4.21); (3) a pronoun of Class C (4.25). IKAL and k-IKAL forms used in relative clauses are found without PA after max, 'who' and baax, 'what' (4.34). The pronoun u is often omitted in IKAL and transitive NULLAK forms when the verb stem begins with a vowel and the form is preceded by u ti’al (4.23, 4.41). Occasional omission of PA is observed in IKAL forms preceded by tan (4.41), ts'ook (4.15), and hoop' (4.17); about half of these specimens are omissions of u before verb stems which begin with a vowel.
With the exception of composite intransitive stems with -pa-h or -k'a-h (3.37), each of the composite intransitive stems is conjugated in accordance with one of the following conjugations which are irregular with respect to the verbal formulas just described. Whereas transitive composite stems retain the same suffix of Group 2 in all conjugations and in nearly all instances are conjugated regularly, the primary characteristic of all the intransitive composites except the V-n-ah conjugation is the alternation of formative -t in the IKAL forms with other formatives.
Typical examples (3rd. pers. sing.):
AHAB |
IKAL |
NULLAK |
|
V-ah-PB |
PA V-t-al |
V-ak-PB |
Stem |
---|---|---|---|
kul-ah chil-ah wal-ah |
u kul-t-al u chil-t-al u wal-t-al |
kul-ak chil-ak wal-ak |
kul, 'sit down' chil, 'lie down' wal, 'stand up' |
Classed in this group but occurring predominantly or exclusively in
the V-ah-PB form: yab, 'be many';
maalob, 'get well'; pen, 'get busy';
suk, 'get in the habit of'; wiy, 'be hungry';
uk', 'be thirsty'; xan, 'be delayed',
xol, 'kneel'. For the V-ah-PB form for
yan, 'be', and paht, 'be possible', see 3.58 and 3.55 respectively.
With some stems, both V-ah-PB and V-h-PB
forms are found; with others, only the elided form occurs;
uk'ahen, uk'hen, 'I was thirsty';
wiyhen, 'I was hungry'.
In our sampling, only three verbs fall in this classification; examples (3rd. pers. sing.):
AHAB |
IKAL |
NULLAK |
|
V-l-ah-PB |
PA V-t-al |
V-l-ak-PB |
Stem |
---|---|---|---|
hek-l-ah kux-l-ah ch'uy-l-ah |
hek-t-al kux-t-al ch'uy-t-al |
hek-l-ak kux-l-ak ch'uy-l-ak |
hek, 'ride' kux, 'live' ch'uy, 'hang' |
Typical examples (3rd. pers. sing.):
AHAB |
IKAL |
NULLAK |
|
V-n-ah-PB |
PA V |
V-n-ak-PB |
Stem |
---|---|---|---|
al-kab-n-ah sut-n-ah segir-n-ah |
u al-kab u sut u segir |
al-kab-n-ak sut-n-ak segir-n-ak |
alkab, 'run' sut, 'return' segir, 'continue' |
Other stems with V-n-ah forms include: awat, 'cry out'; hayab, 'yawn'; heetsim, 'sneeze'; hum, 'make noise'; keb, 'belch'; meˈjah, 'work'; ok'ol, 'cry'; ok'ot, 'dance'; sit', 'jump'; tul, 'sprout'; uk'ul, 'drink'; wix, 'urinate'; ximba, 'stroll, visit'; chak, 'shake off'; cheeh, 'laugh'; ch'eneb, 'pry'; k'ai, 'sing'; k'ilkab, 'sweat'; k'op, 'knock'. Most polysyllabic stems and all Spanish words used as intransitive verbs are conjugated by means of the V-n-ah forms. In the PA V form, verb stems ending in a vowel are followed by -l: u tsikbal, 'he conversed'; tsik-ba-l; -ba (3.30); -l (3.34). A few k-PA V forms were found: kin yalkab, 'I will run'; k-in y-al-kab.
Typical examples (3rd. pers. sing.):
AHAB |
IKAL |
NULLAK |
|
V-cha-h-PB |
PA V-t-al |
V-cha-h-ak-PB | Stem |
---|---|---|---|
ak'-ab-cha-h kal-cha-h sas-cha-h |
u y-ak'-ab-t-al u kal-t-al u sas-t-al |
ak'-ab-cha-h-ak kal-cha-h-ak sas-cha-h-ak |
ak'ab, 'get dark' kal, 'get drunk' sas, 'become dawn' |
Other stems in this group, most of which occur with or without formatives as adjectives or nouns, include: ayik'al, 'get rich'; al, 'get heavy'; nach, 'go far'; nohoch, 'become large'; chichan, 'get small'; k'ohaan, 'get sick'. These verbs as well as certain stems in the V-ah forms, indicate entrance into a state or condition. Some stems have interchangeable V-ah and V-cha-h forms: yabhi, yabchahi, 'there came to be many'; yanhi, yanchahi, 'it came to pass' (3.58); xanhi, xanchahi, 'there was delay'.
Verbs conjugated exclusively in the 3rd. pers. sing. include: k'abet, 'be necessary'; hoop', 'begin'; uch, 'happen'; paht, 'succeed'. Forms for these verbs are:
The following transitive verb stems are found without verbal suffix: k'at, 'want'; ohel, 'know (something)'; k'ahol, 'know (a person)'. Typical paradigm:
PA V |
in k'at, 'I want (wanted, will want) it' a k'at u k'at k k'at, k k'ate'x a k'ate'x u k'ato'b |
Exceptional V-aan examples were observed for k'ahol and o'hel; e.g., ma ohelaan, 'it is not known'. Regular transitive verbs with these stems are: k'at, 'ask'; ohelt, 'find out'; k'aholt, 'recognize (a person)'.
The stems tal, 'come', and man, 'pass' are typical of stems which are conjugated regularly except in forms PA V-(a)l and k-PA V-(a)l, where -(a)l is omitted or, in archaic speech, is replaced by -el.
The plan of this part is to some extent like that of a dictionary.
The chief aim here, as in a dictionary, is to indicate in
each entry what is referred to by a certain symbol in the various kinds
of contexts in which it occurs. The symbols in the present case are
mainly the constructions described in Part 3. Regardless of how diverse
the uses of one of these constructions may be with respect to
grammatical or semantic categories, they will be treated as
subdivisions of a single topic; the topic being simply how the
construction is used.
Since a label has been provided for each of the constructions dealt
with, it would have been possible to arrange the entries
alphabetically; but it has seemed preferable to adopt a plan that seems
to make increasingly easy the task of analyzing the examples of each
usage. Relying, let us say, on the pedagogical effect of repetition and
prior explanation, the comment on the analysis of the examples will be
increasingly brief.
In order to guard at least to some extent against vagueness and
ambiguity, some neologisms are made use of in various instances in
which the current technical or ordinary expressions seem to the author
to be particularly inadequate. We proceed to indicate what will be
referred to by the neologisms which will be needed most frequently.
Others will be explained where they occur for the first time.
We need to refer by a single term to whatever is signified at least by the verbs of the languages which are now said to have verbs. Such a term will relieve us of the task of deciding in some cases whether one should say, for example, the action signified by this verb, or the state (or condition, or relation) signified by this verb. We mention this difficulty only by way of illustration. It is by no means the only one involved in the uses of such expressions as action, state, relation, state of being ..., etc. To evade in these pages some of these difficulties, the term 'occurrent' will be used. By this term we will refer to whatever can truthfully or otherwise be said to be the case. Thus, we would say that at least one occurrent is referred to by each of the following sentences: You are sick, He is taller than you, Oxygen is a gas, It may rain tomorrow, He believed it, The Earth is flat, Caesar murdered Brutus. The question of distinguishing what is said to be a single occurrent from what is said to be more than one will be dealt with below (4.5).
Because of the difficulties pointed out in Note
7, it has seemed advisable not to employ the usual terms tense and aspect
in this discussion of Yucatec usage. We propose to rely on the terms
introduced below. To facilitate their introduction, let us first agree
upon the conventions we proceed to explain. The expression datable interval
will be used (as is frequently done at present) to refer to a period of
time specifiable, or assumed to be specifiable, with respect to a local
time by an expression of this form: 'From t1; to
t2', or, as we shall write hereafter, 't
1-t2'. The numerical order indicated by the
subscripts affixed to t will
stand for chronologic order. Thus, if we say that t1 -
t2 is datable interval of event E1, and
t3 - t4 is the datable interval of event
E2, then it can be inferred that E1 occurred
before E2. Also, given events E1, E2,
whose respective datable intervals are t1 - t4,
t2 - t3, the subscripts indicate that
E1; began to occur before E2, and came to an end
after the end of the occurrence of E2. Similarly, the datable
intervals of overlapping occurrences can be specified thus:
t1 - t3, t2 - t5,
t4 - t7, t6 - t8. It may not
be superfluous to remark that t1 - t2, for
example, can stand for an ordinary time specification such as At five o'clock, as well as for a
time specified as From 5:00 to
5:30 (Note 8). Of course, in either case it
is understood that the specification refers to one or two dates; viz.,
At 5 o'clock a.m. on July 4, 1940,
A.D.; From 5 o'clock p.m. on July 4, 1918 to 5:30 a.m. on March 3, 1930.
To avoid prolixity, and to guard against certain ambiguities in the use
of the word during,
it will be convenient sometimes to say that an occurrent "occupies" a
datable interval, taking advantage of the common practice of using the
same terms for time and space in various expressions. Thus, speaking of
a given occurrent, O1;
occupied t1; - t2, which will be equivalent
to saying O1; began to
occur at t1; and its occurrence ended at
t2.
The time from which a datable interval is reckoned will be said to be
its 'initial limit'; and the time up to which it is reckoned will be
said to be its 'terminal limit'. E.g.: the initial limit of
t4 - t5 is t4 and its terminal limit is
t5.
Let 't1 - t4' stand for any given datable
interval. Any datable interval included in t1 - t4
will be said to be a segment of t1 - t4. For
example, t1 - t2, t2 - t3,
t3 - t4 are three segments of t1 -
t4. Two datable intervals will be said to be 'contemporary'
if they have at least one segment in common. Thus, t1 -
t3 is contemporary with t2 - t4 and
t1 - t4 is contemporary with t2 -
t3.
If two datable intervals are not contemporary they will be said to be
'mutually exclusive'. The terms 'prior' and 'subsequent' will be used
to specify the chronologic position of two mutually exclusive intervals
with respect to each other. Accordingly, given t1 -
t2 and t3 - t4, we will say either that
t1 - t2 is prior to t3 - t4
or that t3 - t4 is subsequent to t1 -
t2.
A given datable interval with respect to which the chronologic position
of another is specified in a given instance will be said to be the
'time-index' in that particular specification. Thus, given t1
- t2, t3 - t4; if we choose to say that
t1 - t2 is prior to t3 - t4,
then t3 - t4 is the time-index of that
specification; and if we say that t3 - t4 is
subsequent to t1 - t2, then t1 -
t2 is the chosen time-index. The terms prior, subsequent, and contemporary,
employed in the senses above specified, will be useful in our
discussions of Yucatec usage. For it so happens that some Yucatec
constructions definitely indicate that the reference is to an occurrent
whose datable interval is prior, or contemporary, or subsequent (as the
case may be) with respect to a particular time-index; but they do not
indicate whether that time-index is a present time, or a past, or a
future time. Hence, the terms past, present,
future are not adequate to
specify the distinctions which govern the uses of those constructions.
We all know that a given time can be asserted to be past, or present,
or future, only with respect to the very moment in which the assertion
is made. That moment is the time-index with respect to which the
speaker or writer specifies the chronologic position of the interval he
refers to as being present, or past, or future, as the case may be.
Such a time-interval will be called 'cardinal time'. From the
foregoing, it may readily be inferred that with respect to a given
cardinal time, 'CT', a past time is an interval which is prior to 'CT';
a future time is an interval subsequent to 'CT'; and a present time, at
least so far as ordinary communication is concerned, is an interval
contemporary with 'CT'. Of course, the terms prior, subsequent, and contemporary are equivalent to past, future,
and present, respectively, only
when the time-index is a cardinal time.
In some chronologic specifications, two time-indices are made use of: a cardinal time and another time-index which will be said to be 'supplementary'. In the following diagram, the lines representing the intervals are labeled thus: 'C', cardinal time; 'S', supplementary time-index; 'GI', the given interval whose chronologic position is specified either with respect to 'C' only, or with respect to both 'C' and 'S'. Under the heading Designations we list the terms which will be used when the chronologic position of 'GI' is specified as indicated in the diagram.
DESIGNATIONS |
CHRONOLOGIC POSITIONS OF GI | |
1. |
Discrete-Past |
GI
C t1 -------- t2 t3 -------- t4 |
2. |
Present |
GI t1 ------------ t4 t2 ------- t3 C |
3. |
Discrete-Future |
C
GI t1 -------- t2 t3 -------- t4 |
4. |
Prior-Past |
GI
S
C t1 -------- t2 t3 -------- t4 t5 -------- t6 |
5. |
Contemporary-Past |
GI
C t1 ------------ t4 t5 -------- t6 t2 ------- t3 S |
6. |
Subsequent-Past |
S
GI
C t1 -------- t2 t3 -------- t4 t5 -------- t6 |
7. |
Prior-Future |
C
GI
S t1 -------- t2 t3 -------- t4 t5 -------- t6 |
8. |
Contemporary-Future |
C
GI
t1 -------- t2 t3 ------------ t6 t4------- t5 S |
In cases 2, 5, and 8, the diagram represents only one of the
possibilities to which the term contemporary
applies, as previously defined (4.3). This omission
has been made only
for the sake of simplicity, and not to signify that the terms contemporary-past, present and contemporary-future
do not apply in any other instance in which 'GI' is contemporary with
'C', or with 'S'. The following are examples of chronologic
specifications illustrating the eight cases represented in the diagram:
1, He did it; 2, He is doing it; 3, He will do it; 4, He had done it; 5, He was doing it; 6, (He said) he would do it the next
day; 7, He will have done
it; 8, He will be doing
it.
It may not be superfluous to remark that each of the sentences 4, 5, 7,
and 8 depends on its context for the specification of its supplementary
time-index. For example, referring to an occurrent occupying
t1 - t2, we may say at a cardinal time
t5 - t6 either He did it or He had
done it. If we say He had done
it, we expect that in the discoursive or circumstantial context
of that sentence an interval t3 - t4 (or an
occurrent occupying t3 - t4)
has been spoken of. Suppose N meets M on the street, and the first
thing he says to M is; "Your uncle had arrived." If we assume that N
conforms to English habits of speech, we expect that M and N had
previously discussed the question of whether or not M's uncle had
arrived before something else (x) occurred. Hence, the time of the
occurrence of 'x' is the supplementary time-index in "Your uncle had
arrived." Needless to say, the foregoing (4.4) does
not provide for all
the possibilities concerning chronologic specifications; nor even for
some which are distinguished in various languages. The aim has been
simply to provide for those which have to be dealt with in the present
discussion of Yucatec usage.
It will occasionally be convenient to
use the terms 'past' and 'future' unqualified, and in their ordinary
senses. In such cases past will
apply to any time prior to the cardinal time; and future to Cases 7 and 8, and any
other time subsequent to the cardinal time.
Since the difference between the chronologic position of an occurrent
and the chronologic position of the datable interval it occupies is
purely verbal, it will not be ambiguous, and it will often be
convenient, to specify the chronologic position of an occurrent by
means of the designation that is applicable to the datable interval it
occupies. Thus, the expression a
contemporary-past occurrent will be equivalent to an occurrent which is said to occupy a
datable interval whose chronologic position is specified as being
contemporary-past
(Cases 5 in the above diagram). The same will hold for the rest of the
eight chronologic specifications for which special terms were provided
above.
To delimit the uses of some Yucatec constructions, a distinction must be made between a reference to a single occurrent and a reference to what will be called a 'multiple occurrent'. Let us compare these two statements: He is smoking a cigar (at this very moment), He smokes cigars. We readily see that the second statement refers to more than one occurrent of the sort referred to by the first; and that in the first only one occurrent of that sort is referred to. Of course, what is one occurrent, or more than one, is to be determined in each case on the basis of particular words, expressions, or other symbols of particular languages. With regard to this distinction, the consideration that there may be no event which is not divisible into two or more is irrelevant. The instances that concern us are those in which the linguistic habits of a given people are such that they indicate when they refer to a single occurrent of the sort which they designate by a given symbol, and when they refer to more than one occurrent of the same sort. In the latter case, we will say that they refer to a 'multiple occurrent'. It may be mentioned here that the terms introduced above (4.4) are adequate to specify the chronologic positions of multiple occurrents. Take, for example, the statement He used to get up early. Here, the multiple occurrent consists of an undetermined number of occurrents each one of which is an instance in which a certain individual got up at a certain time evaluated by someone as being early. Let t1 - t2 be the datable interval of the first of those instances; and let tm - tn be that of the last one. Accordingly, the datable interval of the multiple occurrent is t1 - tn. We can deal with the interval t1 - tn exactly as we have dealt above with others, without regard to whether they delimited one or more than one event.
To discuss the uses of some Yucatec constructions, several kinds of references to multiple occurrents have to be distinguished. At this point we shall take account of the two kinds which have to be dealt with most frequently. They are: (Kind A) references to occurrents which are said to take place on a single occasion; and (Kind B) references to occurrents which are said to take place on more than one occasion. Any reference of Kind A, and any reference to a single occurrent will be said to be 'monochronic'. References of Kind B will be said to be 'polychronic'. It may be obvious that the question of what is one occasion, and not more than one, is mainly a discoursive matter. The distinction cannot rest exclusively on a description of the occurrents themselves; for that which may be one occasion with respect to the theme of a given discourse, can be more than one with respect to the theme of another. One must, therefore, depend on the context of each reference to decide whether the reference is monochronic or polychronic. As one would naturally expect, contexts are not always unambiguous with regard to this distinction. In the samplings of Yucatec discourse at our disposal, the context has been ambiguous in approximately 18% of the cases in which it was necessary to decide whether or not the use of a given construction depended on the distinction in question. Clear cases of polychronic references occurred in descriptions (a) of customs, (b) of habits of a single individual, (c) of procedures in hunting, cooking, agricultural techniques, and the like; and (d) in generalizations concerning diseases, the weather, properties of bodies, and various occurrents other than human or animal behavior. Common instances of monochronic references to multiple occurrents are: (a) those in which two or more individuals collaborate in the performance of a task, or two or more agencies, other than individuals, are factors in the production of a given result; e.g. They fetched firewood to cook the turkey, The pigs have ruined my garden; (b) those in which two or more occurrents of the same designational class (i.e., referred to by the same word) take place contemporaneously, or during an interval spoken of; e.g., When I passed by the house, they were drinking chocolate, The day the Quintana Roo Indians attacked the town of Chemax, they burned many houses, and took away all the horses and pigs they found. Frequent instances of monochronic references are also those which are distinguished in Yucatec by the use of reduplication and duplication (4.69). These two devices are generally employed to refer to a more or less rapid repetition of an action by a single individual, or by each of a number of individuals, aiming in either case to accomplish a single result. For example, aiming to scare away an animal that has entered a cornfield, a single individual, or each of two or more individuals in collaboration, repeatedly throws stones at it till the animal is beyond reach or out of sight. In such a case, the monochronic reference in Yucatec can be simply ch'inch'inaabi, which is approximately equivalent to 'It was stoned'.
One of the most pervasive items of discourse in oral and written
communication is that which we propose to call 'declarative modality'.
One expects to find means of indicating declarative modality in the
language of any people who may not be entirely unconcerned with whether
what they are told is true or not; and in the language of any people
who may not be thoroughly conditioned to speak only when they are sure
that what they say is true. The 'declarative modality' of a statement,
or of a part of a statement, is the 'declarative value' which the one
who makes the statement ascribes to it. An individual ascribes a
'declarative value' to his statement if explicitly or otherwise he
communicates (a) that what he says is true, or (b) that he is sure, or
that he is not sure, that what he says is true, or (c) that he does not
know whether it is true or not, or (d) that he does not commit himself
as to whether he knows or not that it is true, or that it may be
true.
It may be noted here that the term 'declarative value' is not
synonymous with the term 'truth-value' employed in contemporary logic.
The latter, as the author understands it, refers to the validity of a
statement as determined by corroboration or by rules of valid
inference. Truth-value, thus understood, is entirely irrelevant to our
application of the term 'declarative value'. Whether or not an
individual
vouches for the truth of his statement, and whether or not his
statement is true are obviously entirely different questions. It may
also be obvious that the term 'declarative modality' is not synonymous
with the term 'mode', or, as some grammarians prefer to say, 'mood'.
When either of these grammatical terms is used to refer to that which a
given linguistic device signifies, it can happen in some instances that
what the device signifies is the declarative modality of a statement.
But when the term 'mode' or 'mood' is used to refer to a class of
devices, then mood and declarative modality are at least as different
as a knife and a cut made with a knife. The kind of device has nothing
to do with whether that which it signifies in a given instance is to be
classed as a declarative modality. To illustrate the difference between
mode and declarative modality let us compare these four statements:
He is sick, I think he is sick, Perhaps he is sick, They say he is sick.
If we are not mistaken, most grammarians agree that no other than the
indicative mode or mood is used in each of those sentences. We agree
with them, if it is understood that in this instance the term
'indicative mood' is the name of a class of English devices. Now,
attending not to the devices but to what is communicated by them in
those four instances, we would say the following: Assuming a certain
context and a certain intonation for each of those four sentences, it
can be inferred that four different declarative values are therein
ascribed to the expression he is
sick
by the individual or individuals who made those statements. Of course,
it
is rarely, if ever, justifiable to speak with confidence about what is
signified by a given written sentence without context. Even the
grammarian who claims to understand the term 'mode' as being the name
of a form of the verb has to depend occasionally on the context of a
sentence to determine in what mode its verb is there used. For example,
that would have to be done before one can decide whether in the
sentence You may go the verb
go
is in the imperative mode or in some other mode. We do not propose to
enumerate the many Yucatec words and other devices which serve to
indicate differences of declarative modality. But such differences will
have to be taken into account when dealing with frequent uses of some
devices. To take account of those differences it will not be necessary
to provide a scale of declarative values. It will be adequate to our
aim to specify that a higher declarative value is ascribed to the
statement by using a certain device than by using another. It may be
clear that higher and lower refer respectively to degrees
of certainty and uncertainty. The declarative values which fall under
specifications c and
d in the above
definition can be said to be 'undetermined'.
In Yucatec, as in other languages, two constructions which seem to
be equivalent may differ with respect to the contexts in which they
occur. Both may serve to communicate the same items of information, but
one occurs chiefly or exclusively when one of the items of information
happens to be of special concern at a certain point in the course of
the narrative or dialogue, or circumstances to which the utterance is
relevant. In such cases the construction may conveniently be said to
distinguish the topic in question from others touched upon in the same
sentence. This will be called 'topical distinction'. The devices thus
employed will be said to distinguish the 'dominant' topic from the
'incidental' topics or items of information. Topical distinction is
commonly effected in English by pronouncing some components of the
utterance with more emphasis than others. Emphasis thus understood
seems frequently to go together with whatever other device indicates
topical distinction. But, as is well-known, in some languages emphasis
alone, without the use of special wording or construction is not
employed as freely as in English. In fact, if differences in emphasis
were estimated in terms of acoustic intensity, it is possible that in
some languages the word or words referring to the dominant topic are in
some instances uttered with less emphasis than some other component of
the sentence. I can adduce no experimental data in support of this
conjecture, but the ear may be trusted sufficiently to conclude from a
study of our phonographic records of Yucatec discourse that it should
not be taken for granted that acoustic emphasis and topical distinction
are inseparable.
To illustrate what is referred to by saying that
wording or construction or both can indicate topical distinction, let
us compare these two sentences: I saw
him yesterday, I am the one who
saw him yesterday.
Assuming that both statements were made by the same person, and that
both are about a single instance in which that person saw a certain
individual on the day there referred to as yesterday,
those two statements are equipollent (Note 9). All
the information
communicated by the first statement about the incident of seeing the
person in question is communicated also by the second statement, and
the converse is true. But it does not conform to prevalent habits of
English-speaking people to use the second sentence in all the contexts
in which the first can occur. One expects at least that when the second
sentence occurs, the topic of seeing the individual referred to has been
previously spoken of. A similar topical distinction could be made by
uttering the first sentence with an emphatic I.
What is known about topical distinction hardly goes beyond the
unreliable rationalizations of the native speaker. All that seems
justifiable to say with respect to the above sentences is that the
second has a narrower range of application than the first, and that
topical distinction accounts at least in part for its narrower range.
That is as far as we propose to deal with the subject of topical
distinction in Yucatec, and only when topical distinction accounts for
the apparently exceptional uses of some constructions.
As already stated (3.49), the constructions referred to by the label AHAB are t-PA V-ah, transitive; V-PB, intransitive; and V-ab, passive. The uses of these constructions will be divided into three classes hereafter referred to as 'Usage A', 'Usage B', and 'Usage C'. The most frequent usage of each of these three constructions is Usage A. Usage B is observed in certain kinds of conditional sentences. Usage C can justifiably be said to be exceptional; for only one verb (al, 'say, tell') has been found so used. The fact that Usage A and Usage B are served by the three constructions is the basic for grouping them under one heading. The choice of one or another of the three is determined by what the terms transitive, intransitive, and passive indicate with reference to Yucatec (Cf. introduction to Part 2). Since the passive V-ab differs in at least two respects from the passive voice devices of other languages, special attention will be given to it below (4.10).
Usage A is identifiable by these two specifications: (a) the reference is
monochronic (4.6), and (b)
the chronologic position of the occurrent is discrete-past (4.4, Case
1). Those two specifications hold for each of 86% of the instances in
which the AHAB-constructions were used in the specimens of discourse
recorded. In an additional 2% of the cases, specification (b)
applies definitely, but it is not clear that only one occasion is
referred to. Nevertheless, it is certain that what is spoken of in
those doubtful cases is not a custom, or the habitual behavior of an
individual. The only exceptions to the rule that the AHAB-constructions
are not used in reference to customary action are those dealt with
below (4.11). From the foregoing remarks it may
readily be gathered
that these constructions are frequently used where other languages
ordinarily employ one of the tenses or other devices called in
different grammars simple past,
or past definite, preterit, aorist, or past tense-
momentaneous aspect.
Examples of Usage A, construction t-PA
V-ah with simple V-unit
Examples of Usage A, construction V-PB with simple V-unit
Examples of Usage A, constructions t-PA V-ah and V-PB, with miscellaneous V-units. Some of the examples illustrate the use of pronouns of Class B as grammatical objects (2.5) in construction t-PA V-ah
The discoursive uses of this construction and those of the past tenses of what is called 'passive voice' in the grammars of various languages have much in common. Nevertheless, due to the lack of adequate statement as to what is expected to distinguish that which is to be called 'passive voice' from that which is to be named otherwise, there seems to be at present no way of determining whether the term is properly applied to the Yucatec construction in question. If one of the requirements in the application of this term is that the grammatical subject of what is termed 'passive voice' be the so-called 'logical object' in a corresponding active voice construction, then the term is not applicable in this case. Take, for example, the sentences tu yilahen in watan, 'my wife saw me'; and ilaaben tu men in watan, which is equivalent to 'I was seen by my wife'. One notices that the person who was seen is referred to in both sentences by the pronoun -en. The same holds for the indirect object. Thus, the person to whom something was told is referred to by tie’ in these two sentences: ka tu yaalah tie’ bin u kah u beete ('and he said to him that he was going to do it'), and ka aalab tie’ bin u kah u beete. To translate the latter sentence in conformity with English usage, one must render tie’ by a subject pronoun: 'And he was told that he was going to do it'. Rendering tie’ by an indirect object, one would have to say 'And it was said to him that he was going to do it'. However, such a Yucatec sentence very frequently occurs in contexts in which the English passive voice would not be used. The above example, and numerous others with the same construction, occur in reports of dialogues of this form: 'He told his brother that it was necessary to do it, and he (his brother) said to him that he was going to do it.' The italicized portion of this sentence is the translation of the above V-ab construction which in other contexts could adequately be rendered by the English passive. Thus, the V-ab construction and the passive voice of other languages differ both with regard to the conversion of grammatical object into grammatical subject, and with regard to usage. What they have in common may be loosely indicated on the basis of the following statements concerning the passive voice in the most commonly known European languages. (a) Given a non-passive sentence, S1, whose main verb is used transitively therein, it is possible to construct a passive sentence, S2, such that S1 and S2 be equipollent (see Note 9). Example: He saw her, She was seen by him. (b) Given a non-passive sentence, S1, which satisfies the conditions already stated, it is possible to construct a passive sentence, S3, such that all the information communicated by S1 is communicated by S3, save the specification of the subject of S1. Example: My uncle gave me this watch yesterday, This watch was given to me yesterday. Of those two sorts are the correspondences observed between the Yucatec constructions t-PA V-ah and V-ab, with this qualification: V-ab cannot be converted into t-PA V-ah when the agent is not known. Thus, whereas in English the passive My hat was stolen can at least in some contexts be replaced by Someone stole my hat, in Modern Yucatec there seems to be no t-PA V-ah construction which can replace V-ab in the sentence oklab in p'ok ('my hat was stolen'), when the speaker claims not to know who committed the theft. Those instances offer no difficulty, but for all others the data at our disposal are insufficient to infer with certainty under what circumstances construction V-ab, and not t-PA V-ah, occurs in Modern Yucatec discourse. As is probably the case also with regard to the uses of the passive voice in other languages, some individuals employ one of these two kinds of constructions much more frequently than others. This statement rests on the results of a special study of contexts whose differences can hardly be the determinants of the use of either of the two constructions in question, and the contexts, therefore, were in this study assumed to be comparable. It is, of course, from the context that one would expect to derive the information necessary to disclose what determines the occurrence of construction V-ab. In the specimens of discourse available to us, such information could be inferred with certainty in only 53% of the total number of instances in which construction V-ab occurred. In 79% of the cases in which the contextual circumstances were thus favorable, the following was observed: (a) the identity of the agent of the action referred to by the V-ab construction is unknown to the speaker; or (b) the dominant topic is the action which was performed, or whether it was performed or not, rather than who performed it; or (c) the speaker serves some personal interest by not disclosing the identity of the one who performed the action. Under a we class chiefly the instances in which the Yucatec sentence can be rendered by the English active voice by using such expressions as someone, somebody to refer to the agent of the action. Typical examples of the instances classed under b are answers to questions such as Did you (plural) give him the money?, in which cases the V-ab construction frequently occurs: ts'aabi, literally, 'It was given', or, as one would more likely say in English, 'We did', or simply, 'Yes'. In such a cases, the one who thus replies may, or may not, be the particular member of the group addressed who performed the act of handing the money. As a matter of fact, in some contexts it is justifiable to interpret the question as being equivalent to Has the money been given to him?, since no information is requested as to which of the individuals addressed was the one who delivered the money. As may be readily seen, specifications a and c cannot apply in instances in which the agent of the action is explicitly referred to in the sentence in which construction V-ab occurs. Such explicit references are always introduced by the expression tu men, which in this case performs the same discoursive office as the English word by when the latter introduces the agent of the passive voice. In other cases (4.52), tu men is equivalent to because, or due to, on account of, on behalf of, etc. Specification b applies clearly in many instances in which explicit reference to the agent is made by means of the expression tu men, but in many others it would be arbitrary to infer that the specification of the agent is a less dominant topic than the occurrence of the action. Moreover, the agent is clearly an incidental topic (4.8) in many cases in which t-PA V-ah occurs. Apparently, it is at least as difficult to specify what determines the use of construction V-ab as it is to specify what determines the uses of the passive voice in all the instances in which it occurs in English and in other languages. For obvious reasons, it has seemed desirable to include in the notes to the following examples some information concerning the context in which each sentence occurs.
Examples of Usage A, construction V-ab
Examples of Usage A, with V-components of Spanish origin in the three AHAB-constructions. The formatives -t and -n (3.24, 3.26) are affixed to the infinitive of the Spanish verb, or to a Spanish noun used verbally in Yucatec. In conformity with the general use of these formatives in the AHAB-constructions, -n followed by -ah (3.53) occurs in the intransitive construction V-PB and -t is used in the two transitive constructions t-PA V-ah and V-ab.
The three AHAB-constructions occur in protases of conditional sentences of these three kinds: (a) Reference to a contingency concerning a paticular occurrence; e.g., If you find it, bring it to me. (b) Inference from an assumption concerning a particular past occurrent; e.g., If (it is true that) it happened, then ... (c) Generalizations in descriptions of customs, rituals, or technological procedures. The sentences under c can be said to be conditional only in consideration of the circumstance that their construction, and the components of their construction, do not differ from those of true conditional sentences (4.35, 4.44). Their referential usage, however, is obviously quite different. The assertion in such sentences is of this form: Whenever x is the case, one does so-and-so; but the wording is comparable to that of the English sentence If x happens to be the case, one does so-and-so (habitually). Thus, Usage B differs from Usage A (4.9) in at least these two respects: in Usage B, (a) an AHAB-construction refers in some cases to a future occurrent; and (b) the reference in other cases is not exclusively to a particular occurrent, or to a single occasion; whereas in Usage A a particular past occurrent, or a past occasion, is referred to. Common to the two usages is the circumstance that the reference is monochronic (4.6).
Examples of Usage B, constructions t-PA V-ah, V-ab, and V-PB
Usage C has been observed in only 18 instances, 5 of which were found in speech of Type A. The specifications of this usage are as follows: (a) construction t-PA V-ah is used in expression tu yaalah to refer to a future occurrent; (b) the occurrent is referred to in a temporal clause conforming to the formula le ka ... -e’ (4.62); and (c) the reference made by the temporal clause is of either of these two forms: By the time x occurs, (such-and-such will be the case) or Soon after x may begin to take place, (do so-and-so). Temporal clauses with the same construction and the same use of the expression tu yaalah can refer also to past sequences of this sort: By the time x occurred, y had already taken place. Of course, such references to the past do not concern us here, since they are common instances of Usage A (4.9). Reference to a future occurrent by means of an AHAB-construction is observed both in Usage B and Usage C; but, so far as our observations go, it is only in Usage C that an AHAB-construction does not occur exclusively in monochronic references (4.6). The peculiar use of the expression tu yaalah in the temporal clauses under consideration may perhaps be difficult to understand for one who is not acquainted with a very similar idiom frequently employed in the colloquial Spanish of Yucatan and in that of other Spanish-speaking countries. We refer to the use of decir, 'to say or tell', in such sentences as, Cuando dijo a llover, ya estábamos llegando. This is popularly understood as a personification of this sort: When it said "Rain!", we were almost there. The personified subject is variously supposed to be 'nature' or 'the rain' itself. On the basis of this interpretation, the personified subject either orders the rain to come down resolutely, or the rain says to itself "Let's go!" and it pours down. Freely rendered, the Spanish sentence is approximately equivalent to: By the time it began to rain hard, we were almost there. Similarly, one hears in Modern Yucatec le ka tu yaalah u k'axal hae’, ts'ook in k'uchul, a literal translation of which can be: 'When it said that water was pouring, I had already arrived', or, in reference to the future, 'By the time it will say that water is pouring, I shall have arrived'. The analysis of tu yaalah is as follows: t-u y-al-ah, constr. t-PA V-ah; al, 'say, tell'; y- required by pronoun u ('he, she, it') before initial vowel.
Examples of usage C
As previously indicated (3.49), the constructions referred to by the label IKAL conform to one or another of these three formulas: PA V-ik, transitive; PA V-(a)l, intransitive; and PA V-(aa)l, passive. These constructions have two kinds of discoursive offices which will be treated separately. We say that in a given sentence an IKAL-construction is a 'dependent' IKAL-construction when these two statements are true: (1) the IKAL-construction itself provides no information concerning the chronologic position (4.3) of the occurrent for which it stands; and (2) another component of the sentence provides some information concerning the chronologic position of the occurrent for which the IKAL-construction stands. If neither of those two statements is true, the IKAL-construction is said to be an 'independent' IKAL-construction. To facilitate further comment on the dependent IKAL-constructions let us consider how the following English sentences are translated into Modern Yucatec:
1. |
'I have climbed' |
ts'ook in naakal |
2. |
'I had to climb' |
yanhi in naakal |
3. |
'I certainly did not climb' |
ma tech in naakal |
4. |
'I am climbing (just now)' |
tan in naakal |
5. |
'I have to climb' |
yan in naakal |
6. |
'I need to climb' |
k'abet in naakal |
7. |
'I can not climb' |
maa tan u pahtal in naakal |
8. |
'I will certainly climb' |
he in naakale’ |
Before proceeding, it should be remarked that,
although those Yucatec sentences can be adequate translations of the
English sentences, it does not follow that the English and the Yucatec
sentences are equivalent in all contexts. For example, in different
contexts the translation of the first Yucatec sentence can be 'I had
climbed', or 'I shall have climbed', as well as 'I have climbed'. Out
of context, all that can be inferred from this Yucatec sentence with
respect to time is that the chronologic position of the occurrent
referred to by in naakal
is asserted to be prior to a time-index (4.3). To
determine whether the
time-index is a past, a present, or a future time, the context has to
be known. The unit in naakal exemplifies the
intransitive IKAL-construction PA V-(a)l. Its components
are: in, 1st. pers. pron. Class A; naak,
'climb'; -al, untranslatable component. We observe that the
occurrent referred to by the dependent unit in naakal
is a past occurrent in the first three sentences, a present occurrent
in the fourth, and a future occurrent at least in the eighth. This
dependent unit by itself conveys no chronologic information; not even
chronologic information of the sort frequently indicated by
various Yucatec devices; namely, the information that the occurrent
referred to is prior, or contemporary, or subsequent (4.3) to the
time-index indicated by the context. This dependent unit is equally
non-committal with respect to the declarative modality (4.7) of the
sentence. In all these respects it is like the English infinitive in
sentences 2, 5, and 6, above. But a better comparison would be with
what some grammarians call an 'infinitive clause'; that is, a
construction such as me to go
in He wished me to go.
Such infinitive clauses, like the dependent IKAL-constructions, can
designate not only the act, but the doer; and in both languages these
dependent units can be expanded to include any other descriptive
particulars pertaining to the act, or other kind of occurrent spoken
of; as in (I suppose) them to be
utterly ignorant of their own condition, and in several of the
Yucatec examples given below.
In most cases in which the term 'auxiliary' has been used in the
description of a language, it has been applied to one of the components
of a construction that is said to be a tense, or a mode, or a voice. In
the words of Tucker and Wallace (English Grammar,
Cambridge, England, 1917, p. 80), an auxiliary is a "verb divested of
independent meaning, and helping another verb to express tense, mood,
or voice". It may be profitable to consider whether this definition
applies to the devices on which the dependent IKAL-constructions
depend, although the notorious lack of precision in grammatical
parlance will prevent us from reaching any conclusion. To facilitate
reference, let us call co-operants the devices in question; that is,
tsook, tan, yan,
k'abet, he ... -e’,
etc. in the above examples, and others similarly used with dependent
IKAL-constructions. One of the difficulties in determining what
co-operants are auxiliaries according to the definition just quoted, is
that of deciding whether some of them can be called verbs in the sense
or senses in which the word 'verb' is generally understood. Some of the
co-operants can not be conjugated; viz.: tan (sentences 4,
7); k'abet, 'it is necessary, there was a need of',
etc. (sentence 6); he ... -e’ (8);
naapulak, 'immediately after, at once'; and
others. A few can be conjugated only in the third person singular; viz.:
hoop', 'begin'; paht, 'be possible'
(sentence 7); uch,
'happen'. At least two others can be conjugated only in the third
person when they require a dependent IKAL-construction, but they have a
different sense and can be conjugated in any person in other instances;
viz.: ts'ook (sentence 1), and yan
(sentences 2, 5). Still others are conjugated in all persons without
alteration of their general senses; viz.: kah(-s-ik) and
chun(-s-ik), both signifying 'begin', 'commence';
ch'en(-el), 'cease'; cha, 'to let or
permit someone do something, to let something happen'; il,
'to see'; ub or uy, 'to hear'; and
ohel,
'to know'. The definition quoted above specifies that an auxiliary is
"divested of independent meaning". It is difficult to see how this
applies to all the English words which those authors class as
auxiliaries. For there is no doubt that the verb to have
has a "meaning" independently of the instances in which it is said to
be an auxiliary (whether or not it is the same "meaning"), and the same
holds for to be, classed by the
authors as a voice-auxiliary. If what is asserted is that in such a
construction as I have seen it
the verb have
is "divested of independent meaning", then I must confess that I do not
know what it is that those Authors and others refer to by the word
"meaning". The qualifier 'independent' of the phrase 'independent
meaning' is more confusing than clarifying; for it can well be the case
that in most instances, if not in all, no component of a sentence can
without the aid of the other components signify precisely what it
signifies in the particular sentence and context in which it occurs.
The foregoing may have served to indicate that generalizations on the
uses of the IKAL-constructions themselves, apart from the
constructional units in which they have a dependent office, would not
be of much help in understanding Modern Yucatec discourse. It has seemed
advisable, therefore, to deal separately with each of several units of
the form Co-operant + IKAL.
These units occur with great frequency in all kinds of discourse, but
the co-operants are comparatively few.
The following observations concerning passive IKAL-construction PA
V-(aa)l (3.49) may be useful. We
questioned above (4.10) whether it was justifiable
to class construction V-ab as a passive voice. The chief
objection was the circumstance that in V-ab
there is no conversion of the so-called 'logical subject' into
'grammatical subject'. No such objection can be raised in this case.
Let us compare these four sentences: 1. tu bisahech
teelo’, 'He took you there'. 2.
bisaabech teelo’, 'You were
taken there'. 3. tan a bisaal teelo’,
'You are (were) being taken there'. 4. tan a bisik
teelo’,
'You are (were) taking it there'. We notice that in sentences 1 and 2
the person that is said to have been taken is referred to by the
pronoun -ech of Class B; showing that the
V-ab
construction of sentence 2, which we rendered by the English passive
voice, requires the same pronoun as the transitive construction
t-PA V-ah
of sentence 1. In contrast with this, we find that in sentence 3 the
person that is, or was, being taken is referred to by the pronoun
a of
Class A. The same pronoun of Class A serves in sentence 4 to refer, not
to a person who is taken, but to one who takes. That is to say, in
sentence 3 we observe a transformation of the sort that characterizes
the passive voice in other languages.
We divide the uses of this structural unit into two classes labeled Usage A and Usage B. In Usage A, the construction serves to refer to an occurrent contemporary (4.3) with the time-index indicated by the context. In Usage B, the construction serves to refer to an occurrent subsequent (4.3) to the time-index indicated by the context. In both usages the reference is generally monochronic (4.6). In some cases the reference is polychronic, but it is not a reference to a habitual occurrence. In Usage B, the references made by this construction and those in which he + IKAL + -e’ occur (4.16) are quite similar. Both constructions serve to make predictions and to refer to predictions made at a time prior to that in which they are referred to, and both constructions serve to express assurance with regard to the fulfilment of the prediction. It is observed, however, that in 82% of the cases in which such predictions were made by means of tan + IKAL the sentence was negative; while he + IKAL + -e’ was used in negative sentences in less than 1% of the instances in which he + IKAL + -e’ occurred. We suspect that in affirmative sentences the latter expresses a higher degree of assurance than the former; but, of course, it is hardly feasible to find reliable evidence in support of a conjecture of this sort. The negative construction maa tan + IKAL was used in 66% of the cases to express a refusal. Thus, maa tan in beetik signified more frequently 'I refuse to do it' than 'I am not doing it', or 'I was not doing it'. On the other hand, tan in beetik was most frequently equivalent to 'I am doing it' or 'I was doing it'; and occasionally, 'I shall be doing it' or 'I plan to do it'. The word tan serves frequently to answer affirmatively a question made by means of construction tan + IKAL. For example, an answer to the question tan a pak'al? ('Are you planting?') can be simply tan, signifying 'I am' or 'Yes'. There is no word in Modern Yucatec signifying 'Yes' which can be used in reply to any disjunctive interrogative sentence (Yes-No type). How to say Yes depends on the construction of the interrogative and on what is asked. In all instances other than in the construction tan + IKAL and the affirmative and negative answers tan and maa tan, the word tan is used in references which have little in common with what tan might be said to signify in construction tan + IKAL. The closest analogy is found in expressions in which tan signifies 'in the midst of', 'about the middle of', as in tan chumuk. Usage A and Usage B of construction tan + IKAL are on the whole special developments of Modern Yucatec which have replaced almost entirely the uses of some Old Yucatec constructions (Note 10). Save for the phonologic fusion of tan with the pronoun of the IKAL-construction (1.5), tan remains unaltered in all the uses and conjugational variations of construction tan + IKAL. In this respect this construction differs from others dealt with below.
The component ts'ook of this structural unit differs from the component tan of the unit tan + IKAL in various respects which are worthy of note. The latter, as shown above, remains unaltered so far as conjugation is concerned, but ts'ook conforms to the rules governing intransitive conjugation. Thus, besides ts'ook + IKAL, we find ts'ookok + IKAL in temporal clauses introduced by ken (4.46); and we find ku ts'ookol + IKAL in the uses dealt with below (4.33). In other constructions, ts'ook signifies 'to end, to be over'. For example, the expression ts'ooki is in some contexts equivalent to that's the end, that's all, it is done. In construction ts'ook + IKAL, the word ts'ook signifies in different instances that the occurrent specified by the dependent IKAL-component was, is, or will be, prior (4.3) to the time-index indicated by the context. Thus, ts'ook in beetik can signify in different contexts 'I had done it', 'I have done it', or 'I shall have done it'. With the simple word ts'ook, the construction has been observed only in monochronic references (4.6). With ku ts'ookol or ts'ookok, the reference is monochronic or polychronic depending on circumstances elsewhere specified. We see that three chronologic positions can be specified jointly by ts'ook + IKAL and its context. Employing the designations explained in 4.4, those three chronologic positions are: discrete-past (Case 1), prior-past (Case 4), and prior-future (Case 8). It should now be noted that references to occurrents whose chronologic positions are specified as being discrete past are served also by Usage A of the AHAB-constructions (4.9). This question should, therefore, be asked: Under what conditions does a speaker use ts'ook + IKAL, and not an AHAB-construction, to specify the chronologic position of the occurrent as being discrete-past? The data at our disposal are not sufficient to answer this question satisfactorily. We have observed that upon reportring as a piece of news an incident which took place a few seconds or a few minutes before it was reported construction ts'ook + IKAL is used. We have not observed a single instance in which an AHAB-construction was used to report in that manner as recent an occurrence. It should be noted, however, that after using ts'ook + IKAL to report an incident, the same construction is not used in subsequent sentences describing the incident. For example, it is required in the first sentence Gonzalo fell off his horse, but not in the next sentence He fell on a rock. In references to occurrents which took place at a less recent time, the rules which govern the uses of this construction are probably as complicated as those which govern the uses of the present perfect and simple past tenses in English. Moreover, we suspect that if we could specify under what circumstances one must, for example, say in English, I have done it and not I did it, the specifications would hold by and large for Yucatec, excepting, of course, the reports of recent events above mentioned. But, as we point out in Note 11, what the grammarian says about present perfect tenses stands no rational test; and what contemporary linguists say about perfective aspects is of no help. We suspect that a careful inquiry into an adequate number of samplings of discourse, with adquate information concerning the circumstances in which each sampling of discourse occurred, would disclose not one rule but a set of rules. One of the rules, for example, might be: when a speaker argues that he will succeed in doing something, and in supporting his argument, refers to a previous instance (or collectively to previous instances) in which he succeeded, he can use construction ts'ook + IKAL in Yucatec and the present perfect tense in English in an assertion such as I have done it many times. Another rule may be: when an individual says that something should be done or orders someone to do it, without knowing that the matter was attended to before he spoke of it, his interlocutor will use construction ts'ook + IKAL to inform him that the matter has already been attended to; provided, however, that the sentence used by the latter does not contain some expression which requires the use of another construction. Such are the rules that may have to be formulated before it is justifiable to generalize upon the uses of the linguistic devices in question. The following examples illustrate some of the most frequent uses.
This construction serves to refer to an occurrent whose chronologic
position is specified as being subsequent to a time-index (4.3). This
generalization applies in three kinds of instances: (1) when the
construction serves to communicate a prediction, a promise, a threat,
or a resolution; e.g., he in tasik
teeche’, 'I will
bring it to you'; (2) when the construction serves to refer to a
prediction, a promise, a threat, or a resolution, which was made at a
time prior to the cardinal time; e.g., tin waalah
tech he in tasik teeche’,
'I told you I would bring it to you'; (3) when the construction serves
to communicate an expected permission or order to do something
previously spoken of; e.g., he u pahtal a bin ta
nayle’,
'You may go home (now)'. These specifications, however, are not
sufficient to delimit the uses of this construction; for it happens to
be the case that other constructions (4.14, 4.42, 4.56) serve to refer
to subsequent occurrents in the first two kinds of instances just
mentioned. In the first of those two kinds of instances, the choice of
he + IKAL + -e’
seems frequently to depend on whether or not the speaker chooses to
signify (a) that his promise can be depended upon, or that he is sure
of what he predicts, or that he is determined to carry out his threat
or resolution; or (b) that the predicted or promised occurrent will
take place sooner than expected, or without delay. In the second kind
of instances the reference seems to be generally to predictions,
resolutions, promises, or threats which are reported to have been made
with assurance or determination. The most reliable evidence we have
that such is the basis for the choice of this construction is derived
from the translation given by informants who had a good command of
Spanish. No single Spanish idiom is equivalent to construction
he + IKAL + -e’
in all its uses, but some informants managed to obtain translations
which proved to be satisfactory in various degrees to others who had a
good command of both languages. In most cases the future tense of the
Spanish verb without the aid of some other expressions was not
considered a precise equivalent. What the Spanish future tense lacks
was sometimes provided by the use of the word ya, as in Ya
verás, 'You'll see'; said to express confidence with
regard to some prediction. That seems to be the precise sense of
he a wilike’;or a
wiike’,
as it is most frequently said. In other instances, the special use of
the Spanish present tense to promise immediate action, or to give
assurance that something will be done was said to correspond
satisfactorily to the use of the Yucatec construction. Thus, he in
tasik tech samale’ was rendered by
Mańana te lo traigo,
an approximate equivalent of which is, at least in some contexts, 'I
will surely bring it to you tomorrow'. All this, however, fails to
account for the use of he + IKAL + -e’ in
all the specimens of discourse recorded. This is especially the case
when the construction in question occurs in the protasis of a
conditional sentence. In some instances one may more or less plausibly
infer from the context that the speaker implies by the choice of this
construction that he is sure that what he states conditionally will
occur (high declarative value). Take, for example, a context of this
sort: A traveler comes to a cornfield and says to the owner that he is
very thirsty. The owner says: "If you look under that bush, you will
find water in my gourd." The use of construction he + IKAL
+ -e’ in the clause signifying 'If you look under that
bush' may imply what we now insert in parenthesis: If you look under that bush ( and you surely
will look if you are so thirsty);
but that is just one of the possible implications in such a context.
Another possibility is that the sentence is equivalent to Just look under ... .
It should be noted that the terminal component of construction
he + IKAL + -e’is always
-e’, and not also -a’ or
-o’, as might be expected from the observation that
this is one of the constructions conforming to formula he ...
-e(a,o)’.
The uses of other constructions conforming to this formula are dealt
with separately (4.51). Conforming to the rule
stated in 4.58, -e’ is always the
last component, and it is affixed to whatever component may precede it.
hel is an X-variant of he. This X-variant,
however, is always employed instead of he when the
construction consists entirely of its initial and terminal components;
e.g., heela’,
heelo’, heele’
or heele’. Each of the two variants
heele’ and heele’
is equivalent to the whole construction he + IKAL +
-e’
when the context supplies the information that would be communicated by
the omitted IKAL-component. Thus, an affirmative answer to such a
question as Will you do it? can
be simply heele’, instead of he in
beetike’, or hel in
beetike’. This is, in fact, the shortest
expression that can be used in such contexts, since there is no word
like the English yes which can
be used to communicate an affirmative answer in all contexts. (Cf. the
independent use of tan mentioned in 4.14). heele’
is said frequentely also in response to a request or an order, and
signifies willingness or readiness to do what is requested or
commanded.
Examples in which construction he + IKAL + -e’ refers to a future occurrent.
Examples in which construction he + IKAL + -e’ refers to a promise or prediction previously made.
Examples of he + IKAL + -e’ in conditional sentences.
So far as our observations go, the verb hoop' is not used otherwise than with a dependent IKAL-construction. It is an impersonal verb signifying 'to begin to occur'. The IKAL-construction specifies what begins to occur. The construction hoop' + IKAL has occurred about as frequently as any in which IKAL is a dependent component, and in every instance the pronoun of the dependent IKAL-component was that of the third person singular or of the third person plural. Other verbs signifying 'to begin' (4.22) were used when other pronouns were required. The converse, however, is not true. Thus, we find hoop' u kaltal and chunpahi u kaltal signifying 'He began to get drunk', and referring in each case to a single occasion in which an individual was drinking. The number of such instances observed by us are too few to draw any conclusion as to whether any distinction is made by using one of those verbs rather than another. The preceding generalizations hold for the two conjugational forms uhoop'ol and hoop'ok, as well as for the simple form hoop'. The examples given below illustrate the use of the simple form hoop'. With this simple form of the hoop'-component, the unit hoop' + IKAL serves to refer to an occurrent whose chronologic position is specified as being discrete-past (4.4, Case 1), and the reference is monochronic (4.6) so far as hoop' is concerned, but not necessarily so with regard to what the dependent IKAL-construction specifies. For example, in such a communication as He began to climb the tree one beginning and one instance of climbing would be referred to. In He began to ask every person he met, hoop' would still be used to refer to a single beginning, but in that case it is the beginning of a set of occurrents each of which is an instance of asking. In polychronic references to more than one beginning, the construction is ku hoop'ol (or ku hoop'ol) + IKAL (4.28). hoop'ok conforms to the rules stated in 4.37.
The first component of this unit is the verb an with the third person prefix y- (4.61). What is signified by the whole unit depends on whether the cooperant (4.13) is yan, or yanhi, or ka yanak. With yan the construction serves to assert (a) that there is, or there was, or there will be a need, or duty, or other compulsion to do that which the IKAL-component specifies; or (b) that what the IKAL-component specifies is, was, or will be an expected consequence of prior or contemporary (4.3) circumstances. For example, yan in kaxtik can be equivalent to 'I have to look for it', or 'I shall have to look for it', or the sentence may refer to a past need, or duty, which may or may not have been attended to. With the component yanhi, the construction serves in some contexts to assert that what the IKAL-component specifies was done to meet a need, or was done under some other compulsion. For example, yanhi in kaxtik is equivalent to 'I had to look for it (and I did so)'. The distinction is like that which can be made by the use of the imperfect and the preterite tenses of the Spanish verb. Tuve que buscarlo, like yanhi in kaxtik, implies that I was under compulsion to look for it, and did look for it; whereas Tenía que buscarlo asserts that there was a compulsion of some sort, but is non-committal as to whether I actually looked for it. The latter is the sense of yan in kaxtik with reference to a past situation. We have found ka yanak + IKAL only in the expression ka yanak a woheltik, or ka yanak a woheltike'x, which is approximately equivalent to 'Let it be known to you' (sing. and plur., respectively), or, less literally, 'I want you to know', said by way of warning, or upon revealing something which is expected to surprise the person or persons addressed. With yanhi, and, of course, with ka yanak, this construction has occurred only in monochronic references (4.6). But with the simpler component yan, this is one of the constructions which can be used without alteration both in monochronic and polychronic references. In narration, yanhi and its X-variant anhi serve frequently to indicate a transition from episode to another, or to attract attention to an incident. They are then approximately equivalent to 'It came to pass that ...', 'It so happened that ...', 'What happened then was that ...'. The same usage is frequently served by uchi and uchik, where uch signifies 'to happen', 'to be the case that ...'. Various uses of yan without a dependent IKAL-construction are dealt with elsewhere (4.61). To avoid unnecessary repetition, yan, yanhi, and ka yanak will be left unanalyzed in the remarks of the following examples. The construction of yanhi (y-an-h-i) is explained in 3.51; and that of ka yanak (ka y-an-ak), in 4.37.
In the constructions here referred to by the label paht
+ IKAL, the verb paht
signifies 'to be possible or feasible', 'to be permitted', or 'to
succeed'. The dependent IKAL-component specifies what particular
occurrent is said to be possible, or feasible, or what permission or
success is referred to. The paht-component of the
construction can be (1) pahti or
pathi, AHAB form (3.51); (2)
u pahtal, conforming to the IKAL-formula PA
V-(a)l; (3) ku pahtal, constr.
k-IKAL (4.27); or (4) ka
pahtak, constr. NULLAK (4.37).
Construction u pahtal + IKAL is always a dependent
IKAL-construction (4.18). Take, for example, the
sentence maa tan u pahtal in beetik,
which in a reference to present circumstances is equivalent to 'I am not
able to do it'. Disregarding the negative maa, that
sentence exemplifies construction tan + IKAL, dealt with
above (4.14). Only, instead of having a single
IKAL-component, as is most frequently the case, we have tan
+ IKAL + IKAL. Similarly, in he u pahtal a
beetike’, 'You will be able to do it', or 'You
can do it', or 'You are permitted to do it', we have he +
IKAL + IKAL + -e’ (4.16). In
short, the rules governing the uses of the dependent IKAL-constructions
apply to the unit u pahtal + IKAL. It is observed,
however, that tan u pahtal + IKAL has seldom occurred
in affirmative sentences. To assert that someone is able to do something
he u 'pahtal + IKAL + -e’ (4.16) is the construction commonly employed.
pahti + IKAL serves to assert that someone succeeded
in doing what the IKAL-component specifies. Thus, pahti in
beetik is equivalent to 'I succeeded in doing it'. An
X-variant of pahti is pathi.
Construction ka pahtak + IKAL occurs in the dependent
clauses dealt with in 4.41. In those clauses,
paht signifies 'to be able' or 'to be possible'.
Examples with u pahtal, ku
pahtal, and pahti
In the instances so far dealt with, the co-operants (4.13) of the
dependent IKAL-constructions are of two sorts: those which are not
conjugated; and those which are conjugated only in the third person
when used with a dependent IKAL-construction. So far as our data show,
there are comparatively few words or expressions which serve as
co-operants of those two sorts. The following have occurred in the
texts at least 10 times: (1) k'abet, 'to be
necessary'; tak, 'to have an urgent physiologic need';
yaab,
'to abound, to be much or many'. These three were used in references to
contemporary-past and present occurrents. With dependent
IKAL-constructions, they have occurred only in the forms shown above.
(2) uch, 'to happen', has the form
uch or uchik in references
to discrete-past occurrents; also in narration with a usage similar to
that of yanhi (4.18); the form
u yuchul, itself an IKAL-construction subject to
the rules governing the uses of these constructions; and
uchak or unchak,
signifying 'perhaps it will happen', 'perhaps it will be the case', 'may
it happen (optative sense)'. (3) xanhi,
'to be delayed or retarded'; used in references to past occurrents, and
only in the 3rd. sing. i.e., what the person does, and not the person
himself is what is said to be retarded or delayed. (4) Various
expressions concerning time: tanili, 'first,
presently, at once'; hun pulak,
naapulak,
'at once, immediately, without further ado'; all three in references to
past occurrents when a dependent IKAL-construction follows.
mix bik'in, 'never'; reference to past; in
reference to future, it requires a different construction.
samal or hatskab, 'tomorrow'.
ma tech, emphatic denial in references to
discrete-past. ka likil, 'in the meantime, while';
reference to future. ichil, 'while';
contemporary-past or present. taytak,
'to be about to happen'; with dependent IKAL, subsequent-past or
immediate future; requires other than a dependent IKAL when it
signifies 'it came close to occurring'. seb, signifying
'soon' in references to subsequent-past, immediate future, and
subsequent-future.
Miscellaneous examples
In some contexts, koox and
kone'x signify 'let us go'. In others, they
are just signs of imperative utterance equivalent to the English Let us ... .
koox is used when addressing only one person;
and kone'x, when two or more persons are
addressed. An X-variant of kone'x is
koone'x. From this X-variant it may be
inferred that -o'n-e'x, 'you' plural and 'I'
(2.5) is affixed to ko-. But since
ko- signifying 'go' occurs only in the above words, this
analysis must be classed as uncertain. The same is true of
koten, kotene'x, 'come
thou, come ye'; where the imperative affixes -en,
-en-e'x (4.57) may be
annexed to ko-t, or to a root kot- which
occurs only in these two words, so far as the Yucatec dictionaries and
our texts show. If the root in koox is
ko-, the suffix -ox is unidentifiable in
Modern Yucatec, since it occurs only in that word with any sense that
may be attributed to it there.
When koox and
kone'x or
koone'x are used with a dependent
IKAL-construction, it is observed that in the majority of instances the
pronoun k
of the dependent IKAL-construction is omitted. The omission occurs both
in Speech-Type A and in Type B. One informant from Pachacaan, British
Honduras, omitted k only occasionally. For 'let us (two) do
it' we find koox beetik in 14
instances, and koox k beetik
in 2 texts, one of which was dictated by the informant above mentioned;
the other is from Chemax, Yucatan. Much more prevalent than the absence
of k is that of -e'x in the
IKAL-construction dependent on kone'x or
koone'x.
In other than in these imperative sentences, a transitive
IKAL-construction referring to the speaker and two or more persons has
the form k V-ik-e'x. But in these
imperative sentences we find k V-ik, or simply
V-ik; e.g., kone'x
beetik, 'let us (your plur. and I) do it'. For other
constructions dependent on koox and
kone'x see 4.38.
The word pa’t, or pa’tik, now
seldom pronounced with k' instead of ’,
occurs in sentences equivalent to Let
me ..., uttered while the speaker is in the process of doing what
he speaks of; e.g., Let me see what is
in here; not signifying that he asks permission to do so. In some
cases, however, pa’t, and its X-variant
pa’tik, have their usual sense of 'wait'; and
the sentence is equivalent to Wait!
Let me ... .
Miscellaneous examples:
This use of the dependent IKAL-constructions is subject to two sorts
of limitations: (1) only certain verbs can be co-operants (4.13) of
those dependent IKAL-constructions; and (2) not all the
IKAL-constructions are commonly used after such co-operants. Some of
the verbs in question take only the passive PA V-(aa)l;
others take this and the intransitive PA V-(a)l; and still
others allow the use of the three IKAL-constructions. When the
transitive PA V-ik is not permissible, the transitive
NULLAK-construction (4.37) is employed.
Those which have been found with the three IKAL-constructions are:
ch'en(-el), 'to cease'; ch'en-s, 'to
cause to cease'; kah-s and chun-s, 'to
begin' (transitive); and the adopted Spanish verb seguir, 'to continue'. It is
observed, however, that kah-s requires a transitive
NULLAK-construction (4.37) instead of
PA-V-ik
in a discourse in which it is said that what was begun was not
finished. The verbs which have been found with intransitive and passive
IKAL-constructions (and not with transitive IKAL) are:
beet or meet or ment,
signifying 'to compel someone to do something' or 'to have someone do
something'; and cha,
signifying 'to let someone do something', 'to let something happen (not
to prevent its happening)'. The unit dependent on the verbs
il, 'to see', ub or uy, 'to hear,
to feel', and ohel, 'to know', can be
tan + IKAL (4.14),
hoop' + IKAL (4.17),
ts'ook + IKAL (4.15), or some
of the others formed with a dependent IKAL-construction; but only the
passive IKAL-construction, PA V-(aa)l, can occur
immediately after those verbs; that is, without a preceding
tan, ts'ook, hoop',
etc.
Examples of these various uses are:
The unit tu yo’lal is a variant of tu
yok’lal, which in turn is an abridgment of
tu yok'olal, the analysis of which is as
follows: t-u y-ok'-ol-al; u, 3rd. pers. sing.
pron. Class A; y-, prefix after pronoun u
before initial vowel (3.2); ok'-ol,
'upon, over'; the construction u y-ok'-ol conforms to
intransitive IKAL-formula PA V-(a)l; for formative
-al see 4.52; the first component
t-u is perhaps a fusion of ti’ or
ti, 'to, for', etc. (2.29) and the
pronoun u, but it is safer to regard it as unidentified, as
in the case of the AHAB-construction t-PA
V-ah. The following inflexional variations have occurred:
tin wo’lal, 'on my account, for my sake';
ta wo’lal, on your (sing.) account; ta
wo’lale'x, 'for your (pl.) sake';
tu yo’lal in sukun, 'for the sake of my
elder brother'. The analysis of u ti’al is:
u ti’-al; where u is the 3rd. pers. sing.
pron. of Class A; -al is the formative above spoken of; and
ti’ probably etymologically identical with
ti’ or ti, 'to, for', etc. (2.29). in ti’al, a
ti’al, u ti’al, a
ti’ale'x,
have occurred as equivalents of 'for me', 'for you', 'for him'; also
'it is mine', 'it is yours', 'it is his', etc. Without a pronoun of
Class A, ti’al occurred three times in the
question baax ti’ali, 'For what
purpose?', 'Of what use?'. The answers to those questions begin with
u ti’al, 'in order to, so that'. It is with the
senses 'in order to', 'so that' that both u
ti’al and tu yo’lal
(B-variant: tyo’lal) occur in constructions of
these four forms: (1) u ti’al + IKAL, (2)
tu yo’lal + IKAL, (3) u
ti’al + NULLAK, (4) tu yo’lal
+ NULLAK (4.41). The references made by means of
these four
constructions, and another mentioned below, will be called 'projective
references'; and a device which in a given instance indicates that a
reference is a projective reference will be said to be in that instance
the 'sign' of a projective reference. In Modern Yucatec, as well as in
English, the sign of a projective reference is frequently the
circumstance that a construction of a certain kind and wording follows
another construction of a special kind, and both are components of the
same sentence. An English example of such constructional signs is seen
in the sentence I went there to see
him. Neither of the units I
went there and to see
him indicates by itself that to
see him specifies the aim of going there. Replace I went there by It is impossible and it would be
nonsensical to say that to see him
specifies
the aim of an impossibility. This example may indicate what sort of
Yucatec device we refer to as being a constructional sign of projective
reference. This third sign of projective reference results when a
NULLAK-construction (4.41) follows certain other
constructions. Thus,
considering as a single unit the sign together with the IKAL or NULLAK
dependent constructions, five sorts of units are used in projective
references. The rules governing the uses of those five units are rather
complicated. We infer this from a detailed study of the 1192 instances
of projective reference in the specimens of discourse collected. It
would require, perhaps, five times as many instances to obtain an
adequate number of each of the kinds of contexts which presumably
determine when each of the five devices is employed. To illustrate the
difficulty which results from the lack of a favorable distribution of
the specimens required, we refer to what we may call conveniently
'negative' projective references; that is, those which specify that the
aim is to prevent or avoid; as, I did
x so that I would not have to do y, x was done in order that y might not occur. Only 52 of
the 1192 projective references were negative. In 48 of those negative
references, tu yo’lal was used; the other 4 had
u ti’al.
In view of the complicated rules governing the uses of the devices in
question, it would hardly be justifiable to infer from only 48
observations that the rule is that a negative projective reference
requires tu yo’lal; particularly since we are
unable to
account for the 4 exceptions. Similarly, after dividing and subdividing
the
instances of affirmative projective references (i.e., those which are
not negative) we have in some cases as few as 23 instances to test a
suspected rule. Another difficulty is due to the kinds of distinctions
which seem to be made by the use of one or another of the five devices
in question. One of the distinctions seems to fall under the heading of
what is here called topical distinction (4.8). Thus,
in 82 of the
instances in which the dominant topic of the sentence is rather clearly
the question of why was this or that done, tu
yo’lal was used. But tu yo’lal
occurs in 56 other instances of affirmative projective references
concerning which it would be arbitrary to assert that the aim is the
dominant topic, although it may very well be. Since what is here called
topical distinction is a phase of discourse which has received
comparatively little attention in descriptions of languages, and even
in corrective grammars, it may not be superfluous to offer an English
example of the kind of distinctions which we suspect to be made in
Yucatec in some cases by using one or another of the devices under
consideration.
Compare these two sentences: I went
there to see what he had done, My purpose in going there was to see what he had done.
We know that the latter is not likely to occur in a context in which
the speaker's going there was not previously mentioned. The dominant
topic of that statement is the reason for going there. Or, as we prefer
to put it, the projective reference is the dominant topic. (This
wording spares us the trouble of distinguishing between reason for doing something, purpose, aim, end,
etc.) It seems rather clear that the second of the above sentences
requires a context that satisfies at least one condition. What
condition or conditions must the context of the first sentence satisfy?
It is not easy to answer this question; but it is true that at least
the sentence I went there to see what
he had done does
not occur exclusively when the projective reference is not the dominant
topic. Notice, for example, that the above sentence can very well be
uttered in answer to the question Why
did you go there? Similarly, although we find some evidence in
support of the conjecture that in some cases tu
yo’lal is preferred to u ti’al
when the projective reference is the dominant topic, we observe that in
16 instances u ti’al is the first component of
an answer to a question with one of the Yucatec equivalents of 'Why?' or 'For what purpose?'. But, again, 16 observations do not
justify the conclusion that in answer to such questions tu
yo’lal is not used.
So far as our observations go, it seems that it may be more feasible to
find rules for the uses of the five units above mentioned than for the
uses of each of the three signs, treated separately from the dependent
IKAL and NULLAK-constructions. But, as already said, this would require
a considerable number of instances of each of the divisions and
subdivisions of the topic. The distribution of the five units in the
1140
instances of 'affirmative' projective reference is as follows:
+ IKAL |
+ NULLAK |
Totals |
% | |
tu yo’lal | 97 |
41 |
138 |
12.1 |
u ti’al | 226 |
296 |
522 |
45.6 |
neither |
-- |
480 |
480 |
42.1 |
323 |
817 |
1140 |
In the 52 instances of negative projective reference not included in
the above tabulation, both tu yo’lal and u
ti’al had as dependent constructions either
ma + IKAL or maa tan + IKAL;
ma or maa being the negative, and
tan
+ IKAL the construction dealt with above (4.14).
Further comment on the
817 instances with NULLAK will be made at the proper place (4.14).
So far as concerns the IKAL-constructions themselves, it is seen that
in projective references, as well as in the cases previously dealt
with, they serve exclusively to describe occurrents whose chronologic
position is specified by other components of the sentence. In
projective references, the chronologic position is obviously subsequent
(4.3) to whatever time-index the preceding context
indicates.
Miscellaneous examples with tu yo’lal. Exx. 1,
2 illustrate two of its uses without dependent
IKAL-constructions.
Examples with u ti’al. Exx. 7-11 illustrate specifications of the service which an object or something else is expected to render, or the use which is to be made of it. tu yo’lal has not occurred in specifications which are definitely of that sort.
This construction serves two usages here referred to as Usage A and Usage B.
In Usage A, the sentence may be said to be negative imperative, for
lack of a better appellation. The speaker commands, instructs,
requests, begs, or otherwise tries to persuade the person or persons
addressed not to do what the IKAL-component of the sentence specifies.
As indicated elsewhere (4.43), this is not the only
construction
employed in negative imperative sentences, but it has a broader range
of application than any other used in such sentences. Here, as in the
constructions dealt with above (4.21), the pronoun
of the
IKAL-construction is more frequently omitted than employed. In this
case, however, two rules are observed: (1) The 3rd. pers. pron.
u
of verbs which are conjugated only in the third person when they are
used intransitively was not omitted in any instance; e.g., ma u
tubul tech, 'Don't forget it' (literally: 'let it not
become forgotten to you', as in Spanish: No se te olvide). Here, ma u frequently
becomes mu. (2) The 2nd. pers. sing. pron. a,
and the a of the 2nd. pers. plur. a ...
-e'x, are not omitted in approximately 77% of the
instances in which the initial consonant of the verb is w,
or the prefix w- is required before a verb with initial
vowel (3.2); e.g., ma a
wook'ol, 'Don't cry'. In other cases, one finds: (a)
that there is no indication of the pronoun a, or of the
a of a ... -e'x
(-e'x is not omitted in negative imperative
sentences); or (b) that the vowel of the negative ma is
long, indicating a fusion of ma and a; or (c)
in 15,8% of the cases not covered by Rule 2, ma’ a or
ma a occurs. In six instances, construction maa
tan + IKAL (4.14) was used in utterances
which were both threats and negative imperative communications,
comparable with You won't do anything
of the sort! In polite requests or supplications,
chen (in other contexts: 'just', 'only') follows the
negative ma or ma’.
In Usage B, construction ma +
IKAL is the main verbal unit of a negative declarative sentence. In
such cases, the occurrent negated is either future, or contemporary
(4.3); and the reference can be monochronic or
polychronic (4.6). Aside
from Usage A, this construction serves mainly to negate the references
made in the independent uses of construction PA V-ik dealt
with in 4.25, and all those references in which
construction k-IKAL occurs (4.27). The
latter is used only in certain negations (4.32).
Here, as well as in Usage A, ma + IKAL has a broader range
of application than any other construction serving to negate.
Examples of ma + IKAL in Usage A.
Examples of Usage B.
Without the aid of any other device, this construction serves in
some cases to refer to contemporary occurrents (4.3). This is a
remnant of what the writers in Old Yucatec, and those who
followed their precedent, classed as the 'present tense' of
transitive verbs. We observed in our texts three main kinds of
instances which exemplify the uses in question: (Kind A) when a topical
distinction (4.8) is effected in the manner
indicated below; (Kind B)
when certain verbs refer to contemporary occurrents; those which
occurred in the texts are verbs designating occurrents which take place
within the individual; viz., those signifying to think, imagine,
believe,
be willing, love, etc.; (Kind C) the exceptional instances referred to
below (4.26), and the verb al, 'say,
tell', when it is used in statements in which the speaker is actually
saying what he refers to; as, I am
telling you that ... . In other cases, al requires
construction tan
+ IKAL (4.14), the construction which has replaced
in nearly all cases
the Old Yucatec 'present tense' and the one classed by most writers as
an 'imperfect tense'. Thus, on the basis of what is prevalent in Modern
Yucatec, it should be said that the cases under consideration are
exceptional instances in which the simple IKAL-construction is used
instead of tan + IKAL, or instead of the
k-IKAL-construction (4.29).
So far as our texts show, the use of the simple IKAL-construction in
instances of Kind B is confined to references to the present. Inquiries
as to whether it is used also in references to contemporary-past
occurrents (4.4, Case 5) yielded unsatisfactory
results, as such
inquiries generally do. Some informants asserted that for I was thinking they would say
tan in tuklik; others, simple in
tuklik.
Some said that it did not make any difference, while others expressed
themselves vaguely as to the difference. Such questions, of course,
should be settled, not on the basis of what the native says he would
say, but on the basis of what the investigator finds that the native
has said in actual communication. In Old Yucatec the same form of the
transitive verb served for present and for contemporary-past (4.4, Case
5), which is the way in which tan + IKAL and other
constructions are used in Modern Yucatec. Under the heading of
'préterito imperfecto' (imperfect tense) writers on Yucatec have
always
repeated the 'present tense' paradigm with the addition of the word
cuchi or cachi; e.g.,: (Coronel, 1620)
Present: cambeçah in cah, 'I
teach'; Imperfect: cambeçah in cah
cuchi, 'I used to teach, I was teaching'. (Beltrán, 1746)
ten cambezic, 'I teach (him)';
ten cambezic cuchi, 'I used to
teach (him), I was teaching (him)'. (Lopez Otero, 1914) ten cin hantic, 'I eat (it)', ten cin hantic cachi, 'I used to eat
(it)'. (Pacheco Cruz, 1920) in
yacuntic, 'I love'; in yacuntic
caachi, 'I loved' (Yo
amaba). The Motul dictionary lists both cuchi and cachi
as signs of the 'pretérito imperfecto', and specifies that the
latter is used in reference to what happened today, i.e., a recent past. Coronel (1620) makes the
same distinction between cuchi
and cachi. In our texts,
kaachi was used to distinguish contemporary-past
from present only for clarity or contrast when the speaker said, for
example, I used to do that, but now I
do something else.
Instances of this sort constitute less than 1% of the cases in which no
device was used to distinguish contemporary-past from present. Our
informants always rendered the word kaachi by the
Spanish entonces, 'then', or
antes, 'formerly'; and that is
the translation which Pio Perez (Dictionary, 1866) gives for caachi,
before adding that it is the sign of 'pretérito imperfecto'. It
is
doubtless justifiable to say that a word which signifies 'formerly' is
a device that serves to refer to the past; which, incidentally, is what
the 'past tenses' are frequently used for. But that holds also for the
words and expressions which signify 'yetsreday', 'the day before
yesterday', 'last year', 'a long time ago', etc. With regard to the
English sentences I put it there
yesterday and I put it there
every day, one could say that yesterday and every
day are components of two "tenses" of the verb put with as much justification as
there is to say that in Yucatec the word kaachi
is the sign of a past tense. But whether one chooses to class such
words as signs of "tenses" or not, account must be taken of the fact
that when the context indicates what time is referred to, I put can be used for past as well as
for present without the aid of any distinguishing device in the sentence
of which I put
is a component. A similar assertion holds for the various constructions
which serve in Modern Yucatec to refer to contemporary occurrents,
using the term 'contemporary' as specified in 4.3.
In instances of
Kind A, topical distinction is effected in two ways: (a) by an
alteration of the most common order of the words in the Yucatec
sentence: the word or expression which refers to the dominant topic
(4.8) comes before the IKAL-construction; (b) by
using a pronoun of
Class C (2.6) instead of, or before, the pronoun of
Class A of the
IKAL-construction. Thus used, the pronouns of Class C were always
translated as signifying 'It is I who ...', or 'I am the one who ...',
'It is he who ...', etc.
Examples of Kinds A, B, and C, conforming to the divisions specified
above, are:
It has seemed desirable to treat some uses of the IKAL-constructions under other headings. Particularly worthy of note is the use of the intransitive construction PA V-(a)l and the passive PA V-(aa)l after bin PA kah (4.56). In that construction, the transitive PA V-ik occurs only occasionally and inconsistently in the discourse of some individuals whose speech is predominantly of Type B. The other uses dealt with elsewhere have to do in each case with a special word or a small group of words constituting exceptions to general rules. Those exceptional uses are pointed out and illustrated in the following places: 4.12, Exx. 38, 39, 40; 4.33, Ex. 29; 4.34; 4.36, Exx. 48, 49; 4.40, Exx. 17, 18, 19; 4.48, Ex. 91; 4.52, 4.55.
It has been shown (3.49) that so far as
structure is concerned, the k-IKAL and the IKAL
constructions differ only in that the former have as their first
components kin, ka, ku, instead
of in, a, u. From a purely
descriptive point of view, there are either no
k-IKAL-constructions or no IKAL-constructions for the
so-called first person plural. A hypothetic combination of the
k- of the k-IKAL-constructions with pronouns
k and k ... -e'x would give
kk and kk ... -e'x. What is actually
found is that the forms k V-ik, k
V-(a)l, k V-(aa)l, and the
inclusive plural k V-ik-e'x,
k V-(a)l-e'x, k
V-(aa)l-e'x
are used in conformity with the rules which govern the uses of the
IKAL-constructions and with those which govern the uses of the
k-IKAL-constructions.
The two sets of rules are on the whole quite different. In the few
instances in which they are similar, the use of one rather than the
other of the constructions depends often on whether or not certain
words or expressions precede, or on the paticular sense in which a word
is used. For example, tanili can signify 'at
once'or 'first', depending on whether IKAL or k-IKAL
follows. In the same context, we find tanili u
machik, 'at once he grasps it' (cf. 4.20), and tanili ku
machik,
'first he grasps it (then he does something else)'. And it should be
noted that this distinction is made consistently in all the uses of
tanili with those two constructions.
From the eighteenth century to the present, writers on Yucatec who
expected to find in the language one and only one "tense" corresponding
to each of the "tenses" for which conventional grammar provides names
must have found considerable difficulty in deciding what to do with the
construction here labeled k-IKAL. Beltrán (1743)
says in his grammar (2nd. ed., p. 40) that the "particle" ci, a sign of the present tense
('signo de presente') drops the i before the pronouns, giving cin, ca, cu. One of his examples is ten cin haɔic, which he renders
by the Spanish Yo lo azoto, 'I
whip him'. According to our observations, ten kin
hats'ik
can signify at present in different contexts 'I myself was whipping
him', or 'I am the one who whipped him', or 'I myself whip him', or 'I
myself will whip him'. It is now a special construction for topical
distinction (4.8), the dominant topic in the above
sentence being the
circumstance that the whipping is, was, or will be, done by the person
referred to by the pronoun ten. If this pronoun is
omitted, a different translation is required: in some contexts the
translation would be 'I whip him (habitually)', or in a conditional
sentence '(If x takes
place), I'll whip him'; but those are not the only possibilities. One
notices that although Beltrán classes ci
as a 'signo de presente', no construction formed with this sign appears
in any of his many paradigms of Yucatec conjugation. Contrariwise, that
is precisely the construction which Lopez Otero (Gramática, 1914)
chooses for the model paradigm of the "present tense" of transitive
verbs. Pio Perez (Dictionary, 1866) speaks of "tenses", not of one
"tense" when he defines cin
(IPA notations, kin)
as the first person pronoun in some tenses: "pronombre de la primera
persona para conjugar algunos tiempos del verbo". He may have said
"tenses" instead of "tense" in view of the variety of uses of the
k-IKAL-constructions, but it may also be due to the
circumstance that kin can result as well from a combination
of the word ka, required in some cases before a
NULLAK-construction (4.37), and the pronoun
in; as in u k'at kin beet
samale’ for u k'at ka in beet
samale’, 'He wants me to do it tomorrow'. If
Beltrán is right, as he very probably is, that at the time he
wrote, cin was a fusion of
ci and in, then an etymologic difference corresponds to a
present rule of usage; namely, that in the
k-IKAL-constructions the k- of the component
kin, ka, ku is not separated from
the pronouns in, a, u; whereas
with the NULLAK-constructions we find ka in, ka
u more frequently than kin, ku. The
latter do not occur consistently, and the very informant who uses
kin or ku with a NULLAK-construction
frequently replaces them by ka in, ka u when
he is asked to repeat the sentence. With regard to the second person,
the situation is different: we find ka or
kaa more frequently than ka a (stressing
the second a) with a NULLAK-construction. But in no
instance in which we submitted a native to the test were the words
kin, ka, ku of the
k-IKAL-construction resolved into two components.
It seems natural that Spanish writers should equate the
k-IKAL-constructions
with the Spanish present tense. For the Spanish device that is called
"present tense", besides being used to refer to the present time, as
the name may suggest, can refer also to the past, as the "present
tenses" of various other languages do in "vivid discourse", i.e., the
"historical present"; it can refer to the future, as in Mańana te lo traigo, 'I'll bring it
to you tomorrow'; and it can be an imperative, as in the second clause
of this sentence: Vete a su casa, y le
dices que ..., 'Go to his house, and tell him ...'. In these four
kinds of references, besides a few others, we find the
k-IKAL-constructions.
Spanish writers could have argued thus: This Yucatec device is used
more like the present tense of our indicative mode than like any other
Spanish device. Hence, the appellation "present tense of the indicative
mode" fits it better than any other which grammar books provide. In so
naming it, those writers conformed to a precedent that was quite
respectable at that time. Whether or not it is equally respectable now,
it is the precedent to which contemporary linguists generally conform
-- even those of us who emphatically assert that the categories of the
Latin and Greek grammars are not universal. If they are not universal,
it does not seem desirable to apply their names to any additional
categories that may be found. Still, we find in descriptions of
American Indian languages such terms as 'subjunctive', 'aorist',
'middle voice' applied to devices whose uses bear only some resemblance
to those of the Greek and Latin devices for which those names were
chosen. In many instances, there is less justification for this abuse
of nomenclature than the Spanish writers had for calling "present
tense" the Yucatec devices in question. It is by no means claimed that
such a practice is consistently avoided in these pages. In the present
instance, however, it would be highly arbitrary, not only to call the
k-IKAL-constructions
by a familiar name, but to assert that their uses constitute a single
semantic category. This, of course, does not imply that this Yucatec
device is unusual in this respect. Diversity of usage of a single device
is common in the languages for which we have more than a superficial
description. Perhaps no one regards as abnormal the variety of usage of
the Latin devices referred to singly and collectively by the term
'ablative'. Nor does it seem strange that the English construction If I had it refers to a past time in
the sentence If I had it, I must have
lost it, but it refers to a present time in If I had it, I would give it to you.
It will be seen that in a similar way the Yucatec constructions in
question can refer to a past, a present, or a future time, depending on
other components of the sentence, and on the context of the sentence.
The uses of the k-IKAL-constructions will be divided and
subdivided as follows:
A. In polychronic (4.6) references
B. In monochronic references
(B-1) For
topical distinction (4.8)
(B-2) In
construction he ... -a’ (or -o’)
(B-3) In
interrogative sentences
(B-4) In
negative sentences with mix mak, mix
baal
(B-5) In
temporal clauses
(B-6) In
relative clauses
(B-7) In
conditional sentences
(B-8) In
imperative sentences
This usage is observed in descriptions of hunting and agricultural techniques, ceremonies which the people are in the habit of performing, and other practices and customs. In such kinds of discourse, we find some construction other than k-IKAL only occasionally, when the narrator describes some step in a procedure as though he referred to a particular occasion. He may do so in one or two sentences, and then he goes on using the k-IKAL-constructions. Polychronic references of course, are not confined to descriptions of customs of a people or of the habits of a single individual. Thus, the k-IKAL-constructions serve also to refer to something which is said not to have happened on any occasion on which it was expected to happen or might have happened; or to that which took place several times during a certain period, or in such generalizations as It is bad to get drunk (i.e., it is bad whenever it happens), or These birds can fly very fast. If the reference is polychronic, a k-IKAL-construction can serve to refer to the past, or to the present, or to the future; and it can be the main verbal unit, or it can occur in a relative clause, or in some other subordinate clause, except when a particular word or expression, or an assertion of high declarative value (4.7) requires some other construction.
Examples of Usage A.
In this class of instances, the occurrent referred to by a
k-IKAL-construction
can be past, present, or future. The chronologic specification is
provided either by the preceding sentence, or in the very sentence
containing the k-IKAL-construction. In many cases, the
occurrent for which the k-IKAL-construction
stands was spoken of in the previous sentence or sentences, and what is
in question is some constituent of the occurrent , or its time, or
place. Thus, the rule in instances of Usage B-1 is that the occurrent
referred to by the k-IKAL-construction is not the
dominant topic of the sentence. Dialogues provide frequent
exemplifications of this rule, particularly in utterances which specify
what an interlocutor has been asked. Take, for example, this question:
When are you going to bring it?
In other languages, and occasionally in Yucatec, the answer can be
simply Sunday.
So far as the texts show, and so far as my observations on ordinary
conversation can be trusted, it seems that the prevalent habit in
Yucatec is not to answer by saying simply the equivalent of Sunday, but rather I'll bring it Sunday, using a
k-IKAL-construction: domingo kin
tasik.
This use of the k-IKAL-constructions
is difficult to differentiate from that of the IKAL-constructions
mentioned in 4.25, Kind A. So far as we have been
able to ascertain,
certain words, among them the pronouns of Class C, are followed much
more frequently by IKAL than by k-IKAL. In comparable
instances some informants use only one of those two constructions,
while others use one more frequently than the other. We suspect,
nevertheless, that it is not altogether a matter of individual
preference. But the data at our disposal are insufficient to reach a
conclusion.
Examples of Usage B-1
Constructions he + k-IKAL +
-a’ and he + k-IKAL +
-o’
are used in references to present occurrents taking place at the very
moment they are referred to, and the reference serves to call attention
to their occurrence. The sentence is generally uttered in an
exclamatory manner: he ku talo’, 'Here he
comes!' he kin bisik le chan
paala’, 'Here I come with the baby!' (Literally:
'Here I bring the baby'). The final suffix is -a’ when
the speaker refers to what he himself does. When the reference is not to
the speaker's own action, the use of -a’ or
-o’ depends on the general rules governing the uses of
these suffixes (4.51). The difference between these
constructions and he + IKAL + -e’ (4.16) should be noted: the latter requires IKAL with
final -e’, and refers to a subsequent (4.3) occurrent; the former takes k-IKAL
and always -a’ or -o’. For other
uses of he ... -a’ (or -o’, or
-e’) see 4.51.
Examples of Usage B-2.
There are in many languages, if not in all, at least two kinds of interrogative sentences which are called here disjunctive interrogative and definitive interrogative sentences. In a disjunctive interrogative sentence, what is asked is whether the statement proposed therein is true or false; e.g., Are you sick? Assuming that this question is not rhetorical or facetious, the statement You are sick is there proposed without ascribing any declarative value (4.7) to it. What is asked is what declarative value does the person addressed ascribe to it. Like all interrogative sentences which are not of a rhetorical sort, this can be rendered by an imperative sentence with a verb of 'telling', e.g., Tell me whether or not you are sick. A simple test is that it makes sense to answer 'Yes' or 'No' in reply to a disjunctive interrogative. That is why, for lack of a special term, they are often called "Yes-no-questions". It does not make sense so to answer a definitive interrogative. What is asked in a definitive interrogative is that the person addressed specify what is indicated in the sentence by means of what the grammarian calls "nterrogative pronouns" and "interrogative adverbs"; e.g., what, which, who, when, where, how, why, etc. Such words or expressions stand for the items whose specification is requested or demanded in the definitive interrogative sentence. The word or expression which in a given sentence performs that office will be said to be an interrogative substitute in the given sentence. The definitive interrogative sentence defines or delimits that which its interrogative substitute stands for, much as a relative clause does with respect to its antecedent. The k-IKAL-constructions perform this definite office both in interrogative sentences and in relative clauses; and, as is also the case in other languages, most of the interrogative substitutes serve also as relative pronouns. In interrogative sentences the use of the k-IKAL-constructions is subject to the following limitations: (a) the sentence is definitive interrogative; (b) the occurrent referred to is contemporary-past (4.4, Case 5) or present; (c) the sentence is not a negative interrogative. Since the k-IKAL-constructions are used in negations only in the instances labeled B-4, a negative interrogative sentence requires ma + IKAL (4.24) if the reference is polychronic (4.6), and maa tan + IKAL (4.14) if the reference is monochronic. On the other hand, the affirmative tan + IKAL (4.14) has not occurred in any definitive interrogative. Where one would expect that construction because the reference is monochronic, k-IKAL was found.
Examples of Usage B-3.
Concerning the instances classed under this heading, all that remains
to be said is that no exception has been found to the rule that in
references to contemporary (4.4) occurrents, no
other than the k-IKAL-constructions have been found with
mix mak, 'nobody, no one', or with mix
baal, 'nothing'. In these negative expressions,
mix comes from the obsolete phrase ma
ix, Old Yucatec orthography, ma ix. The two other components, mak and
baal, signify 'person' and 'thing', respectively.
What ix formerly signified in these expressions cannot
be inferred from Modern Yucatec usage. Etymologically,
ix is the x- of
xma, 'without'; and the -x of
baax, 'what'; bix, 'how';
max, 'who'; tuux, 'where';
baahux, 'how much'.
Examples of Usage B-4.
In temporal clauses, the k-IKAL-constructions
can refer to past, or present, or future occurrents. Their usage
is comparable with that of the English participles, as in Entering the room, (we saw a strange sight)
or Having climbed the hill, (I
stopped to rest). What they have in common is that the
construction, without the aid of such words as when or after,
indicates that the occurrent mentioned in the temporal clause took
place before the occurrence of the one mentioned in the next clause.
For example, ku k'uchul can signify in various contexts
'He arrives (habitually)', or 'He arrived (on several occasions)'; but
ku k'uchule’,
as the first component of a sentence, signifies 'after he arrived (on
that occasion)', 'after he arrives (habitually)', or 'after he arrives
(at a certain future time)', depending on the rest of the sentence and
its context. The temporal clause is in nearly all cases the first
component of the sentence. This rule holds also when any construction
other than k-IKAL is used in a temporal clause. In only 8
instances out of 1236 was a temporal clause found after another
component of the sentence. The first position in the sentence is
frequently occupied also by other words and expressions that specify
chronologic position, such as those which signify 'yesterday',
'tomorrow', 'at five o' clock', 'last Saturday', etc. The instances
were not counted, but as a rough guess we would say that in at least
75% of the cases expressions of this sort are the first components of
the sentence. The temporal clause and many of the other expressions
just mentioned end with the suffix -e’, except when
-a’ or -o’ are required by a
preceding le, the first component of the demonstrative
forms le... -a’ (or -o’, or
-e’). It seems pertinent to note that the expression
ku ts'o: kole’, signifying 'afterward',
'later', 'then', 'nevertheless', is but the verb ts'o:k (4.15) in its intransitive k-IKAL-form
k-PA V-(a)l with the suffix
-e’
required in temporal clauses. Temporal clauses, as well as other time
expressions requiring this suffix, have a characteristic intonation,
ending with a high pitch (but not necessarily high stress) on the
suffix -e’, followed by a brief pause.
Temporal clauses signifying 'As soon as (x occurred)' begin with the demonstrative
le. Their construction may be thus indicated:
le + k-IKAL + -e’. Likewise,
with other than the k-IKAL-constructions, a temporal clause
of the form le + (Verbal unit) + -e’
asserts that very brief interval is concerned in the sequence of the two
or more occurrents spoken of.
Examples of Usage B-5
So far as our texts show,
the construction of the Yucatec relative clause differs from that of
any main clause or sentence only in three respects: (a) after the
antecedents max, 'who', and
baax, 'what',
'that which', the pronouns of Class A of the IKAL and of other
constructions are omitted (cf. 4.31); (b) the first
component of the
relative clause is always its verbal unit; (c) construction
tan + IKAL (4.14) is not used as the
verbal unit of the relative clause, except in its negative form:
maa tan + IKAL. The monochronic references that would
be made by tan + IKAL, if it were used in relative clauses,
are taken care of by the k-IKAL-constructions, in addition
to their usual service in polychronic references (Usage A, 4.28). On the other hand, since k-IKAL is
used in negations only after mix mak and
mix baal (4.32), negative
relative clauses make use of ma + IKAL (4.24) and maa tan + IKAL (4.14) for polychronic and monochronic references,
respectively.
It should be noted that the IKAL, and not the
k-IKAL-constructions, are used in relative clauses with the
verbs that do not take construction tan + IKAL. Some of
these are mentioned in 4.25, instances of Kind B.
Others are verbs signifying 'to belong', as
ti’al (4.23); 'to have' or
'to be at a place', as yan; 'to be in a certain position',
as kulukbal, 'be
seated'chilaan, 'lie'; 'to cease', as
ch'enel; 'to rest', as heelel.
These are the most common, but not the only ones.
Examples of Usage B-6.
In the apodosis of a conditional sentence whose protasis is as above
specified, a k-IKAL-construction
is used for any declarative modality other than improbability. This
point and others pertaining to the structure of conditional sentences
are dealt with more specifically in 4.44. In
conformity with the
preceding specifications, some conditional sentences have a
k-IKAL-construction both in the protasis and the apodosis.
Examples of Usage B-7.
The k-IKAL-constructions
occur in affirmative imperative sentences in at least four kinds of
instances: (a) In compound imperative sentences, after the first of the
clauses of which the sentence is composed; for example, as in the
equivalent of this English sentence: (Go to his house), and tell him (I am waiting for him).
(b)
After previous imperative sentences, as, for example, when giving
instructions for the performance of a task. (c) For topical distinction
of some constituent of the imperative sentence; in which case, the
reference to the dominant topic precedes the
k-IKAL-construction. These are frequently polite requests
or recommendations. (d) When offering help; e.g., If you need me, call me. In these
four kinds of instances, and particularly in the third, one finds now
and then a simple IKAL instead of a k-IKAL-construction.
I have not discovered what distinction is made, if any, by the choice
of either construction in these cases.
Examples of Usage B-8.
Before entering upon the discussion of the uses of these constructions, it may be helpful to summarize their structural characteristics. The constructions referred to by the label 'NULLAK'are as follows:
ka-Forms | (No ka)-Forms | (No ka PA)-Forms | |
---|---|---|---|
TRANSITIVE | |||
Null-Variants | ka PA V-(null) | PA V-(null) | V-(null) |
e-Variants | ka PA V-e | PA V-e | V-e |
INTRANSITIVE | |||
ka V-(a)k-PB | V-(a)k-PB | ||
PASSIVE | |||
ka V-(aa)k-PB | V-(aa)k-PB |
The e-Variants are used whenever both of these
statements are true: (a) No suffix other than -e
is affixed to the verb stem; (b) the transitive NULLAK-construction is
the last or only word of a clause or a sentence. In all other cases,
the transitive NULLAK-construction has no distinctive affix. When the
subject of the (No ka PA)-Form is a 2nd. pers. plur., the
suffix -e'x of the pronominal form a ...
-e'x is required, but the a of the
pronominal form is omitted. Thus, the (No ka PA)-Forms of
the verb ts'a, 'to give', are: ts'a,
ts'ae,
ts'ae'x. The distinctive suffix of the
intransitive is -ak, -ek, -ik,
-ok, -uk, or, with elided vowel,
-k.
The vowel of the suffix is frequently elided when another suffix
follows, particularly in speech of Type B. When the verb stem is simple
(3.1), the vowel of the distinctive suffix is the
same as that of the
stem; e.g., naak-ak, 'ascend'; em-ek,
'descend'; x(i)-ik, 'go', 'move on';
hok'-ok, 'go out', lub-uk, 'fall'. Composite
stems (3.1) and some irregular verbs require
-ak; e.g. ich-ki-n-ak, 'bathe';
tsik-ba-n-ak, 'converse', 'chat';
uk'-u(l)-n-ak, 'drink' (in intransitive usage);
xol-ak, 'kneel', chil-ak, 'lie down'.
These rules hold also for the passive, except that in the passive
construction, -aak is commonly used instead of
-ak when the composite stem consists of only one syllable;
e.g., ta(l)-s-aak, 'bring'; bi(n)-s-aak, 'take
from one place to another'; hok'-s-aak or
ho’-s-aak,
'take out', 'bring out'. A second difference between the passive and
the intransitive forms is that in the former the vowel of a simple stem
is generally doubled if the main stress is on it, and the verbal unit
consists only of the stem and the distinctive suffix of the
NULLAK-construction; e.g., the NULLAK passive of man,
'buy', is maan-ak; that of yets',
'press liquid out by twisting', is yeets'-ek;
t'oh, 'pour out', t'ooh-ok;
k'ub, 'deliver', k'uub-uk.
There are, however, many exceptional formations of the passive
construction. In some sentences, the only indication of the passive use
of a verb is the circumstance that the verb is used transitively
whenever other than a NULLAK-construction is required. For example,
t'ab, 'to light (a candle)', 'to set on fire', was
t'abak
in 6 instances in which there was conclusive evidence that the
construction was passive. In these and in 43 other cases, the form for
the passive usage was exactly like that of an intransitive verb. The
verbs found in these 49 instances occurred in all other cases with
transitive construction. This lack of constructional differentiation
between intransitive and passive NULLAK-forms seems to be due to
changes which have taken place chiefly within the Modern Yucatec
period. Formerly, the passive of some verbs required two suffixes:
-ab (4.10) followed by
-ak; e.g., the passive of han-t, 'to eat (that
which is referred to)' was han-t-ab-ak. This form of
han-t
occurred twice in texts from British Honduras, and once in a text
dictated by Lorenzo Kinil of Chemax, Yucatan, born in 1837. That way of
forming the passive is still prevalent with stems ending in
a. Thus, the passive of ts'a, 'give',
'put', is commonly ts'aabak; and that of
ch'a, 'fetch', 'get', ch'aabak.
But instead of the obsolete or obsolescent
hantabak, we find now han'taak.
The fusion of ka
with the pronouns of the transitive forms was commented upon in 4.27.
It should be noted that, since there is no pronoun of Class B, for the
3rd. pers. sing., the intransitive and the passive 3rd. sing.
NULLAK-form is simply the verb stem with one of the distinctive
suffixes -ak, -ek, etc. Exceptional uses of
-ak instead of -ek, -ik, etc. are
dealt with in 4.47 and 4.48.
The uses of the NULLAK-constructions are not as diverse as those of the
IKAL and k-IKAL
constructions already dealt with; nevertheless, it is not feasible to
formulate verifiable generalizations without dividing their uses into
several classes. Conforming to precedent, one could say, for example,
that we are dealing here with the subjunctive mode of the Yucatec verb.
If that is all that would be said about it, the vagueness of the
statement would be roughly proportional to each reader's acquaintance
with the variety of uses of the devices that have been classed as
subjunctive modes on the grammars of the classical languages, and in
those of the modern languages of
literate and illiterate peoples. To reduce the vagueness of the
statement, one would have to specify the rules that govern the use of
the Yucatec subjunctive; which would obviously necessitate a division of
the uses of the devices in question into classes, just as we have had
to do in these pages The number of divisions would naturally vary
according to the preference of the investigator and the extent to which
the description would be superficial or would deal with details; but it
does not follow that calling the device by a familiar name, or not,
would necessarily have something to do with the extent of this
variation. By not using a familiar name, at least one advantage can be
derived; namely, if a reader decides that this is obviously a
subjunctive mode, he can simply substitute the expression 'subjunctive
mode' for our expression 'NULLAK-constructions'. Another reader can
make whatever other substitution he prefers, if he decides that this is
not a subjunctive. This entails the inconvenience of translating our
expression in all the instances in which it occurs, but to a linguist
that should be a matter of negligible concern. This inconvenience may
be compensated by the freedom allowed to each expert in the use of
current grammatical terminology to apply grammatical terms as he deems
proper.
In the majority of instances in which the
NULLAK-constructions occurred in the texts, they served to refer to
subsequent occurrents (4.3), especially to
discrete-future and
subsequent-past occurrents (4.4, Cases 3 and 6).
This is true if we consider that all imperative sentences refer to
future occurrents; for
whenever an individual tells another to do something, he obviously
commands or requests that he do so at a time subsequent to that
occupied by his imperative communication, however immediate that time
may be. The same holds for the use of the NULLAK-construction in the
references we have termed 'projective' (4.23); for
the occurrent aimed
at must inevitably be subsequent to at least the beginning of that
which is done in order to accomplish the aim. In the majority of the
instances in which the NULLAK-constructions do not refer to subsequent
occurrents, what is referred to is a non-particular referent. Thus, in
temporal clauses, they occur in references to any one of the occasions
on which something is said to take place; and in relative clauses the
antecedent is whoever or whatever may be involved in the reference, and
not this or that particular person or non-person. These generalizations
are, of course, insufficient to delimit the uses of these
constructions; especially since it is the case that references to
subsequent occurrents are made also by means of other constructions,
some of which have already been dealt with (4.12,
4.14, 4.16, 4.18,
4.19, 4.21, 4.23, 4.24, 4.35, 4.36). In order to give
less inadequate
specifications, the uses of the NULLAK-constructions will be divided
into
classes and subclasses of instances treated under the following
headings:
All the forms of the NULLAK-constructions are used in affirmative imperative sentences. The use of each of the forms depends on the circumstances indicated in the following tabulation:
SECOND PERSON | ||
First or only component | Preceded component | |
---|---|---|
Transitive | 1. V-(null) (-e) (-e'x) | 1a. ka PA V-(null) (-e) |
Intransitive | 2. (None) | 2a. ka V-(a)k-PB |
THIRD PERSON AND NON-PARTICULAR SECOND PERSON | ||
First or only component | Preceded component | |
---|---|---|
Transitive | 3. ka u V-(null) (-e) | 3a. Same as 3. |
Intransitive | 4. V-(a)k | 4a. ka V-(a)k |
Passive | 5. ka V-(aa)k | 5a. Same as 5. |
The above headings are to be understood as follows: Under Second Person we
class the instances in which the speaker tells the person or persons
addressed to do what his imperative utterance specifies. Third Person:
the speaker commands or requests that one or more of the persons other
than the one or ones addressed do what his utterance specifies. Non-particular Second Person:
the speaker commands or requests that one or more of the persons
addressed do what he indicates, but he does not specify who among those
addressed is to carry out his orders or comply with his request; e.g.,
'One of you go and fetch some wood'. First or only component: the NULLAK-construction is not
preceded by any component of the sentence, excepting the two specified
below. Preceded component:
some component other than the two specified below precedes the
NULLAK-construction. The preceding component can be another imperative
utterance in a compound imperative sentence; as in '(Go to his house)
and tell him I am waiting for him'. The two exceptional components
referred to above are the word chan and a vocative
(e.g., 'Boys, come here.'). The word chan,
which in other contexts signifies 'little', 'small', is used before the
verbal unit in invitations, kind requests, and the like, with some
vague sense perhaps similar to that of the word 'just' in English in
such sentences as 'Just make yourself at home'.
Position 2 in the above tabulation cannot be occupied by any
NULLAK-construction. The intransitive imperative in that case requires
construction V-en (4.57). The uses of
the Null-Forms and the e-Forms of the transitive are
governed by the rules stated above (4.37). In
Position 2a, suffix -PB is either -ech (singular) or -e'x (plural),
since in this case -PB is always a 2nd. pers. pronoun. In 4, 4a, and 5,
-PB is a null sign. For the sake of simplicity, this null-sign was not
indicated by writing '-PB'. If elucidation on this point is needed, see 2.5. By using a NULLAK-construction in Positions 1a and 2a instead of a k-IKAL-construction as specified in 4.36, a distinction seems to be
made: in most of the cases, the imperative communications employing the NULLAK-constructions
were not imperious orders, and were frequently petitions soliciting
favors; whereas authoritative or imperious orders occurred frequently
with the k-IKAL-constructions. This does not hold, or we
have no evidence that it holds, in approximately 16% of the instances
in which the NULLAK-constructions were preceded components, and in 27%
of the instances in which the k-IKAL-constructions were so
used.
There were exceptions to the rule that for the 3rd. pers. intransitive
imperative (Position 4) the (No ka)-Forms are used.
Instances with ka
occurred mainly in speech of Type A. In this speech-type, the
exceptions constitute 13% of the total number of instances pertaining
to Position 4 in the above tabulation. Incidentally, the exceptions
conform to the examples of third person imperative found in various
grammars written in previous centuries, and also in Lopez Otero's
grammar (1914).
In the explanations of the following examples, the
classification of the construction and its usage will be indicated
thus: 'Usage A(1)', 'Usage A(2a)', etc.; 'A' being the label for the
use of the NULLAK-construction in affirmative imperative sentences, and
the figures and small letters in parentheses refer to the positions in
the above tabulation.
It may be obvious that the statement 'He told me to do it' is a report of a communication which was made by means of an imperative sentence or its equivalent. Every imperative communication can be reported by means of a declarative sentence with a verb of telling, ordering, requesting, begging etc.; the choice of each of these verbs depends on the degree of imperiousness, urge, or solicitude, indicated by the wording of the reported imperative sentence or expression, and the way it was uttered; provided, of course, that the report takes adequate account of this phase of the imperative utterance. The verbs al, 'say', 'tell', and t'an, 'speak', 'address' (and various other senses), were the only ones used in the texts to signify that an imperative utterance is reported. The ka-Forms of the NULLAK-constructions are required in the reported utterance. Examples:
Usage C was observed in clauses subordinate to the following verbs: k'at and olt, both signifying 'to desire'; ts'ibolt, 'wish, would or should like to'; k'abet and tsa’, 'to be necessary, to be required'. With the sense of 'to desire', k'at is a defective verb (3.56). For the constructions that are not permissible with k'at, and for the sense of 'to be willing', olt is used. Its components are: ol, 'mind, will', and various vague senses of that sort; -t, formative (3.26). The components of ts'ibolt are ts'ib, 'to draw pictures, write'; ol and -t as above. k'abet has already been mentioned (4.20) in connection with the IKAL-constructions. It is used with the NULLAK-constructions mainly for needs whose satisfaction is problematic, or unexpected. In clauses subordinate to these verbs, one observes the use of all the ka-Forms, the transitive (No ka)-Forms, and the intransitive V-(a)l construction (4.52). The use of one or another of these constructions depends on whether the verb is transitive or not, and upon whether the subject of the main verb is the same as that of the subordinate clause. Thus:
SAME SUBJECT | DIFFERENT SUBJECTS | |
1. Transitive | 2. Intransitive | 3. Trans., intrans., pass. |
---|---|---|
(No ka)-Forms | V-(a)l | ka-Forms |
Examples with han, 'eat' (intrans.) and
han-t, 'eat' (trans.)
Since both k'abet and tsa’
are used
impersonally, the subjects of their subordinate clauses are never the
same as those of the main verb; for what these verbs signify is that
the occurrent to which the subordinate clause refers is necessary; as
in the English 'It is necessary that
..'. No instance of a passive with the same subject as that of the main
clause has occurred in the texts. In notes out of context several
instances were recorded, but their reliability is unknown, since they
are translations of Spanish sentences.
There were two kinds of exceptions to the rule that the (No
ka)-Forms of the NULLAK-constructions are used for
transitive with the same subject: (a) in 6% of the instances, a
ka-Form was used; and (b) in 9%, a
k-IKAL-construction
(4.27) was used. These exceptions have
approximately the same
distribution in speech of Type A and Type B. The instances are too few
to draw any conclusion as to whether or not any communicational
distinction is made by the use of these less frequent constructions.
Although construction V-(a)l
is not a NULLAK-construction, it seems desirable that its special use
after verbs of wishing be illustrated together with those of the
NULLAK-constructions. Pertinent examples with both kinds of
constructions follow:
The statements made in 4.23 concerning
projective references are here
supplemented by a few observations on the 817 instances in which the
NULLAK-constructions were used in such references. It was said there
that the NULLAK-constructions were used in projective references in
three ways: (a) with tu yo’lal, (b) with u
ti’al,
and (c) without either of those signs. When neither of those two signs
is used, it was agreed to say that the sign of the projective reference
is a constructional sign.
With respect to the forms of the
NULLAK-constructions used in those references, it was observed that in
the transitive both the ka-Forms and the (No
ka)-Forms were used, but for the intransitive and the
passive the ka-Forms
were the only ones employed. As shown in 4.40, that
was also the order
found in the uses of those forms after verbs of wishing.
When we
dealt with the uses of the IKAL-constructions in projective references
(4.23), we mentioned the difficulties met with the
attempt to discover
what rules govern the use of tu yo’lal and u
ti’al
as signs of projective reference. We contend here with the same
difficulties, and in addition we are confronted with the question of
what determines the use of the constructional sign. The distribution of
the 817 instances with respect to the use of those three signs of
projective reference, and with respect to whether the form of the
NULLAK-construction is transitive, intransitive, or passive, is as
follows:
Trans. | Intr. | Pass. | Totals | |
tu yo’lal | 15 | 14 | 12 | 41 |
u ti’al | 241 | 23 | 32 | 296 |
Constr. sign | 420 | 60 | 0 | 480 |
676 | 97 | 44 | 817 |
It is seen that there was no instance of the passive
with constructional sign. But, in view of the complexity of the whole
question, it seems unwarranted to formulate a rule on the basis of only
44 instances. For reasons of the same sort, every generalization that
could be made concerning the transitive and the intransitive would be
of unknown validity, particularly since there were exceptions to every
rule we attempted to formulate.
An inquiry into the 676 instances of transitive construction led to the
observation that after verbs signifying locomotion or transference of
tangible objects the projective reference was made most frequently by
means of the constructional sign with the (No ka)-Forms
when the subjects of the two clauses referred to the same person or
persons. The communication in this special group of instances is of
this sort: 'I went to his house to notify him', 'They brought it here
to show it to you'. Other constructions occurred when the subjects of
the two clauses did not refer to the same persons or agencies, as in
'They brought it here so that you could take care for it'.
In order to obtain a fairly precise delimitation of this group of
instances, we dealt only with 13 verbs, and only with the instances in
which these verbs signified motion from one place to another, or
transference of tangible objects from one place to another. The 13
verbs are: bin, 'go'; tal, 'come';
ok, 'enter'; hok', 'pass from the inside to
the outside of'; man, 'pass by a place, or walk about in
unspecified direction'; naak, 'climb, get on top of';
em, 'move downward'; and the transitive verbs formed by
affixing the formative -s to some of the preceding with the
required phonologic modification, as bis, 'take, carry
away' (transfer by going); tas, 'bring' (transfer by
coming); oks, transfer inward; hok's, transfer
outward; naaks, transfer upward; ens,
transfer downward. The total number of instances in which those 13
verbs preceded a projective reference made by means of a transitive
NULLAK-construction was 501. Of these there were 371 in which the two
clauses had the same subject,
using this phrase in the sense above specified. There were 130
instances in which they had different subjects. The following
tabulation gives the distribution of those instances with respect to
the use of the ka-Forms and the (No ka)-Forms,
and with respect to the three kinds of signs of projective
reference:
Label | Projective reference | Same Subj. | Diff. Subj. | Total |
A-1 | tu yo’lal ka PA V-(e) | 0 | 6 | 6 |
A-2 | tu yo’lal PA V-(e) | 1 | 1 | 2 |
B-1 | u ti’al ka PA V-(e) | 6 | 10 | 16 |
B-2 | u ti’al PA V-(e) | 13 | 105 | 118 |
C-1 | ka PA V-(e) | 0 | 8 | 8 |
C-2 | PA V-(e) | 351 | 0 | 351 |
371 | 130 | 501 |
Rules for the use of the constructions C-2 and B-2 could be inferred
from the
above tabulation were it not for 20 exceptional instances in one case
and 25 in the other. It may facilitate further discussion if we let
x and y stand, respectively, for whatever is true of those 20
and 25 instances. Two rules may now be conveniently worded thus:
Rule 1. Except when x is the
case, construction C-2 is used in projective reference whenever the
three following statements are true:
(a) The verb of the clause preceding that of the projective reference
is one of the 13 above specified.
(b) The verb in the clause of the projective reference is
transitive.
(c) The two clauses have the same subject.
Rule 2. Except when y is the
case, construction B-2 is used in projective references whenever
statements a and b under Rule 1 are true, and
statement c under the same rule
is not true.
Since three different constructions, A-2, B-1, and B-2, were used in
the 20 instances of which x is
true, it cannot be taken for granted that x
stands for a single requirement. Further inquiry into those 20
instances can hardly be expected to yield reliable results. For
whatever one would find would be of unknown validity, since the largest
number of instances with one of those constructions is only 13. For
y
the circumstances are even more unfavorable both with respect to the
number of instances and the number of constructions. Still, the
following may be worth noting: in 203 of 351 instances in which
construction C-2 was used, the projective reference followed
immediately after the verb of the preceding clause; i.e., without any
intervening words. With respect to the number of intervening words, the
following was found upon comparing the 13 instances of B-2 with those
having C-2:
No. of words | Constr. C-2 | Constr. B-2 |
7 | 0 | 1 |
6 | 0 | 3 |
5 | 0 | 2 |
4 | 0 | 2 |
3 | 2 | 1 |
2 | 25 | 0 |
1 | 121 | 0 |
0 | 203 | 4 |
351 | 13 |
We see that none of the 351 instances with construction
C-2 had more than 3 intervening words, whereas 9 of the 13 instances
with B-2 had 3 or more. It seems improbable that the number of
intervening words is irrelevant to the use of construction C-2. On the
other hand, the 4 instances at the bottom of the second column indicate
that the number of intervening words is not the only determinant in the
use of construction B-2. It so happens that those 4 instances occurred
after the verb bin,
'go', and they constitute the only exceptions to what was observed
concerning projective references after this verb. Constructions with
bin deserve special attention, as we proceed to show.
Other uses of bin
are discussed in 4.42 and 4.56. At this point we are concerned only
with the constructions whereby the aim of going to or from a place is
specified. The constructions required in such cases are identical with
those which most frequently serve to communicate predictions or
resolutions, such as are communicated in English by to be going + infinitive; e.g., It is going to rain, I am going to tell you right now what I
think about it.
In many cases it could not be inferred from the context whether the
Yucatec sentence signified that someone is going somewhere in order to
do something, or simply that someone will do something. For this reason
we do not know how many were this instances of projective reference
after bin. We classed as such only those in which the
place of destination was specified in the same or in the previous
sentence. The number of instances of this sort was 158. The rest of
them together with the instances in which the same constructions served
to communicate predictions or resolutions would probably amount to more
than two thousand; for these constructions with bin are
among the ones which occurred most frequently throughout the texts. In
all but the 4 instances noted above, the NULLAK-construction found
after bin is the transitive (No ka)-Form; that
is, PA V-(e).
For those 4 instances we can offer no explanation. No intransitive or
passive NULLAK-constructions were used in projective references after
bin, but they were used after tal, 'come'; and
after hok',
'go out, come out'. This lends support to the hypothesis that the verb
preceding the projective reference is one of the determinants in the
occurrence of some constructions in such references. For the
intransitive and passive constructions used in projective references
after bin see 4.23 and 4.55.
Examples with transitive constructions:
The constructions discussed under this heading are:
Transitive: bin PA
V-(e)
Intransitive: bin
V-(a)k-PB
Passive: bin
V-(aa)k-PB
In these constructions, no suffix is added to bin, nor is
this word preceded by a pronoun, as it is in various contexts in which
bin signifies 'to go'. Here, bin
is simply the distinctive sign of a construction. In this respect, and
also with regard to the fact that the sign is invariable,
bin is like tan in construction
tan + IKAL (4.14). Writers on Old
Yucatec, as well as later authors, have used the transitive and the
intransitive forms of bin
+ NULLAK to exemplify "the future tense" of the Yucatec verb. In all
but 9 instances the above constructions were used in our texts to refer
to discrete-future occurrents (4.4, Case 3). Those 9
instances indicate
that these constructions do not constitute an exception to the rule in
Modern Yucatec that the forms which serve to refer to the present or to
the future, can serve also to refer to the past. Throughout the
preceding portion of Part IV it has been shown that with regard to
chronologic specifications, the distinctions which determine by and
large the uses of Yucatec constructions are those denoted in these
pages by the terms 'prior', 'contemporary', and 'subsequent', in the
senses specified in 4.3. In the 9 instances referred
to, we find bin + NULLAK in references to subsequent-past
occurrents (4.4, Case 6); as in '(He said that he
would do it regardless of) what might happen to him' (he
baax bin uchuk tie’).
Construction bin
+ NULLAK occurred approximately 5 times more frequently in references
to events whose occurrence at a distant and unspecified time is
predicted, and in generalizations concerning the future, than with
reference to particular events expected to occur within a few days. No
instance was observed in which the reference is to the same day in
which the prediction is made. In many cases we were unable to account
satisfactorily for the use of other bin-constructions
(4.56) instead of the ones under consideration. It
is possible that in
speech of Type B and to a lesser extent in speech of Type A,
bin
+ NULLAK is seldom used in references to practical everyday affairs.
This applies particularly to the intransitive and the passive forms.
For negative predictions, construction bin + NULLAK has
occurred only in generalizations with mix bi
k'in, 'never': viz.: 'So-and-so will never happen'.
In all other instances, even in the various versions of a certain
traditional account of how the world will end, a different construction
was employed (4.14) after the common negative
ma or ma’.
The uses of the transitive NULLAK-forms in other
bin-constructions which serve to refer to the future are
dealt with in 4.56.
Miscellaneous examples:
The negative imperative sentences in question serve to recommend
caution, to give warning, or to ridicule by telling someone not to do
what he cannot help doing, or is in need of doing. The negative sign is
most frequently bik, a B-variant of which is
mik. The verbal unit following either of these negative
signs is a (No ka)-Form of the NULLAK-constructions.
Examples:
Both the ka-Forms and the (No ka)-Forms of the NULLAK-constructions occurred in the sentences in which Usage G was observed. The order found in the occurrence of each of these two kinds of forms can be indicated conveniently by dealing with constructional units thus composed: Conditional sign + NULLAK. The words and phrases classed as conditional signs are: wa, 'if'; wa tu men, 'if, if perchance'; esak tu men, 'in case that ...'; haali, or chen baale’, or chen baale’ haali, 'provided', 'on condition that', 'only if'. In other contexts, both chen and haali can be rendered by 'only', and baale’ by 'but', 'however'. esak is the V-ak form (4.37) of es, 'to show', from Old. Yuc. et-ç-(ah), variant of et-eç, 'to show'. In other contexts, the phrase tu men signifies 'because'; or 'by', as sign of the agent of the passive voice (4.10). The units consisting of conditional sign + NULLAK are as follows:
I. Affirmative with ka-Forms | |
1. | wa ka-Forms |
2. | (a) haali ka-Form (b) chen baale’ ka-Form (c) chen baale’ haali ka-Form |
II. Affirmative with (No ka)-Forms | |
3. | wa tu men (No ka)-Form |
4. | esak tu men (No ka)-Form |
III. Negative with (No ka)-Form | |
5. | wa ma, or wa tu men ma, or esak tu men ma, or haali ma, etc. followed by a (No ka)-Form |
The kinds of sentences in which the above
constructional units (1, 2a, ..., 5) occurred, and the particular unit
or units employed in each kind of sentence, are as follows:
Usage G-1. Conditional
sentences contrary to fact; viz., 'If he had come, I would have seen
him'. Unit 1 is used in the protasis.
Usage G-2.
Suppositions concerning the future. It seems that by using Unit 1, or
3, or 4 in the protasis different declarative values (4.7) are ascribed
to the suppositions, but the evidence on this point is not conclusive.
In about 46% of the instances in which wa tu men
was the sign of the conditional sentence there was an implication of
improbability of this sort: 'It is not likely to happen, but if it
happens, ... 'esak tu men is the usual sign of
condition in the expression esak tu men toh k
oole’,
'if we happen to be in good health', which the old folk of some
localities are in the habit of uttering when they make an appointment,
or
propose some plan or enterprise. In that expression an undetermined
declarative value is probably ascribed to the condition; that is, the
implication is 'we may be in good health and we may not, and we do not
know which alternative will be true'. But with a NULLAK-construction,
the implication seems to be rather of this sort: 'If x happens, as it probably will,
..'
Usage G-3. Provisory
promises; viz.: 'I will do x
provided you do y'.
The proviso requires Unit 2a, or 2b, or 2c. If any communicational
distinction is made by using one rather than another of these three
units, we failed to discover it.
Examples of these various uses are:
These references can be of two kinds: (a) unrestricted; e.g., 'any object'; (b) restricted; e.g., 'any object which weighs at least two pounds'. The instances that concern us here are of the restricted kind. In such instances, the clause referring to a non-particular referent requires a ka-Form of the NULLAK-constructions. With the words max ('who'), baax ('what'), and tuux ('where'), the construction of the clause is as follows:
The parentheses indicate the position of the verbal unit containing the NULLAK-construction. The clause ends with the suffix -e’, as in other uses of construction he ... -e’ (4.16, 4.30). Examples:
The temporal clauses requiring the NULLAK-constructions serve two
kinds of references: (a) generalization; e.g., 'Whenever x is the case, y
occurs'; (b) reference to particular or non-particular future time;
e.g., 'When he comes, tell him to wait for me'. For both kinds of
references the (No ka)-Forms of the NULLAK-constructions
are used, and the clause begins with one of these words or phrases:
ken, kan, le ken, le
kan, which may conveniently be said to signify 'when' or
'whenever', depending on the context. The clause ends with the suffix
-e’, whether or not it begins with le, as
in the temporal clauses previously dealt with (4.33). No distinction was observed between the use of
ken and le ken, or kan and
le kan. One finds kan and le kan
more frequently than ken and le ken in speech
of Type A. In Old Yucatec we have observed only kan.
Examples:
The NULLAK-constructions were found after the following words:
binak, X-variant binaki,
signifying 'maybe', 'possibly'; olak, 'to have been
just about to (happen)', 'barely to miss doing something';
kakah, X-variant kak, 'to begin
resolutely or energetically to do something', 'get busy doing
something'; olt, 'to attempt to'; in other contexts
'desire' (4.40). In the first of these words we
have a use of the verb bin comparable to that explained in
4.42; for binak(-i)
has occurred only in references to future events. The difference
between the two kinds of future reference is one of declarative value
(4.7); for binak(-i) is used for
conjectures, whereas bin + NULLAK (4.42) has occurred even in such references as 'I shall
die some day'. The use of bin to ascribe a low declarative
value to a reference is observed also in the instances dealt with in 4.56. If binak is classed as a
NULLAK-construction, the vowel of the suffix -(a)k is
exceptional. One would expect -ik, as in the NULLAK-form
kimik of the verb kim, 'to die'. A
similar exceptional use of -ak is seen in the word
uchak, 'perhaps', an X-variant of which is
unchak. Assuming that in
uchak we have the verb uch, 'to
happen', one has to conclude that there are two NULLAK-forms of
uch; namely, uchuk, as in
ma in k'ati ka uchuk, 'I don't want it to
happen' (4.40) and uchak
signifying a low declarative value approximately like that indicated by
the English word 'perhaps' in some contexts. The latter form, however,
is not used exclusively with the sense of 'perhaps'. In 4 instances
uchak
occurred with the sense of 'to happen', 'to take place' in imperative
sentences addressed to a third or unspecified person (4.38); e.g., uchak le
ok'oto’, 'let the dancing take place!' With the
above word, olak, the circumstances are different.
The stem ol signifying 'mind', 'will', 'imagination',
'desire', etc., requires the formative -t in a verbal unit.
That is the case also when olt signifies 'to attempt', as
above indicated. With the formative -t we have a composite
stem, and therefore (4.37) the suffix of its
NULLAK-form is expected to be -ak. Thus, what is irregular
in the word olak is both that the formative
-t is omitted, and that the suffix -ak,
instead of an expected -ok,
is nevertheless used. If all these are classed as NULLAK-constructions,
we have here a special usage of those constructions which, so far as
our texts show, is exemplified only in the references made by these
special words.
The clause following all these words, excepting
uchak, requires the (No ka)-Forms of
the NULLAK-constructions. The clause after uchak,
'perhaps', requires an IKAL-construction, (see 4.20), although there is
apparently only a slight difference of declarative value between a
conjecture with uchak and one with
binak(-i). The latter seems to be a more hypothetic
conjecture.
In Usage K, construction V-(a)k
serves to assert that something has happened, or that it had happened
prior to some past time referred to in the context. Since for those two
chronologic specifications construction ts'ook +
IKAL has been used also (4.15), further
delimitation is necessary. The following was observed: (1)
V-(a)k is used only with intransitive verbs, but
ts'ook + IKAL serves the same usage with
transitive, intransitive and passive. (2) ts'ook +
IKAL can refer to a prior-past, a discrete-past, or a prior-future
occurrent (4.4, Cases 1, 4, 7); whereas
V-(a)k with Usage K has occurred only in references to
prior-past and discrete-past. (3) Usage K of V-(a)k
occurred in negative as well as in affirmative sentences; but
ts'ook
+ IKAL has been used only in affirmative assertions. Since in
affirmative assertions with intransitive verbs both constructions are
used to refer to discrete-past and prior-past occurrents, we have to
ask further what determines the choice of either construction in such
cases. Perhaps we could answer this question satisfactorily if we were
able to state in fairly precise terms what it is that the Spanish word
ya
signifies in affirmative sentences; for that was the word used by our
bilingual informants in their translations to distinguish the sense of
ts'ook + IKAL from that of V-(a)k.
Since in some contexts 'already' is the equivalent of ya,
we may vaguely indicate what is approximately the distinction in
question by asking what is the difference between saying 'I have
already done it' and 'I have done it', or 'I did it'. That the
distinction has nothing to do with chronologic specifications is
clearly shown by such sentences as this: 'I have already done it, and I
did it just to please you'.
It seems that the difference in question must be sought in the
discoursive or circumstantial context, rather than in the temporal, or
descriptive specifications of the occurrent referred to. But this
conjecture has not been tested to an adequate extend. We have touched
upon this question simply to indicate roughly what remains to be done
to distinguish the uses of the two Yucatec constructions under
consideration.
Irregularities in the vowel of the suffix -(a)k of the
intransitive NULLAK-construction V-(a)k
are found more frequently in Usage K than in the uses of this
construction already dealt with. For example, in texts from different
localities, we found luk'uk and
luk'ak, both signifying 'he has left', 'he has
departed'; and uchuk,
uchak, uchik, signifying
'it has happened', or 'it had happened'. The irregular forms
uchak and binak were mentioned
in 4.47. Various other irregularities with respect
to the agreement of the vowel of -(a)k with that of a
simple stem are pointed out in 4.49.
There is much in common between Usage K of construction
V-(a)k and the use of the suffix -ak
with the names of the days of the week. The days of the week are always
referred to in Modern Yucatec by their Spanish names pronounced more or
less in conformity with Yucatec speech-habits; e.g.,
domingo, 'Sunday';
bieernes, 'Friday';
sabado, 'Saturday'. When a day of a preceding
week is referred to, the suffix -ak is affixed to the name
of the day; e.g., sabadoak,
'last Saturday' (discrete-past), 'the previous Saturday' (prior-past).
Here, the occurrent is the passing of a day; or, worded in terms of our
knowledge, a rotation of the earth. The so-called "names of the days of
the week" are more like the words 'first', 'second', 'third', etc. than
like 'John' or 'tree', or 'water'; for all that need be true of a day
to be properly called Monday
is expressible only in terms of chronologic order with respect to a
calendar. To happen before, and to happen after, are occurrents in the
sense in which the term 'occurrent' is used here (4.1). Thus, comparing, for example,
sabadoak, 'last Saturday', with
talak, 'he has come', we find that both expressions
serve to refer to prior occurrents, and both consist of a stem and the
suffix -ak. Yucatec structure offers no ground in this case
for classing the stem of sabadoak otherwise
than as a verbal stem. But this difference is to be noted:
sabadoak
and all other expressions referring to previous days of the week have
occurred only in temporal clauses; and in temporal clauses the
intransitive NULLAK-construction V-(a)k formed with other
stems does not refer to prior occurrents (4.46).
Examples of Usage K with construction V-(a)k.
The suffix -(a)k of the intransitive NULLAK-construction is found in a number of verbal units, many of which can be translated into English by means of the verb 'to be' followed by an adjective or a participle. They serve to assert (a) that something or someone is or was in a certain position or posture; or (b) that something or someone has or had a certain shape, or (c) certain properties, or manner of behaving; or (d) that something or someone is or was in a certain condition; e.g., wet, frightened, swollen. In some cases the condition or posture is a consequence of an event of the sort that is referred to by the stem of the verb. For example, heehetek, 'it is cracked in several places', asserts a condition or circumstance which is a consequence of events of the sort designated by hat, 'to crack', 'to split'. Similarly, kul, 'to sit down', gives kul-uk-ba-l, 'he is (or was) seated'; chil-ik-ba-l, 'he is (was) lying', refers to a circumstance which is a consequence of the act signified by chil, 'to lie down'. Some of the constructions are identical with regular intransitive NULLAK-constructions, while others differ from them in one or more of the following respects: (1) the vowel of the suffix -(a)k is not the same as that of the simple stem. (2) Reduplication of the stem is required. (3) The suffix -(a)k is preceded by another operative (3.). (4) The suffix -(a)k is followed by an operative other than a pronoun of Class B. We proceed to illustrate the various types of constructions observed. For convenience, only the 3rd. pers. sing. is given and each example is translated as though it referred to a present occurrent. But it should be understood that for the other persons the pronouns of Class B are used as with any other intransitive NULLAK-construction, and that the chronologic specification can be contemporary-past (4.4, Case 5) as well as present. Thus, corresponding to the 3rd. pers. sing., sublak, 'he (she) is (was) bashful', we have sublaken for 1st. pers.; sublakech for 2nd. sing.; sublake'x for 2nd. plur.; etc. The range of application of some of the words used below to illustrate the various forms may be wider than indicated by the translations. They are all translated in conformity with the particular context in which we have found them. The letter S stands for a simple or a composite stem. For a reduplicated stem we shall write SS.
FORM 1. S-(a)k with or without vocalic agreement between S and -(a)k. | |
sah-ak | 'he is afraid' (sah-ben, 'it is frightful, terrible') |
pet-ek | 'it is flat and round' |
xil-ik | 'it is wrinkled' |
wiyh-ak | 'he is hungry continually for lack of food'; Spanish hambriento |
p'ool-ak | 'it is full of blisters'; '(tortillas) are puffed up' |
k'ux-uk | 'it burns' (describing pain) |
chum-uk | 'it is in the middle' |
FORM 2. SS-(a)k and SS-n-ak. For intransitive formative -n see 3.24. | |
hehet-ek | 'it is cracked in several places' |
wowol-ok | 'it is spherical' |
susut-ak | 'it revolves, or moves around something else' |
lelem-n-ak | it is brilliant, it glitters' |
mimis-n-ak | 'it is dragging on the ground' |
mumul-n-ak | 'they are disorderly piled up' |
FORM 3. S-(a)l-(a)k. | |
xak-al-ak | 'he crawls on hands and knees' (ʃak-aan, 'a quadruped') |
p'uch-al-ak | 'it is shredded, it is ripped' |
koot-ol-ak | '(grains of corn) are withering' |
p'och-l-ak | '(trees) are loaded (with fruit)' (p'och, 'a bunch') |
hop-l-ak | 'it burns' (said of chile in mouth or eyes) |
po(’)-l-ok | 'he is obese' (po’, 'big abdomen') |
kux-l-ik | 'he is alive' (kux-t-al, 'life') |
FORM 4. S-cha(or -k'a, or pa)-l-ak. For formatives -cha, -k'a, pa see 3.27, 3.37. |
|
ot-cha-l-ak | '(overripe fruit) is dropping (from tree)' |
nol-cha-l-ak | '(loose legs of table or bench) squeak' |
lub-cha-l-ak | '(drunkard) tumbles and gets up repeatedly' |
t'ok-pa-l-ak | 'it is fragile' |
kuk-cha-l-ak or kuk-k'a-l-ak | '(restless person in hammock) turns over and changes posture repeatedly' |
man-k'a-l-ak | '(shower, rain) is of the sort that is over in a brief time' |
FORM 5. S-ba-n-ak. In other constructions, -ba is a reflexive sign (2.7). Intransitive formative -n as in Form 3. | |
siy-ba-n-ak | 'it is getting dry' |
al-ba-n-ak | '(candle) is soft (due to heat)' |
muts-ba-n-ak | 'it is withering' |
huts-ba-n-ak | '(tree that is being felled) is about to fall' |
FORM 6. S-(a)k-n-ak. | |
xab-ak-n-ak | '(objects fallen from container) are scattered (on ground)' |
chal-ak-n-ak | '(muddy water) is getting clear, or is now clear' |
p'al-ak-n-ak | '(rope) is frayed due to wear' |
ak'-ak-n-ak | 'it is slimy' |
tap-ak-n-ak | '(odor) is pungent' |
k'an-ak-n-ak | 'it is neither green nor ripe' |
wek-ak-n-ak | '(liquid) is spilt on ground' |
mis-ak-n-ak | variant of mimis-n-ak (see under Form 2) |
FORM 7. S-(a)k-ba-l. Suffix -ba as in Form 5. | |
kul-uk-ba-l | 'he is seated' |
chil-ik-ba-l | 'he is lying (on ground or hammock)' |
waal-ak-ba-l | 'he is standing' |
kah-ak-ba-l | 'he resides. he is a resident (of a village)' |
p'ok-ok-ba-l | 'she is seated with her legs folded under' (Indian fashion) |
xak-ak-ba-l | 'he is on his hands and knees' (see xakalak under Form 3) |
ch'eb-ek-ba-l | 'it slants' (it is not vertical) |
kop-ok-ba-l | '(snake) is coiled' |
FORM 8. S-aan-ak and S-aan-t-ak. For -aan see 4.53. Formative -t (3.26). | |
tak'-aan-ak | 'it is stuck (adhesively)' |
tos-luum-aan-ak | '(face) is filthy from dust' |
chik-aan-ak | 'it is marked' (a sign has been put on it) |
k'al-aan-t-ak-o'b | 'they are locked up' |
sin-aan-t-ak | '(hammocks) are tied' (i.e., are hanging ready for use) |
chuk-aan-t-ak-o'b | 'they are trapped' |
So far as our texts and supplementary inquiries show,
each of the 8 forms illustrated above is used with certain stems and
not with others. This idiosynchratic restriction is not a recent
development. In a considerable number of instances, the Motul
dictionary enters as special words many which are constructed as we
have just indicated. All the words of the first 6 groups of examples
are so entered, and they are defined as being equivalent to Spanish
adjectives. Forms 7 and 8 may be later developments, or the words with
those forms may have been excluded from the dictionary on the ground
that they appeared to be inflexional forms of the Yucatec verb, more
properly dealt with in a grammar than in a dictionary. Words with Forms
7 and 8 are found in Pio Perez' dictionary. They are there translated
by means of Spanish adjectives or past participles; but only those with
construction V-aan (4.53) are said to
be past participles (participios
pasivos) of the Yucatec verb. Thus, with the stem
chil, 'to lie down', we find chilaan (chilaan) as past
participle of chital, variant
chiltal; and also chilicbal
(chilikbal). The Spanish equivalent given for
chilaan is simply acostado; but for chilicbal the author resorts to an
old way of defining adjectives in dictionaries: cosa acostada, tendida.
This translation may or may not imply that the word is applicable to
inanimate objects, and not to persons. If that is the implication, it
contradicts our observations. In our texts,
chilikbal was used only for persons and animals that
were lying as a consequence of having laid down to sleep or rest.
chilaan was used for persons who lay dead, or unable to
get up. For objects, pek-ek-ba-l or pek-aan
was used for singular reference, and pek-aan-t-ak or
pek-aan-t-ak-o'b,
for plural. When two or more forms are permissible with a given stem,
it is probable that they are not interchangeable in every context, but
our texts do not provide sufficient data to determine the range of
application of the various combinations of -(a)k with the
other operatives shown in the above 8 forms.
The affixation of -t-ak to construction V-aan
(4.53) as illustrated under Form 8 occurred only in
references to more
than one person or non-person. Previous writers on Yucatec class tac (-tak) as a sign of
plurality used exclusively with past participles ending in
-aan or -an. López Otero
(Gramática, 1914, p.64) notes that the common sign of plurality
ob (-o'b) may
be affixed to tac. For the
plural of chilaan he lists
these three forms: chilantac,
chilanob, chilantacob, which he gives
apparently as equivalent variants. We did not discover any rule for the
addition of -o'b to -t-ak, but an
adequate study of this whole topic requires a great deal more
information than is now available to us.
The following sentences illustrate common uses of some of the 8 forms
listed above:
These are simple stems employed jointly with the stems of the
various verbal constructions to describe actions of various sorts.
Take, for example, xot', which signifies 'a piece that
has been cut off', or 'to cut off'; and ch'ak, used
with the formative -t (ch'ak-t),
signifying 'to cut by striking' (with an ax, a machete, or some other
tool similarly used). Each of those two stems can be the V-component of
the
transitive AHAB-construction t-PA V-ah; e.g.,
tu xot'ah, 'He cut it off'; tu ch'aktah, 'He cut it by striking'. Or the two stems can
be used jointly in a single AHAB-construction which we may formulate
thus: t-PA V V-ah; e.g., tu xot'
ch'aktah, approximately: 'He chopped it off with a
single stroke', or 'He chopped them up'. We say that in this case
xot' is used as an 'adjunct verbal stem'.
We distinguish between adjunct verbal stems and composite verbal stems
on these two grounds: (1) The phonologic rules governing the accent of
verbal units apply both to simple and to composite stems, but not to
combinations of adjunct verbal stems with other stems. (2) The
combinations of the constituents of composite stems are
lexicographically predetermined; but the combinations resulting from
the use of adjunct verbal stems are circumstantially determined. That
is to say, whether two given items are or are not to be combined,
depends in the case of the adjunct verbal stems on what one wishes to
communicate; just as it depends on what one wishes to communicate
whether one should say 'It is a horse', or 'It is a black horse'. In
the case of the composite stems, the combination is as predetermined as
that of 'under' and 'stand' in our word 'understand'.
Adjunct verbal stems have occurred in all the verbal constructions, and
their position is always immediately before the V-component of the
construction. Some stems have been found in no other constructions than
those in which they were adjunct verbal stems. The most common of these
is han,
'to do in a hurry', 'to proceed without further ado', 'to act without
regard for the consequences', 'not to make much of what is done'.
Examples contrasting verbal units with and without han: 1.
ka xolako'b. 'And they knelt down';
ka han xolako'b, approximately: 'And right
away they knelt down'. 2. ka tu k'alah le huuno’. 'And he sealed the letter';
ka tu han
k'alah le huuno’, ka lik'
yalkabe’.'He hurriedly sealed the letter, and
darted away'. 3. kachek'taabi. 'He was
stepped on' (someone or ones stepped on his body); ka
chechek'taabi (reduplicated stem), 'He
was stepped on repeatedly (on a single occasion)'; ka han
chek'taabi. 'He was mercilessly trampled upon'. 4.
tan u kinsik u k'eek'eno'b.
'They were killing their pigs'; tan u hahan kinsik u
k'eek'eno'b
(reduplicated han), 'They were killing their pigs as fast as they
could' (Context: To prevent the raiders from taking them away). 5.
hahan ch'ak kan p'el mehen xay ch'e’
u ti’al t'inik u k'ano'b. 'Cut as
fast as you can four small Y-shaped sticks to stretch their
hammocks'.
The words that are used as adjunct verbal stems are quite numerous. In
fact, it is probable that any stem that designates action can be so
used. This device enables the speaker to describe action in a brief and
specific manner, a circumstance which bilingual individuals often point
out when commenting on the inadequacy of Spanish words to report a
happening as much in detail as in customary when speaking Yucatec.
Take, for example, the action of throwing something with force, for
which the stem ch'in is used. By combining with it the
stem ch'ik,
'to drive a pointed object into the ground (or some other substance
into which driving by pressure is feasible)', the act of driving a
pointed object by throwing it like a javelin is described: tu
ch'ik ch'intah luum. 'He threw it and drove
it into the ground'. Replace ch'ik by hup,
'to insert into something that offers little resistence', and we
get tu hup ch'intah, which describes an act such
as that of throwing a stick into the water tip first. If we replace
hup by xak, 'to rest on four props or
legs (like a table or an animal)', we get tu xak
ch'intah, said of an instance in which a man was thrown
out of the house, and landed on his hands and knees. Similarly, tu
k'ah ch'intah is said of the act of splitting something
by dashing it against a stone, a tree, a wall, etc. (k'ah,
'to split by concussion'). xik, 'to crumble,
disintegrate'; tu xik ch'intah, 'He dashed
it against (a hard object) and shattered it to pieces'. tu pik
ch'intah, 'He threw it in disgust (or with wrath, or
just to get rid of it)'. tu lem ch'intah, said of
an act of throwing something into the foliage of a bush as to hide it
(lem, 'to insert into piled objects, or as a stick into a
load of firewood')
Occupying the same position as the adjunct verbal stems, we find the
numeral kaa, 'two', signifying 'once more', 'again';
et, 'together with', 'in the company of', 'bringing along
(some object)'; mul, 'in a group', 'all together'; e.g.,
kone'x mul ichintik, 'Let us
bathe together'. le ken taake’, yet tal hun
chach sipche’, 'When he comes, he brings
along (comes with) a bunch of herbs'. tu kaa
xikpatah tu pol, 'Once more he smashed it on his
head'.
All adjunct verbal stems whose initial sound is a vowel require the
prefixes w- (for 1st. and 2nd. pers.), and y-
(for 3rd. pers.). Examples with op', 'to indent by
pressure', 'to crack shells or nuts by pressing': kin wop'
k'uxtikech, 'I will bite you (driving teeth in the
flesh)'; ka tu yop' k'uxtah, 'And he bit him'
(as in the preceding example).
Some stems which are generally used without the formative
-t (3.26) are found with this suffix
when certain adjunct verbal stems precede them. The above examples with
ch'in, 'to throw', are of this sort. We were unable to
find any rule for this use of -t. This was observed only in
transitive constructions, and in no instance did this particular use of
-t occur when the adjunct verbal stem was han,
'to do in a hurry', etc.
The description of these constructions will be based on these two formulas:
AEO-Units | |
---|---|
Form 1. | IC-TC |
Form 2. | IC IU-TC |
The notation 'IC' stands for the initial component of an AEO-Unit. IC can be one of the
following stems: bey, 'thus', 'just like', etc.
he(l), (untranslatable apart from TC and IU-TC).
le(l), a component of some demonstrative devices.
te(l), 'here' or 'there'. way,
'here', 'hereabout'. The notation 'TC' stands for the terminal
component of an AEO-Unit. TC is always one of the following
suffixes: -a’, -e’,
-o’. In Form 2, 'IU' stands for an included unit.
IU can be (a) a simple or a composite stem used as a Yucatec noun, or
(b) two or more words which are components of a phrase, or (c) a verbal
unit consisting of two or more words, or (d) a unit which in other
instances can be a sentence. TC is always suffixed to the last
component of IU, regardless of what sort of component it may be. The
whole AEO-Unit can be a phrase, or a clause, or a sentence, depending
on its IC and IU components, and on its position in the sentence when
the AEO-Unit is a component of a sentence.
Excepting some of the uses of he(l) with
-e’
as a terminal component, the AEO-constructions are devices of a sort
that could be called 'contextual definitives' (See Note 12). At least
two kinds of references are made by means of contextual definitives:
ostensive, and retrospective. In an 'ostensive reference', the speaker
indicates what item he refers to by pointing or looking at it, or by
taking advantage of some other contextual circumstance, such as the
circumstance that he refers to the very time during which he speaks, as
in some of the uses of the word 'now', or that he refers to the place
where he is at the time he speaks, as in some uses of the word 'here'.
An ostensive reference could be said to be prospective when the item
referred to is demonstrated or exemplified after the reference; as when
one says, 'Do it this way', and
proceeds to specify what he proposes to say. In a 'retrospective
reference', the speaker refers to that which occurred prior to his
reference, or to what was previously mentioned or spoken of by him or
by the one or ones to whom he speaks; e.g., 'That's what I told him'.
Although in order to specify adequately what an AEO-construction
signifies one must deal with its initial and terminal components
concurrently, as constituting in each case a single device, some
generalizations can be made concerning the referential uses of the
terminal components. The terminal component -a’
is used exclusively in ostensive references to items nearer to the
speaker than to the listener, or to a time contemporary with that in
which the reference is made; or in reference to what the speaker
proceeds to demonstrate, exemplify, or speak of. -o’
is
used both in ostensive and in retrospective references. In ostensive
references, the item is nearer to the listener than to the speaker, or
roughly at about the same distance from both. For retrospective
references, either -o’ or -e’ are
used, depending mainly on topical distinction (4.8).
-e’ is used for ostensive references only with
way, 'hereabout'. It should be noted that
-e’
is used otherwise than as a component of AEO-constructions, as shown in
4.58. Specifications more definite than the
preceding can be made by
dealing with each initial component together with the terminal
components that concur with it, as we proceed to do.
bei. Form 1
(bey-TC): beya’, 'in this manner',
'like this'; beyo’, 'in that manner', 'like
that', 'by so doing', 'that being the case'. In no instance was
bey found in Form 1 with -e’ for TC. Form
2 (bey IU-TC): bey IU-a’,
ostensive reference to what is being demonstrated; e.g., bey ku
beetaala’, 'This is the way it is done'.
bey IU-o’, retrospective reference to
what has just been demonstrated, or described; e.g., bey kan a
beeto’, 'That is the way you are going to do it';
(kan, fusion of ka and bin).
bey IU-e’, retrospective reference to a
procedure being discussed, but not demonstrated; e.g., bey
tuune’ (maa tan u pahtal in
baatel), 'That being the case, (I cannot fight)';
tun, 'so', 'therfore'.
he(l). Form 1
(hel-TC). Ostensive references:
heela’ or heela’,
'Here it (he, she) is!', 'Here they are!';
heelo’ or heelo’,
'There it (he, she) is!', 'There they are!'. Both expressions serve to
attract attention to the presence of the referent, rather than to
specify its location. Their uses are very similar to those of French
voici and voilà.
heele’ or heele’,
'I will do so', 'It will certainly be done' (See 4.16). Form 2 (he(l) IU-TC): when TC is
-a’ or -o’ the reference is
ostensive, and differs from Form 1 only in that IU specifies what is
referred to; e.g., he le p'ok tin manaha’, 'Here
is the hat I bought' (he ... -a’). The pronouns of
Class B are affixed to hel, as they are to any intransitive
verb; for example: 2nd. sing., -ech in
heelecho’, 'There you are!' (said
upon noticing the presence of the person referred to). The uses of
he in ostensive references with the
k-IKAL-constructions were discussed in 4.30, Usage B-2. Two special uses of he
IU-e’ were dealt with in 4.16 and
4.45.
The stem hel as an X-variant of he seems to
be mainly a Modern Yucatec development. Historically, the words
heela’, heelo’
are compounds of he and la’,
lo’. Corresponding to Modern Yucate le
(initial component of AEO-Units) and -a’,
-o’, -e’, we find in Old Yucatec
lay la, lo, e. lay, like
Mod. Yuc. le, was the first component of the construction
that required it, la occurred
both as an initial component and as a terminal component. Corresponding
to Mod. Yuc. le ... -a’, we find in Old Yuc. la ... la; as in this example under
la in the Motul dictionary:
la bin a cha la, 'This is what
you will take'. Old Yuc. lo,
like Mod. Yuc. -o’, occurred as a terminal component,
and also affixed to lay; thus,
lailo corresponds to
leelo’,
'that', 'that one'. Adhering to purely descriptive procedures, as we
endeavor to do in these pages, there is some ground for analyzing
heelo’ into a variable stem
he(l) and a suffix -o’, and none for
saying that a variable -(l)o’ is affixed to
he. For in the speech of some localities, hel
without any affix has occurred, though inconsistently. On the other
hand, there is no more reason for analyzing
leelo’ and
teelo’ into the variable stems
le(l), te(l), and a suffix
-o’ (as we have done) than for assuming a variable
suffix -(l)o’. Historically, of course, the
l is a component of -lo’. With regard to
he(l), Old Yucatec presents the same sort of difficulty.
For although e was the form of
the terminal component at the end of a phrase or a sentence, when
affixed to he we find hele; as in laac hele laac çamal laac, 'Be it today, or tomorrow, or
some other day' (Motul dictionary, Art. laac).
le(l). Form 1
(lel-TC): leela’, 'this',
'this one'; leelo’, 'that', 'that one'. For
the intervening consonant -l- see the preceding paragraph.
leela’ is used only in ostensive
references. leelo’ is used both in
ostensive and retrospective references. Form 1 with
-e’ has not been found. Form 2 (le
IU-TC): the only difference between a reference with Form 2 and one
with Form 1 is that in the former IU specifies explicitly what is
referred to, e.g., le peek'a’, 'this dog';
le peek'o’, 'that dog' or 'the dog';
le pek' a machmao’, 'That dog you are
holding'. The form le IU-e’
is used in retrospective references and in vague references to what may
be present or occur in a non-immediate future time. In retrospective
references, le IU-e’ is not used when the
identity of the item specified by IU is the dominant topic. Aside from
such instances, it is difficult to disclose what governs the choice of
le UI-e’ or le
UI-o’ in retrospective references. For the special use
of le IU-e’ in temporal clauses, see 4.33. Sentences which illustrate the most common uses
of le IU-TC are found in 4.14, Exx. 1,
5, 6, 7; 4.15, Exx. 5, 7, 8, 9; 4.18, Ex. 5; 4.20, Exx. 9, 10; 4.34, Exx. 37, 39, 40.
te(l). Form 1
(tel-TC): teela’, 'here',
ostensive reference to a particular locus generally indicated by a
gesture. teelo’, 'there', ostensive or
retrospective reference. Form 1 with -e’ for TC has
not occurred. The uses of Form 2 (te IU-TC) differ from
those of Form 1 only in that IU specifies the place referred to. Form
te IU-TC is not used when IU contains one of the
constructions that require ti’
IU-i(’), as shown in 4.59. In 4.59 we compare the most common uses of
-i(’) with those of the terminal components of the
AEO-constructions. It should be noted that te, as a fusion
of ti’ and le, and te,
signifying 'there', as in form te IU-TC, are homophonic
devices governed by different rules. It is observed that
ti’ and le fuse into te more
frequently when a phrase of the form ti(’) le IU-TC
specifies a location; e.g., te kaaho’
(ti le kaaho’), 'in the village';
kah, 'village, town'.
wai. Form 1
(way-TC). waye’,
'here', ostensive reference to the locality or region in which the
speaker is when he refers to it; or ostensive reference to the
immediate surroundings; or to motion toward the speaker, as in
koten waye’, 'Come here'.
waya’,
'this way', 'in this direction', ostensive reference generally
supplemented by a gesture. This reference differs from one with
teela’ in that the latter is generally
applicable to location, and not to direction of motion.
waye’ differs from
teela’
in that when the former is used the circumstance that the speaker is
within or near the place referred to is sufficient to delimit the scope
of the reference; whereas teela’ depends on
some other contextual circumstance for such delimitation. The gesture
accompanying waye’ in references to space near
the speaker is similar to a gesture indicating direction of motion; and
waye’
signifies in such cases 'hereabout' rather than 'right here'. For
'right here' with a pointing gesture, teːˈlaʔ is the
expression
commonly used. The foregoing applies as well to Form 2 (way
IU-TC). This form has occurred most frequently with the name of a
locality for IU; e.g., way
chemaxe’, 'here in Chemax'; way
yukatane’, 'here in Yucatan'; or with
way followed by construction ti le ...
-a’, or te ... -a’; e.g., way ti le
kaaha’, 'here, in this town'. In answer to the
question tuuxech, 'Where are you?', we have
observed way used as an intransitive verb with the 1st.
pers. pron. -en; thus:
wayena’, 'Here I am'.
ˌbeheˈlaʔ, or
behla’, signifying 'now', is etymologically
analyzable into these three components: bey-he-la’;
where bey and he are the initial components
above spoken of, and la’ corresponds to Old Yuc. la, from which the terminal component
-a’ seems to have developed. The first component,
be (from Old. Yuc. bay), is found also in the hybrid words
beoora and
beooritae’, signifying
'presently', 'right away'. The Spanish components are evidently ahora, 'now', and the colloquial
diminutive ahorita,
'right now', common in the speech of some peoples of Spanish America.
In the localities in which these hybrid words are prevalent, they are
not equivalent to the non-hybrid behela’,
behla’.
The difference is that the hybrid words are used in reference to an
immediate future time; whereas the non-hybrid expression refers
exclusively to contemporary time. Example of Speech-type B, from Piste, Yucatan:
beooritae’, bin
intsikbate’ bix u moodoil u
beetaa kol way bandae’, 'Now, I
am going to describe the way in which milpas are made in this region'; adopted Spanish words:
ahorita (mentioned above),
modo, 'way', 'manner'; banda, colloquial for 'region',
'side'; beetaa, B-variant of
beetaal, passive IKAL 4.13;
'the way of doing', 'the way it is done'.
The terminal component -a’ is frequently omitted when
the word to which it would be affixed in conformity with the general
rules ends in a. Example: hel in
machma, 'Look, I am holding it'; construction
he(l) IU-a’; -a’
omitted after mach-ma (costruction V-ma,
4.66). Still, with ha’, 'water',
le haa’, 'this water', occurred twice.
Omissions of -o’ in Form 2 (IC
IU-o’) were observed in instances in which IU was a
rather long and complex unit.
By the notation '-(a)l' we refer to the following five
suffixes: -al, affixed to a simple stem whose vowel is
a, or to a composite stem, whatever its vocalic components
may be; and -el, -il, -ol, or
-ul, affixed to a simple stem whose vowel is like that of
the suffix. Thus, the discussion of the uses of -(a)l
excludes the special uses of the suffix -il (4.60) affixed to simple or composite stems regardless
of their vocalic constituents.
The uses of -(a)l as a distinctive component of the
intransitive IKAL and k-IKAL constructions were discussed
in 4.13 and 4.27. In those
constructions, the uses of two other suffixes , -ik, for
transitive, and -(aa)l, for passive, correspond to those of
-(a)l. That is to say, in 4.13 and 4.27, it was feasible to fomulate generalizations
which hold for various uses of -ik and -(aa)l
as well as for -(a)l. We will now take up some uses of
-(a)l which do not correspond in the same manner to any
uses of -ik or -(aa)l. For convenience of
reference, those uses will be said to be the X-uses of -(a)l. Any word of which
-(a)l is a component and serves an X-use will be represented by the notation
'X-(a)l'.
In different instances, X-(a)l
can be equivalent to an English infinitive, or to a noun, or an
adjective, an adverb, a preposition, or a conjunction. Thus, from the
standpoint of the grammatical taxonomy we have all been taught, the
X-uses of -(a)l appear to be quite diverse. In 4.13, it was suggested that construction PA
V-(a)l,
as well as each of the other two IKAL-constructions, is comparable to
an English infinitive clause specifying an action and the agent, as 'me
to go' in 'He wants me to go'. Now, in such a sentence as 'I want to
go' it is asserted that the speaker wants x. It is obvious that x
is an act of going, but not any act of going whatever: it is an act of
going performed by the speaker himself. Thus, both in 'He wants me to
go' and in 'I want to go'
the agent of the action of going is specified, though by different
devices. One may say more or less figuratively that English avoids the
repetition of the specification of the agent when the same individual
or
non-individual is the agent of the two actions specified in sentences
constructed as the second of the above examples. The same sort of
economy of device is observed in Yucatec with intransitive, but not
with transitive verbs. Thus, we find the pronoun in
repeated in in k'at in beete, 'I wish to do it'
(4.40); but not in in k'at
hok'ol, 'I wish to go out'.
In view of such uses of X-(a)l,
writers on Yucatec had no difficulty in finding what was the
"infinitive" of many intransitive verbs. What is the "infinitive" of
transitive verbs was apparently a question they could not so easily
answer. Particularly in view of the fact that the transitive forms
whose uses resemble those of the Spanish infinitive require the
specification of the agent by means of the pronouns of Class A, as the
above example, in k'at in beete, illustrates. In
dictionaries the difficulty was variously disposed of by entering the
stem of the transitive verb without affixes, or with formative affixes,
or with the suffix -ah (see form PA V-ah of
the AHAB-constructions). So far as I know, Lopez Otero (Gramatica, 1914)
is the only writer who classes the form V-ik
as the "infinitive" of regular transitive verbs; that is, the
transitive form whose uses correspond to those of the intransitive
V-(a)l in the IKAl-constructions (4.13). The suffix -(a)l
is purely a constructional device with no more referential value than
that of 'to' in 'I wish to go'; that is, with no referential value at
all. Hence, when no pronoun or other device specifies the agent, a word
of the form X-(a)l
renders no other referential service than that of designating a kind of
action, just as many names of actions do in English; viz.,
'attraction', 'repulsion', 'impulse', 'vibration', and numerous others.
With such referential value we find many words of the form
X-(a)l used as Yucatec nouns. In most cases the stems we
represent by 'X' in 'X-(a)l' are found in other
constructions serving as stems of intransitive verbal units; e.g.,
hanal, 'cooked food' (excluding such as consists
entirely or principally of maize); and tan in
hanal, 'I am eating' (in verbal constructions,
han
is now applicable without restriction to the action of eating any food
whatever). In other cases, X occurs at present only as the stem of a
special noun; e.g., chamal, 'cigarette'. This
does not imply, however, that the V-(a)l
form of any intransitive verb can be used as a Yucatec noun. Etymology
and particular habits of speech seem to be the only determinants in the
choice of the intransitive verbs whose V-(a)l forms can be
used as nouns, and those which require the suffix -il (4.60) when used in nominal constructions. Similarly
erratic is the formation of nouns by affixing both -(a)l
and -il, with the frequent elision of the vowel of
-(a)l. A few stems occur both in construction
X-(a)l and X-(a)l-il;
the former being used in reference to a particular item, and the latter
in vague references to any item whatever, or to an unspecified number
of them. E.g., hanal is used in reference to the
particular non-maize food delimited by the context; whereas
hanlil or hanalil is used in such
a non-particular reference as ku ts'ookole’,
ku beetaal u hanlil,
'After that, the non-maize food is prepared' (literally: 'is made'),
said in reference to what is done habitually on certain occasions. To
indicate what sort of Yucatec nouns are composed of a simple or
composite stem and the suffix -(a)l, we list below those
which occurred in the texts, or which appear in our lists of names of
various plants, insects, and other items, recorded merely as
lexicographic data.
abal | plum | kuxtal | life, living | |
hanal | non-maize food | okol | thief | |
kahal | hamlet | sak pakal | kind of wild dove | |
kimil | death | pak'al | orange | |
kinil | wound, sore | pok'ol | species of plant bugs | |
kipil | slippery place | siypil | sin, guilt | |
kits'il | filth | tohol | price | |
kolnal | milpa tiller | p'ookol | knot (in wood) | |
kochol | species of cricket | t'uyul | species of termite | |
kulul | species of cactus | tsahal | sliver, splinter | |
leet'el | furrow, partition | ts'apal | pile of small objects | |
mank'inal | holiday | xaknal | quadruped | |
metnal | Hell | xich'il | tendon, cord | |
mek'el | armful | xukul | purslane | |
naahal | wages | chamal | cigaret | |
nap'al | leech | chikil or chikul | sign, indication | |
niyxil or nix | slope | chulul | name of a tree | |
nohol or nohil | south | k'oxol | mosquito |
Some Yucatec words that conform to the above specifications of form X-(a)l are
equivalent to English prepositions and conjunctions. Definitely of this
sort are the following: kabal, 'down, below';
kaanal, 'up, above'; ichil or
ich, 'within, in, among'; yanal,
'under'; yetel, 'with, and';
yok'ol or yok',
'on'. From the standpoint of Yucatec construction, these are irregular
verbs. The irregularity consists in the omission of the pronouns of
Class A, which are distinctive components of the IKAL-constructions
(4.13). They are verbs also from the standpoint of
Yucatec usage; for
Yucatec verbs serve to assert what they specify. Take for example,
yetel,
which is equivalent to 'with' in some cases, and to 'and' in others. It
serves to assert that something is together with something else, or
that something is added to something else, or that two or more items
are similarly involved in what is asserted. Its stem is et,
and it has occurred in the following combinations: tin
wetel, 'with me'; ta wetel, 'with you'
(sing.); yetel, 'with him, her, it'; k
etel, 'with us'; k
etele'x, 'with you (plur.) and me';
ta wetele'x, 'with you' (plur.);
yetelo'b, 'with them'. Without the suffix
-el, we find it in et ts'onol,
'hunting partner', 'one of the members of a hunting party; i.e., one who
is hunting together with someone else'; inwet
xibil, 'my companion'; hun tul et
ch'upil, 'a female friend (of another woman)'. Examples
with the stem ok' of yok'ol, 'on', are:
tin wok'ol, 'on me'; ta
wok'ole'x, 'on you' (plur.). In
yok'ol and yetel there is a
remnant of Old Yucatec construction. For the prefix y-
(written y-) was the 3rd. pers.
pronoun prefixed to verbs or nouns with initial vowel. Thus instead of
Mod.Yuc. u yohel, 'he knows', we find simply yohel; and instead of u
yatan, 'his wife', we find yatan. Similarly, for tin wetel,
'with me', Old Yucatec had uetel, and for in watan, 'my wife',
one finds uatan. The stem of
kaanal, 'above', is identical with the word
kaan,
'sky'; and that of the word for 'down', 'below', is found in composite
stems signifying motion downward, as well as in references to soil,
earth, as in sas kab, 'white earth'; and in the phrase
yok'ol kab, 'the earth', 'this world', 'in this
world'. It is possible that yanal, 'under' is a
Modern Yucatec development. In some localities we found
yalan, instead of yanal. The Motul
dictionary gives alan with
these two inflexions: ualan, 'under me'; a ualan, 'under you (sing.)'. The
stem of ichil, 'within', 'among', is
phonologically identical with that of the verb for 'to bathe', as in the
imperative ich-n-en (4.57);
transitive, ich-in-s(-e) (4.38).
In the texts we found ichilo'n, 'among us';
ichile'x, 'among you';
ichilo'b, 'among them'. Different from the
above, but containing the suffix -(a)l, and used more
definitely as verbal units, are the following: tu
yo’lal (less frequently: tu yok'lal
or yok'olal), 'on account of', 'in order to', 'so
that'; tu menel (most frequently: tu
men), 'because', 'due to', 'by' (agent of passive); tu
lakal, 'all', 'every'; u ti’al,
'for', 'in order to', 'it belongs to him'; 'it is for him'. The uses
and inflexions of the first expressions were discussed in 4.23. tu men with the suffix
-el has been used mainly to assert or deny that someone was
to be blamed, or to be given credit, for a certain happening; e.g.,
tu menel kimi, 'He is to be blamed for her
death'; literally: 'on account of him she died'. With the 1st. pers.
pron. in instead of the 3rd. pers. u, we found
ma tin menel lubi, 'it is not my fault that it
fell'. The stem men occurs at present frequently with the
sense of 'to make', 'to fashion'; etymologically, men is
the stem of meyah (me(n)-y(a)-ah), 'to
work'. For the identification of the suffix -(a)l in
tu lakal, we find only etymological evidence. The
Motul dictionary defines lah,
lacach, and tulacal as signifying 'all'.
Incidentally, the example given to illustrate the use of lacach is lacach binob tulacal,
'they all went'. This use of two expressions signifying 'all', one
before the verb and the other after, is common in Modern Yucatec; but
the first of the two, so far as our texts show, is now lah;
e.g., lah bino'b tu lakal, 'they all
went'. The uses of lah are discussed in 4.64. The identification of the pronoun u
in tu lakal rests on the occurrence of t
laklo'n, 'every one of us'; and ta
lakle'x, 'every one of you'. Previous writers may
have been influenced by their own languages in writing the phrase
tu lakal as a single word (tulacal). Those who wrote, for example, tu yotoch (tu
yotoch), 'to his house', as two words, are doubtless
inconsistent in writing tulacal
as a single word. It is possible that it did not occur to them that the
equivalent of their word for 'all' could be in another language a
phrase containing a pronoun, or even a verb in some "tense" and
"mood".
It is pointed out in 4.53 that construction
V-aan-PB
serves in many cases to refer to a circumstance which is a consequence
of an event of the sort denoted by the V-component of the construction;
e.g., lik', 'to get up', lik'aan, 'He is
up'. As stated in 4.53, at least three
constructions are employed in such references. One of them is
V-(a)l-PB. This is used with certain simple stems (3.1). Some of them can be used indifferently with
construction V-(a)l-PB or V-aan-PB;
others are at present more frequently used with the former than with
the latter. We were unable to disclose any rules governing the choice
of either construction. In the 3rd. pers. sing. and plur. of
construction V-(a)l-PB, which is simply the stem with the
suffix -(a)l
(2.5), the vowel of the stem is doubled or not,
depending of whether
the verbal unit is emphatically uttered, or is the only or last word of
the sentence; e.g., luubul, 'It is fallen'; also,
though less prevalently used, lubaan, 'It is fallen'.
aahal, 'He is awake'; ah, 'to wake up'.
kaachal, 'It is broken'; kach,
'to break' (intransitive), applicable to sticks and other brittle
objects classed as comparatively long and thin. In subordinate
assertions equivalent to English adjectives or relative clauses,
construction V-(a)l sometimes precedes and sometimes
follows the noun that specifies what or who is in the condition or
circumstance referred to by V-(a)l; e.g., hun p'el
luubul le’, 'a fallen leaf'; hun p'el u le’
che’ luubule’, 'a leaf that had fallen
from a tree'; literally: 'a leaf of a tree fallen';
le’, 'leaf'.
In 4.49 we dealt with the use of the suffix
-aan in construction S-aan-ak and
S-aan-t-ak (Form 8). We are to consider now the most common
uses of -aan and its variant -an. The
difference between -an and -aan is purely
phonologic. The single a
is found in most cases when the main stress of the word or the phrase,
or sentence, is on some component other than this suffix. Ordinarily,
and particularly when the verbal unit which contains the suffix in
question is the main verb of the sentence, the main stress falls upon
this suffix. In the instances which will be said to be regular because
of their frequency, the constructions conform to this formula:
V-aan-PB.
It may not be superfluous to note that, since the pronoun of Class B
for the 3rd. pers. sing. is a null sign, the actual form for the 3rd.
sing. is V-aan.
Construction V-aan-PB
specifies a contemporary (4.3) circumstance which is
a consequence of a
prior event of the sort referred to by the V-component of this
construction. For example, let the V-component be k'al,
signifying 'to lock up'; and let PB be -en, 'I', 'me'. We
obtain this sentence: k'alaanen,
'I am locked up', or, in reference to a contemporary-past occurrent
(4.4, Case 5), 'I was locked up'; i.e., the
individual had been locked up
and was still locked up at that time. Here, the prior event is an act
of locking up, and its consequence is the contemporary (4.3)
circumstance of being in confinement. Should the distinction between a
prior event and its consequence seem arbitrary in reference to the
past, account should be taken of the fact that the English translation
'I was locked up' is ambiguous out of context. The Spanish translation
of k'alaanen, estaba encerrado,
would unambiguously indicate that what is asserted is that the
individual
was in confinement. Many specifications of conditions or circumstances
that are made in English by the verb 'to be', and in Spanish by estar (not ser), are made in Yucatec by means of construction
V-aan-PB. For example: lik'aanen, 'I am
up' (on my feet); lik', 'to get up'.
kalaan, 'He is drunk'; kal-cha-h-i,
'He got drunk'. k'ohaanen, 'I am sick'. ma
kaananechi’, 'You are not tired';
kaan-an-ech-i’, -ech, 2nd. pers.
sing.; for -i’ see 4.59.
Three other constructions are used like the one under consideration.
They are: V-(a)k (4.48),
V-(a)k-ba-l (4.49, Form 7), and
V-(a)l (4.52). These three have been
found only with verbs that are generally used intransitively; whereas
V-aan-PB
has occurred with stems that are generally used transitively, as well
as with a few which are always used intransitively. So far as our texts
and supplementary inquiry show, some intransitive verbs are used only
with one of those three constructions, or only with
V-aan-PB, while others admit of the use of two of them.
Thus, the verb tal, 'to come', has been found only with
construction V-(a)k for 'he has come'; e.g.,
talak; or, as some of the older folk say,
talik; or with the B-variant tak instead of
talak. But construction V-(a)k with
bin, 'to go', signifies 'perhaps' (4.47). For 'he has gone', the irregular construction
binahaan was the only one found. According to various
informants, it is permissible to say lubaan, for 'it
is fallen', but luubul (4.52) is
at present preferred, and that is, in fact, the one which occurred in
the texts.
The plural forms V-aan-o'b, V-aan-t-ak,
and V-aan-t-ak-o'b have already been discussed (4.49).The differences and similarities between the
uses of V-aan-PB and PA V-ma are pointed out
in 4.66.
With the verb kim, 'to die', the suffix is
-en instead of -aan. Several writers on Old
Yucatec point out this irregularity. In our texts
kimen has occurred signifying 'He is dead' and 'He
was dead'.
Construction V-aan-PB,
like any other Yucatec verbal construction, is used without alteration
in Yucatec relative clauses. This is pointed out simply to mention one
of the devices which render the same service as those which are said to
be, or to serve as, adjectives in English and in other languages. There
are no devices in Yucatec that can be classified as relative pronouns.
The construction is like the English paratactical relative clause in
'the man I saw'; e.g., tin wilan, 'I saw'; le
.. -o’, 'the' (4.51), mak
,'man', 'person'; hence: le mak tin wilaho’,
'the man I saw'. Similarly, k'ohaan, 'He is sick';
k'ohaan le maako’, 'the man is sick'
or 'that man is sick'; le mak k'ohaano’,
'the man who is sick' or 'the sick man'. Rationally, of course, there
is no difference between a sick man and a man who is sick. Lack of
distinction between an adjective and a verb may seem odd only to those
who are victims of the irrational grammatical taxonomy we have all been
taught.
Construction V-aan-PB is exemplified in the very useful
and common word minaan,
'there isn't any', 'there is no more', 'he (she, it) is not (at a
specified place)', 'not to have', 'not to exist'. It serves to negate
all that can be asserted by yan (4.31). The common negative ma(’) is
not permissible with yan, 'there is', 'to have', etc. Thus,
yanen teelo’, 'I was there';
minaanenteelo’, 'I was not there'.
yan taak'in ten, 'I have money';
minaan taak'in ten, 'I have no money'. The
stem of minaan seems to have resulted from a phonetic
change in Old Yucatec manaan,
which was used as Mod. Yuc. minaan.
This suffix or combination of suffixes has occurred in our texts
predominantly in verbal units of this form: tan PA
V-ankil. The V-component was reduplicated in some cases,
and not in others; e.g., tan u pekankil, 'He
was wriggling', 'He was squirming about'; tan u
kikilankil, 'He was trembling'. It is seen that this
construction is similar in form to the common intransitive construction
tan PA V-(a)l discussed in 4.14, and that both are used to refer to contemporary
occurrents (4.3). Classing it as a tan
+ IKAL-construction (4.14), one would expect its
final component to be -al; for that is the suffix required
by composite stems in that construction. In analyzing
-ankil one can assume either of these alternatives: (1) The
final component is -il used irregularly instead of
-al. (2) The final component is -l affixed to
-anki, the vowel of the suffix -(a)l being
elided. If the second alternative is assumed, one could assume further
either that -anki
is an unanalyzable suffix (the only one thus far observed with two
syllables), or that we have here a combination of the suffix
-an of construction V-aan (4.53), and -ki, the suffix used in
intransitive verbal units with reduplicated stems (4.63). But as a matter of fact, we are not sure that
-ki is not itself a combination of two suffixes:
-k-i, as implied by our remarks in 4.63. What -an and -ki may
be said to signify in other constructions is of no aid in the analysis
of -ankil.
Since we are trying to describe Modern Yucatec, and not to write its
history, we take no account of what was the case in Old Yucatec. But
even in Old Yucatec, the analysis of the two variants -ancil, -ancal is not easy. In the dictionaries, both
combinations, -anc-al and -anc-il,
are listed, and it is indicated in some instances that either
combination can be used with some stems. Thus, the Motul dictionary
gives tzayancal and tzayancil for 'to quarrel' (hablar con desgracia a otro, o reńirle
alborotando); also: mutancal and mutancil, for 'to be defamed'; tixancal and tixancil, 'to be full to the brim'; and several other
pairs of equivalent words with -ancal and -ancil. According to our informants, -ankal
is not used at present.
The kinds of action referred to by the verbs that are used at present
with -ankil
are too diverse to permit any generalization as to what this ending
signifies; and the same was true of the apparently more extensive use
of -ancal and -ancil in Old Yucatec. In some
instances what is referred to is some sort of oscillatory or vibratory
motion; as in lolokankil, 'bubbling';
kikilankil, 'trembling';
ˌxoyankil, 'undulating';
tiykilankil, said of excited activity of ants
in an ant hill. In others there is only a remote analogy to such kinds
of motion; as in t'ibankil, said of water that
spills over the border of a container as one carries it;
humankil, 'making rumbling sound';
omankil, 'foaming'. The following are of a
quite different sort: heelankil, 'laying
eggs'; koko’ankil, 'acting like a maniac';
k'u’ankil, '(birds) are making nest';
k'elukankil, 'perspiring';
alankil, 'giving birth'.
In all cases the verbs with -ankil were intransitive.
Corresponding to Modern Yucatec -bil, we find as late as
the nineteenth century this combination of suffixes: -ab-il. Pio Perez (Dictionary, about
1850) gives as equivalent words hoohochabil and hoohochbil, defined as signifying 'it has been, or
should be, scraped frequently, or repeatedly'; aalabil and aalbil, 'it has been said, or should be said'. The
variant -abil
did not occur in our texts, nor was it known to any of our informants.
Due to its special uses, it seems desirable to deal with
-bil separately, whether we class it as a suffix or as a
combination of suffixes. The reason is that what -bil
signifies at present cannot be inferred from the separate uses of
-ab (4.10) and -il (4.60).
In our texts, -bil occurred in these four constructions:
(1) V-bil-PB, (2) V-bil, (3)
V-bil-ak, (4) V-an-bil-PB. The fourth
construction was found only with the stem kax, 'to
look for' or 'to find', in Speech-type A. kax is
generally used with the formative -t (3.26); tan in kaxtik, 'I am
looking for it'; tin kaxtah, 'I found it'. In
the fourth construction, the formative -t after
kax was replaced by -an (4.53) in some cases; e.g.,
kaxanbil, 'It should be looked for'. But
kaxbil, and even kaxtbil
were more commonly found in both Speech-types. So far as usage is
concerned, this fourth construction is a variant of
V-bil-PB,
the first of the constructions listed above. They are all classed here
as passive constructions, having the following in common with the
passive AHAB-construction (4.10): (a) their
V-components are stems
prevalently used in transitive constructions; (b) the agent of the
action signified by the stem is not specified, or its specification is
preceded by the expression tu men, the sign of the agent
(4.10); (c) the pronouns of Class B stand for
persons or non-persons
involved in the action in the same manner as the objects of transitive
verbs; that is, there is no inversion of subject and object.
Usage A. Construction
V-bil-PB, used as the only or main verbal unit of a
sentence, serves to communicate that something should be done. Thus
nats'bil, 'He should be flogged', was said in
answer to a question as to what should be done with a thief who had just
been caught; and pulbil, 'It should be thrown away',
was said in reply to Of what use is
this to us?.
Usage B. As a component of a bin-construction (4.56), V-bil-PB specifies what has been
planned or what had been planned. Depending on the rules governing the
uses of the bin-constructions, the form of the component
containing -bil is V-bil for all persons, or
form V-bil-PB is employed as usual with different
PB-components for the different persons. When the
bin-construction contains a pronoun of Class A,
V-bil is used; and when it does
not, V-bil-PB is used. For the use of pronouns of Class A
in bin-constructions see 4.56.
The bin constructions in which V-bil or
V-bil-PB occured are:
Construction 1 conforms to the rules of usage of bin PA
kah (4.56).
Constructions 2 and 3 occur in subordinate clauses, and conform to the
rules
governing the uses of the IKAL (4.13) and
k-IKAL (4.27) constructions,
respectively.
The use of construction 4 is in conformity with that of construction
bin+NULLAK (4.42).
Thus, these bin-constructions differ from other
bin-constructions only with respect to the fact
that these contain a passive verbal unit (V-bil or
V-bil-PB),
whereas the others contain either transitive or intransitive verbal
units occupying the same
position as V-bil or V-bil-PB. For example,
instead of bin u kah u beete, 'He is going todo
it', we have bin u kah u beetbil, 'It is going
to be done'.
Usage C. V-bil-PB
is the passive construction employed in projective
references (4.23) under these conditions: (a) The
reference is monochronic (4.6); that is to say,
a particular aim is to be accomplished on a subsequent occasion (4.3). (b)
The one who is to accomplish
the aim is not specified. (c) The main verb preceding the projective
reference designates motion, or implies motion, as, for example,
tux-t, 'to send'. (d) The sign of projective reference
is constructional (4.23); that is, neither tu
yo’lal nor u ti’al is employed
to signify 'in order to', 'so that', etc. Examples: tin
tuxtah ch'abilech, 'I sent for
you'; ch'a, 'fetch'. xiyk
aalbil tie’ ka u lik'suba, 'Let
someone go and tell him to get ready'; lik'-s-u-ba,
literally: 'to lift himself'. Here, as in many other cases, a Yucatec
passive construction cannot be rendered idiomatically by the English
passive voice. To use the passive voice in the translation of the first
of the preceding examples one would have to say 'I sent (someone) in
order that you would be fetched (by him)'; and for the second example,
'Go (someone) in order that it be told to him (by the one who may go)
that he get ready'. In both instances, and in many others, the Yucatec
passive is a special device employed when the subject of a transitive
verb is not specified.
Usage D. The construction
serving this usage is V-bil N; where 'N' stands for a
Yucatec noun. For example, if V is the stem ts'am, 'to
soak', and N is balche’ (the name of a
tree, its bark, and an alcoholic drink made from the bark), we get
ts'ambil balche’, 'soaked
balche'; that is, balche bark that is soaked by
whosoever may make the drink called balche. In the name ts'ambil
balche’ the passive with -bil
is still a device for referring to an action without specifying who
performs it. In construction V-bil N, used as a nominal
unit, V-bil
serves to differentiate some items of the class denoted by N from
others denoted also by N. This device is obviously comparable with that
of using an English past pasticiple adjectivally. In a few instances,
-ak (4.49) was affixed to
V-bil, and the construction was then either
V-bil-ak N, or N V-bil-ak. In one text,
k'uumbil, 'softened by boiling' was used in a general
reference to maize softened by boiling; and
k'uumbilak
was used in the same text in reference to a particular quantity of
maize which had been softened by boiling. It may well be the case that
-ak serves to distinguish references to particulars from
references to non-particulars, but the number of instances with
-ak were too few to justify generalization. Furthermore,
the uses of -ak
to signify that something has occurred or has been done are subject to
so many restrictions, as indicated in 4.49, that
nothing can be
confidently inferred in this case from the way -ak is
employed in others.
Miscellaneous examples.
The following prevalent uses of the verb bin were
observed: (A) signifying 'to go away' or 'to go to a specified place';
e.g., binen tin wotoch,
'I went home'. (B) Prediction of imminent happening, or of favorable
happening close at hand, and resolution or project; e.g., bin in
kah in beete’, 'I am going to do it' (without
implying that the speaker is going to any place). (C) As a component of
construction bin + NULLAK in predictions of the sort dealt
with in 4.42. (D) In its NULLAK-form,
binak,
signifying 'perhaps', 'maybe' (4.47). (E) As a sign
of undetermined
declarative value (4.7) ascribed by the speaker to
what he quotes or
infers. Before discussing these referential uses of bin, it
seems desirable to take account of some constructional data.
In Old Yucatec, bin, 'go',
tal, 'come', and man, 'pass by a place',
'wander', required the suffix -el
in constructions corresponding to the form V-(a)l
(4.52) of Modern Yucatec. By the first half of the
eighteenth century, as Beltrán's grammar shows, the simple stems
bin, tal, man were
used in various constructions in which binel, talel,
manel were previously required.
On page 85 (2nd. edition), Beltrán gives as equivalent
constructions binel in cah and
bin in cah, 'I am going'. In
Modern Yucatec, -el is affixed to bin,
tal, man only in certain obsolescent
expressions, as he tun binele’,
approximately: 'if that happens to be the case'; and sporadically in
the speech of the old folk of some localities. The result is that in
IKAL and k-IKAL constructions (4.13,
4.27) the prevalent form for bin,
tal, and man is now PA V and k-PA
V, instead of PA V-(a)l and k-PA
V-(a)l. Save for the lack of a suffix of the type
-(a)l, the verb bin
has retained an Old Yucatec construction which seldom occurs at present
with any other verb. This Old Yucatec construction may be formulated
thus: V-(vowel)l PA cah; where
'V-(vowel)l' stands for a verb
stem used intransitively with a suffix consisting of a vowel and the
consonant l. For some verbs the
vowel of the suffix was the same as that of the stem; for others, the
vowel was e. 'PA' stands for a
pronoun corresponding etymologically to the Mod. Yuc. pronouns of Class
A. cah, corresponding to Mod.
Yuc. kah in Speech-type A, and to kaa and
kaa
in Type B, was a defective verb signifying approximately 'to be engaged
in doing something', 'for something to be happening' (Motul dictionary:
"pospuesto al cuerpo de todos verbos en presente de indicativo
significa estar actualmente haziendo lo que los tales verbos
significan".Beltrán, Grammar, 2nd. ed. p. 90: "hacer, esto es,
entender
en algo que se está haciendo"). In Coronel's grammar (1620), the
conjugation of intransitive verbs in the "present indicative" is
exemplified by means of this paradigm with the stem nac, 'go up' or 'come up' (Spanish
subir):
Singular | Plural |
nacal in cah | nacal ca cah |
nacal a cah | nacal a cahex |
nacal u cah | nacal u cahob |
This construction with any intransitive verb other than bin was understood by some of our oldest informants, but not as referring to a single occurrence of going up. Three informants, each in a different locality, said that the equivalent of the antiquated naakal u kah, for example, is now chen naakal ku beetik, 'He does nothing but go up', 'He is all the time going up', implying an unusual or excessive recurrence. None understood it as the equivalent of tan u naakal, 'He is going up' or 'He was going up', said now in monochronic reference (4.6) to a contemporary occurrent (4.3), using construction tan + IKAL (4.14). On the other hand, with bin, 'go', the old construction is understood in an entirely different way, as shown below. To refer to this construction as it actually occurs with bin, we shall write bin PA kah. The complete paradigm of bin PA kah, signifying 'to be going', 'to propose to do something', is as follows:
Singular | Plural |
bin in kah | bin k kah, bin k kahe'x (inc. and exclusive) |
bin a kah | bin a kahe'x |
bin u kah | bin u kaho'b |
We revert now to the uses of bin labeled above 'A, ...,
E'. Usage A requires no special comment. It must be taken into account
simply because in some of the other uses no action of going from one
place to another is referred to by the stem bin. Usage C
was discussed in 4.42, and Usage D was discussed in
4.47. Usages B and E remain to be considered.
Usage B. The constructions
whose uses are grouped under this heading are: (1) bin PA
kah, the modified Old Yucatec construction mentioned above.
(2) PA bin and k-PA bin, each
followed by one of the verbal units specified below. The last two are
irregular IKAL and k-IKAL constructions so far as
bin
is concerned, but they occur in conformity with the rules
governing the uses of those constructions (4.13, 4.27). The
irregularity consists in that the suffix -(a)l is not
affixed to bin (cf. above remarks on disuse of
-el). The usage labeled 'Usage B' is distinguished from
others on the ground that here the bin-construction
does not stand exclusively, or does not stand at all, for the action of
going away from or to a place. For example, in the sentence
samal in bin teelo’,
which may be adequately rendered by 'I am going there tomorrow', an
action of going to a place is referred to, but in addition to this a
plan or resolution is communicated; that is, the sentence is equivalent
to 'I plan to go there tomorrow', or 'I have decided to go there
tomorrow'. For I am going,
signifying that one is on his way to a place, construction
tan + IKAL (4.14) is required; viz.,
tan in bin. Plan or resolution, or immediate action other
than going to a place, can be communicated by sentences such as
bin in kah in waal tech, 'I am going to tell
you'. When the PA component of the construction is a 2nd. pers., as in
bin a kah a beete (bin PA
kah PA V-(e)),
'you are going to do it', the communication is occasionally imperative
with a high degree of imperiousness (4.39). The
same sentence, uttered
with an interrogative intonation, is often equivalent to 'Do you intend
to do it?' Any of these senses, including even the imperative, is
possible when PA is a 3rd. person. When PA referes to an inanimate
referent, the bin-construction can be simply a sign of
immediate future occurrence; e.g., bin u kah lubul,
'It is going to fall', 'It is about to fall'. For the sake of
simplicity, all the preceding examples have been translated as
referring to future occurrents, but it should be understood that the
same construction can refer to subsequent-past (4.4,
Case 6). When a
resolution is communicated, the resolution itself is contemporary
(4.3), but even then the execution of the resolution
or plan is
subsequent: it is said that something will be done, or it was said that
something would be done.
As is frequently the case in Modern Yucatec, the construction that is
used in affirmation is not permissible in negation. maa
tan + IKAL (4.14) is the construction for
the negation of what is asserted by bin PA
kah; e.g., maa tan in bin
teelo’, 'I am not going there', 'I do not intend
to go there', 'I refuse to go there'.
When the subsequent occurrent referred to is other than the action of
going, the construction of the transitive or intransitive verbal unit
specifying the subsequent occurrent is the same as that required after
verbs of wishing or needing (4.40); namely, PA
V-(e) for the transitive, and V-(a)l for the
intransitive. For the passive, construction V-bil (4.55) is required in monochronic references (4.6), and V-(aa)l (4.13) in polychronic references. Examples: bin
in kah in hante, 'I am (was) going to eat it'. bin u
kah lubul, 'It is (was) going to fall'. bin u kah u
taase, 'He is (was) going to bring it'. bin a
kah kimil, 'You are (were) going to die'. Comparing the
above constructions with bin + NULLAK (4.42), it is seen that for the transitive, the
difference is only that the latter lacks the components PA
kah; while for the intransitive, the only characteristic
component common to the two constructions is bin. The
difference in usage is mainly that the above constructions with
bin PA kah
are not used for a remote future, and are preferred in references to
ordinary affairs. They also serve to communicate resolution or project;
whereas bin + NULLAK, so far as our observations go,
indicate simply that a subsequent occurrent is referred to. On the
whole, the determinants in the choice of one or the other of these two
sets of constructions seem to be similar to those which govern the use
of comparable English constructions referring to future occurrents with
and without go; e.g., It will happen, It is going to happen.
Usage E. For this usage the
stem bin, without any affix, occurs after words or
constructions which serve to assert. The office of bin
when so used is to modify the usual assertive sense of the construction
of which it forms a part. It is then a sign of undetermined declarative
value (4.7). For example, tu manah hun
tul tsimin would serve to communicate this assertion:
'He bought a horse'. But if the speaker says: tu manah bin
hun tul tsimin,
he does not hold himself responsible for the truth of the statement.
Depending on the context, that sentence can be equivalent to 'It is
said that he bought a horse', or 'He claims to have bought a horse', or
'He may have bought a horse'. In the Motul dictionary we find
bin rendered by the Spanish phrase diz que, which was used to introduce hearsay; while
duplicated bin, that is, bin bin, is
translated as signifying uncertainty. In our texts, bin
without duplication was used for both senses. When the declarative value
signified by bin is ascribed to the whole statement,
bin occurs immediately after the main verbal unit, or
immediately after such components of the verbal unit as tan
(4.14),ts'ook (4.15), he (4.16),
hoop' (4.17), yan
(4.18), if the verbal unit contains one of these
components. If the bin declarative value is ascribed only
to a part of the statement, bin occurs immediately after
the word denoting the assertion whose validity is in question. Take, for
example, the statement tu yuk'ah hun p'it bin le
aaniso’. If we disregard the declarative
value ascribed by the speaker to the included assertion hun
p'it, 'a little', this sentence would be equivalent to 'He drank
a little rum'. By the position of the word bin,
the speaker indicates that he vouches for the truth of this portion of
the statement: 'He drank rum'; but not for the assertion that the
quantity of rum was small. Had he said tu yuk'ah bin hun
p'it le aaniso’, placing bin
after the main verbal unit, tu yuk'ah,
'he drank', he would have indicated that he does not vouch for the
truth of any item communicated by that sentence. When reciting a story,
we observe that in most cases bin occurs in the first
sentence, and is omitted thereafter, except sporadically when using
direct quotation. With direct quotation, bin comes most
frequently after the phrase ku t'an, 'says he'; e.g.,
"maa tan in k'ubik", ku t'an bin, '"I refuse to
deliver it", he said (but I am not reporting as an actual fact that he
said it)'. Some informants used bin, not only in the first,
but in the second and third sentences of the story.
In addition to the foregoing, there are few uses of bin
which may conveniently be classed as idioms. Among these is the use of
bin in the expression hun p'it u bin,
signifying approximately 'it is almost done', 'it lacks just a little
to be completed'; literally: 'a little to go'; also in an apparently
superfluous usage comparable with the colloquial American expression
went to work where no going and
no work is spoken of, as, He went to
work and told all his neighbors what he had seen.
Similarly, ka bin tu yilah le ts'uulo’
tan u cheehe’, ka tu kolah tu tsel.
Leaving bin
out of consideration, this sentence signifies 'And the ʦ'ul (an
urban white gentleman) saw that she was giggling, and he pulled her
close to him'.
Examples of Usage B.
Examples of Usage E.
The most common use of this suffix is seen in the intransitive imperative form V-en for 2nd. pers. sing., and V-en-e'x for 2nd. plur.; e.g., with the stem hok', 'to go (come) out', we find hok'en, 'come out', addressing one person; hok'ene'x, addressing two or more. As usual, -n is the formative employed in these intransitive constructions when the stem is composite (3.24).
Examples with simple stems:
Examples with composite stems:
The verbs tal, 'to come', and bin, 'to go',
do not occur in the imperative. For the imperative 'come',
koten, singular, and
kotene'x, plural, are used. For 'go' we
find xen, singular;
xene'x, plural. The sufix
-en of koten conforms to the rule
governing the intransitive imperative, but neither ko- nor
kot- is found with any sense approximating 'to go' in any
other construction. The stem of xen may be
x- or xi. In NULLAK-constructions we
find xiyk, 'let him go' (4.38), 'that he may go'.
The irregular use of -en with the verb kim,
'to die', for other than imperative utterances was noted in 4.53.
On the basis of the data available to us, it cannot be decided whether
or not we have two suffixes, -b and -en, in
-ben as a component of such words as
uchben, 'ancient, of old';
tunben, 'new, modern';
k'oben, 'the stones of the native hearth', or
'kitchen'; and a number of others in which -ben may be said
to signify 'worthy of', or implies possibility much as our endings
-able, -ible (e.g., detachable, visible) do.
E.g., tsikben, 'worthy of respect';
a tsikbeenil, a
tsikbeenile'x, 'your grace', 'your
graces' (respectful form of address); ch'aben,
'acceptable' (ch'a, 'take, fetch');
ch'ahben, 'that can leak, that can drip';
bahben, 'that can be nailed'. It is possible that at
least in some words -ben is etymologically composed of
-b and -en; the former may be cognate with
-ab, the sign of the passive in AHAB-constructions (4.10); cf. -bil, 4.55.
The uses of this suffix as a terminal component in the
AEO-constructions were discussed in 4.51. It was
feasible there to
specify what devices concur with -e’. To make a
similar
specification for the instances we are now to speak of, one would have
to take account of hundreds of possibilities. The task would be
comparable to that of enumerating the kinds of words and constructions
which can precede a comma in written English. For in many cases,
-e’
is used or not at the end of a given phrase, a clause, or a single
word, depending on what may be termed the elocution of the
utterance; i.e., manner of delivery. Quite frequently an informant
objected to the use of -e’ when a text he dictated was
read to him. The reason in most cases was that the discourse was not
read with the intonation and pauses of his original delivery. In other
instances, the unaccustomed procedure of dictating a part of a sentence
and waiting till that much was written before proceding with the rest
of it had let him to use -e’ at the end of the
dictated
portion, contrary to his habits in uninterrupted discourse. It seemed
advisable, therefore, to base our observation exclusively on the texts
which were recorded phonographically. Unfortunately, it is too costly
at present to deal with intonation, pauses, and peaks of intensity with
the aid of reliable instruments, such as the oscillograph. Our aural
observations are to the effect that the intonation of the units of
discourse which end with the suffix -e’ are pisible
into a number of classes. In nearly all instances, it seems that
-e’
has the highest pitch, or the second highest pitch, of the unit that
ends with this suffix. A pause, very brief in some instances, and
longer in others, follows -e’.
There are at least 4 classes of instances in which the use of
-e’
is predictable with a high degree of probability: (1) At the end of a
temporal clause or its equivalent, when such a unit is the first
component of the sentence, as is generally the case. For the
construction of such units see 4.33 and 4.62. (2) At the end of the
first clause of a conditional sentence (4.35). (3)
At the end of the
first component of an NP-construction (4.67). (4)
Affixed to a pronoun
of Class C which is the first component of a sentence; e.g.,
teene’, 'as for me', 'so far as I am
concerned', etc. There are at least two kinds of exceptions to the use
of -e’ at the end of a temporal clause: (1)
-e’ is not used when a single word that is the
equivalent of a temporal clause is one of those which require the suffix
-i(’) (4.59). The exclusion of
-e’ when a unit ends with the suffix
-i(’) applies in all instances; just as
-i(’) is excluded in all instances in which the
suffixes -a’, -e’,
-o’ are required by the AEO-constructions (4.51). (2) When the temporal clause contains an
AEO-construction requiring -o’ at the end of the
clause, either -o’ replaces -e’, or
the latter replaces the former. The replacement of -o’
is much more frequent. For example, the regular construction le ka
.. -e’ of a temporal clause containing an AHAB-construction
is seen in le ka k'uche’, 'When he arrived'.
To say 'When the child arrived', the -e’ of the
temporal clause is generally retained, and the -o’ of
le chan paalo’, 'the child', is
omitted; viz., le ka k'uch le chan
paale’. But some individuals omit
-e’, saying le ka k'uch le chan
paalo’.
Examples of the various uses of -e’ spoken of above
will be found in the sections mentioned and in many illustrations under
other headings.
By the notation '-i(’)' we refer to the suffix
-i and its X-variant -i’. From a study of
our phonographic records we conclude that the difference between
-i and -i’
is to a considerable extent of an elocutionary sort. At the end of a
clause followed by a pause indicative of hesitation, we hear
-i
without glottal stop and partially devoiced at the end of its
articulation; whereas in emphatic utterance, particularly in negative
sentences, -i’ occurs with an unusually short vowel
and
glottal stop. In utterances which are of neither of those two sorts, we
observed only regional and individual habits of employing one more
frequently than the other in comparable constructions. Disregarding
these various circumstances, and considering only frequency of
occurrence both in phonographic and in dictated texts, we find that
-i’ occurs more frequently than -i in
negative utterances; while the latter occurs about twice as frequnetly
as the former in non-negative utterances.
It may be useful to compare the uses of the suffix
-i(’) with those of the suffixes
-a’, -e’, -o’ of
the AEO-constructions (4.51). In the
AEO-constructions we have two special sets of items: (1)
bey, he(l), le(l),
way, etc.; and (2) the suffixes -a’,
-e’, -o’.
To facilitate generalization, let us refer by the letter 'A' to an item
of the first set; and by 'B', to one of the second set. From what was
said in 4.51, it can be inferred that these four
statements are true:
(1) Whenever A occurs, B occurs. (2) B is affixed to A or to some other
word that occurs after A. (3) B is not affixed to A when any other
component of the constructional unit to which A belongs occurs after A.
(4) B is always the last component of such a constructional unit. The
extent to which the uses of the suffix -i(’) are like
those of -a’, -e’,
-o’ may now be roughly indicated as follows: If in the
above statements we substitute '-i(’)'
for 'B', and 'X' for 'A', the four statements will hold for certain
values of 'X'. For certain other values of 'X', Statements 2, 3, 4
hold, and Statement 1 does not. For a third group of values of 'X', all
that we have observed is that when X occurs in sentences which are of a
certain sort, -i(’) is affixed to X, but in other
sentences X occurs and -i(’) does not.
Further discussion of the uses of -i(’) may be
facilitated by these two formulas:
Form 1. | (...) X-i(’) |
Form 2. | (...) X IU-i(’) |
We let '(...)' stand for the circumstance that in some cases one or
more words may precede X and be components of the discoursive unit
containing X and -i(’); while in other cases, X is the
first component. In Form 2, 'IU' stands for an intervening unit; that
is, a word, a phrase, or a clause that occurs after X. In Form 1,
-i(’) is affixed to X. In Form 2, -i(’) is affixed to the last component, or
to the only component, of the intervening unit. In all cases,
-i(’)
is the last component of a discoursive unit to which one of those two
formulas apply. In the preceding statements, the phrase discoursive
unit is to be understood as referring to a Yucatec sentence, or
to a
clause constructed as a Yucatec sentence. It is to be noted that we
class as a Yucatec sentence any word which in a given discourse
satisfies these two conditions: (a) it is not a component of a Yucatec
sentence; and (b) it serves to assert that something occurred, or is
occurring, or will or may occur. For example, kimi,
'He died'; k'ohaanen, 'I am sick';
hats'bilech, 'You are to be flogged'.
It will now be our task to specify what values can be assigned to 'X'
and
'IU' in Forms 1 and 2. It will be seen that in most cases one or the
other of those two formulas is applicable if we let 'X' stand for one
of the verbal constructions whose conjugation requires the suffixation
of the pronouns of Class B. Those verbal constructions are:
That much is true by and large, but the uses of
-i(’)
cannot be adequately delimited by broad generalizations. The various
cases in which the above formulas are applicable must be dealt with
separately.
Case 1. Formula: (...)
X-i(’). Specifications: (1) X-i(’)
is a sentence, or the last word of a sentence. (2) 'X' stands for the
3rd. pers. sing. or plur. of the intransitive or passive
AHAB-constructions. Thus, if we replace 'X'
by the formulas for the 3rd. pers. sing. and plur. of those
constructions the possibilities in Case 1 can be formulated as
follows:
Intransitive | Passive | |
Sing. | (...) V-i(’) | (...) V-ab-i(’) |
Plur. | (...) V-o'b-i(’) | (...) V-ab-o'b-i(’) |
Examples ka luk'i, 'And he left', (...
V-i). luk'oobi, 'They left',
(V-o'b-i). ka kinsaabi,
'and she was killed', (... V-ab-i).
No exception has been found to the rule that when one of the above
AHAB-constructions is a sentence, or occurs at the end of a sentence,
-i(’) is affixed to it. The assertion ka
bini,
'And he went (away, or to a previously specified place)', occurred in
conformity with the above specifications more than 100 times; and in
about as many times we found bin without
-i(’) used in the same sense, and otherwise than at
the end of a sentence; as in ka bin tu
yotoch, 'and he went to his home'. The conclusions
under Case 1 are supported by more than 1,000 instances.
Case 2. Formulas:
X-i(’) and X IU-i(’).
Specifications: (1) Each of these two formulas stands for a sentence, of
which -i(’) is the last component. (2) 'X' stands for
the negative sign ma(’)
followed either by (a) one of the intransitive or passive constructions
listed above as requiring the affixation of the pronouns of Class B; or
(b) a transitive AHAB-construction to which a pronoun of Class B has
been affixed; that is, t-PA V-ah-PB (2.5). (3) 'IU' stands for a component which does not
contain an AEO-construction (4.51).
Examples: 1. ma binechi’, 'You did
not go'; bin-ech-i’ (V-PB-i’).
2. ma’ ilaabeni, 'I was not seen';
il-ab-en-i (V-ab-PB-i). 3.
ma kalaaneeni’, 'I am not drunk';
kal-aan-en-i’; V-aan-PB-i.
4. ma ta hats'aheeni, 'You did not hit
me'; t-PA V-ah-PB-i. 5. ma
polche’eechi’, 'You are
not a carpenter';
pol-che’('carpenter')-ech-i’;
NP-PB-i’. 6. ma
yaabooni, 'We are not many';
yaab-o'n-i; V-PB-i. 7. ma
ts'aab teeni’, 'It was not
given to me'; ts'a-(a)b ten-i’; V-ab
IU-i’; ten, 'to me'; pron. Class C. 8.
ma bin tu yotochi’, 'He did not go to
his home'; bin-(null sign) t-u
y-ot-och-i’; V-(PB) IU-i’; t-u
(ti-u), 'to his'; otoch, 'home'. 9.
ma tin tasah mix baali’, 'I did not
bring anything'; t-in ta(l)-s-ah, 'I brought';
mix baal-i’, 'nothing' (4.32); t-PA V-ah
IU-i’.
To generalize upon the uses of -i(’) in Case 2, one
would have to say that -i(’)
is required in negative sentences whose main verbs have certain
constructions, and such that either no component other than
-i(’)
follows the main verb, or the component which follows the main verb
does not contain an AEO-construction (4.51). The
restriction concerning
the AEO-construction applies in all the uses of -i(’).
Thus, regardless of what construction precedes, for example, the
AEO-construction le ... -o’, 'that', 'the', and
regardless of whether a noun or a clause comes between le
and -o’, if le ... -o’ follows the
verb, -i’ is not used. For instance,
-i(’) is required above in Example 9, but not in
ma tin tasah le tsimino’, 'I did
not bring the horse'; nor in ma tin tasah le
tsimin tin manaho’, 'I did not bring the
horse I bought'; although in the unit le ... tin
manah-o’ we have a verb with the same AHAB-construction as
that of the main verb tin tasah. Case 2 shows more
clearly than Case 1 that a description of the instances in which
-i(’)
occurs has to be a description of the constructions of certain kinds of
sentences, and not exclusively of certain kinds of words. It cannot be
said that -i(’) occurs when this or that item occurs;
but rather that it occurs when certain items concur. Strictly, it
should be said that those items and -i(’) concur in
certain discoursive units which serve to communicate negation and
specify what is denied.
In the preceding description of the instances which fall under Case 2,
it was not necessary to say that -i(’) is not used
when the negative sign is not simply ma(’) but
ma tech, the sign of emphatic denial. The reason is
that when ma tech
is used, the following verb takes the IKAL-construction, as shown in
4.20; and that is not one of the constructions
which concur with ma(’) and other items in the
sentences in which -i(’) occurs. Thus, we find
-i(’) in ma tu ts'aah
teeni’, 'He did not give it to me'; but not in
ma tech u ts'ayk ten, 'He certainly did not give it
to me' (emphasis on 'give').
It may be obvious that the foregoing is not sufficient to delimit the
use of -i(’) under consideration. The information
given by means of formulas X-i(’) and X
IU-i(’) is that for the specified values of 'X' and 'X
IU' there are instances such that when -i(’) occurs,
either X or X IU occurs. We need to know now whether it can be asserted
that whenever X of X IU occurs -i(’) occurs. So far as
our observations go, whenever X occurs formula
'X-i(’)' applies. That is to say, we found no
exception to the rule that negative sentences with
ma(’) followed by a verb with one of the constructions
above specified require the affixation of -i(’), as
indicated by formula 'X-i(’)', when the verb is the
last word of the sentence. But the rule that X IU requires
-i(’)
has exceptions. Evidently the restriction that IU must not contain an
AEO-construction is not sufficient. We shall not attempt to specify
what other restriction or restrictions should be taken into account,
because the exceptional instances are too few (27), and too different
from one another to justify generalization.
Case 3. Formulas: (...)
X-i(’) and (...) X IU-i(’).
Specifications: (1) '(...)' indicates that X may or may not be preceded
by one or more words which are components of the sentence to which one
or the other of the two formulas apply. (2) 'X' stands for a unit
consisting of the negative sign ma(’) followed by a
form of one of these three verbs: k'at, 'to wish', 'to
want'; ohel, 'to know' (French savoir, not conaître; or Spanish saber, not conocer); k'abet,
'to need', 'be necessary'. (3) 'IU' stands for a component which does
not contain an AEO-construction (as in Case 2), nor a clause introduced
by wa signifying 'whether'. This last restriction applies
to clauses subordinate to ohel; as in ma’
u yoohle’ wa yan ti kah, 'He does not know
whether she is in town'. It should be noted that in Case 3 the verbs to
which -i(’)
is affixed are not, as in Case 1 and 2, of the sort that require the
use of the pronouns of Class B in their conjugation. As already shown
(3.56), k'at and
ohel require pronouns of Class A; and
k'abet requires none (4.40).
Thus, 'X' may be said to stand in the above formulas for one of these
three constructions: ma(’) PA k'at,
ma(’) PA (prefix)-ohel,
ma(’) k'abet.
Examples to which formula (...) X-i(’) applies: 1.
ma’ in k'ati, 'I don't want it' or 'I don't want
to'. 2. ma’ in wohli, 'I don't know' (as in
answer to a question); the e of -el is omitted
in conformity to the prevalent phonologic tendency (1.4). 3. ma k'abeti, 'It is
not necessary', 'There is no need of it'. Examples to which formula
(...) X IU-i(’) applies: 4. ma’ in k'at
hok'oli, 'I don't want to go out';
hok'-ol, 'go out'; V-(a)l; for clauses
subordinate to k'at and k'abet see 4.40. 5. ma’ u k'at ka
xiykeni, 'He does not want me to go';
x(i)-ik-en; intransitive NULLAK-construction
V-(a)k-PB, ka-Form (4.37). 6. ma’ u yoohel
tuux yaneni’, 'He did not know where
I was'; tuux, 'where', yan-en
(V-PB), 'I was'; see 4.61. 7. ma’ in k'at in woks tin
wooli’, 'I can't believe it'; literally: 'I don't
want to introduce it (ok-s) into my mind (t-in
w-ol)'. 8. ma k'abet ka xiyke'x
tu yotochi’, 'It is not necessary that you
(plur.) go to his home'; otoch, 'one's
dwelling'.
If in view of the foregoing we formulate the rule that, for the
specified values of 'X' and 'IU', whenever (...) X IU occurs,
-i(’) occurs as indicated by the formula (...) X
IU-i(’),
it would be found that the rule holds for 91% of the instances in our
texts. Evidently there are more restrictions for IU than those above
specified. All that we found that is common to nearly all the
exceptional instances is that IU is more complex than in the 91%
of the non-exceptional instances. Those which cannot be said to be more
complex, for they consist of a single clause, end with proper names.
The instances with proper names, however, are too few to justify
generalization. The instances to which the other formula, (...)
X-i(’), is concerned involve no exception; that is,
the negation of what k'at, ohel, and
k'abet signify requires -i(’)
whenever one of these verbs is the last word of the sentence.
Case 4. Formula: (...) X
IU-i(’). Specifications: (1) '(...)'as in any of the
previous cases. (2) 'X' stands for the word ti’
signifying 'there', or 'right there'. 'IU' is a sentence construction
which does not contain an AEO-construction. In the instances of Case 4,
the specification of the location referred to by ti’
is the dominant topic (4.8). The location has been
mentioned in the part of the sentence preceding ti’,
or in the preceding sentence, and ti’ introduces the
assertion 'there is where x
occurred (or was, or is, or will be, or will occur)'.
Examples: 1. ti’ ku heeli’, 'There is
where he was resting'. 2. ma hah wa ti’ tu
ts'onahi?, 'Is it not true that there is where he shot
him?' 3. te k'ewelo’, ti’ ku bin u
haxi’, 'On the leather, there is where he is
going to twist it'. 4. ti’ ku enkantartal
maki’, 'There is where people are enchanted';
Spanish encantar, with
formative -t; passive k-IKAL, Usage A (4.28).
No exception was found to the rule that under the specified conditions,
whenever ti’ is used, -i(’) occurs
as indicated above.
Case 5. The use of
-i(’)
at the end of an affirmative sentence. In Case 5, Usage A of the
NULLAK-constructions is involved. It is convenient, therefore, to base
our explanations on the tabulation used in 4.38. We
take up first the
transitive constructions employed when a 2nd. person is ordered or
asked to do something. We notice that when the verbal unit is the first
or only verbal component of the imperative sentence, the constructions
are:
2nd. sing. | 2nd. plur. | ||
(1) | V-e | (3) | V-e'x |
(2) | V-(null) |
Construction 1 is used when the whole imperative sentence, or the first imperative component of a compound imperative sentence, consists entirely of the verbal unit; e.g., chae, 'Turn it loose', 'Let it go'. If the suffix -e occurred in no other constructions, it could be said that it is a 3rd. pers. object pronoun that is used only with the NULLAK-constructions. In fact, there is no valid objection to saying that, whatever else it may be in other instances, it is such a pronoun in imperative sentences. The fact that it is omitted whenever the verb is followed by another component of the imperative unit, regardless of whether the additional component be an object of the verb or not, could be dismissed as a pecularity of this language. We find now that when a pronoun of Class B referring to the object is necessary the suffix -i(’) is required, and the above form (1) becomes V-PB-i(’). Thus, with the stem cha, 'to turn loose', we have (addressing 2nd. sing.):
We see that a single formula for 2nd. sing. and 2nd. plur. for
instances requiring -i(’) as just indicated could be
V-PB(-e'x)-i(’).
But it should be specified that in the instances to which that formula
applies, the imperative unit consists entirely of a single word, except
when the word chan, the sign of a sort of persuasive
imperative, or a vocative precedes the verbal unit, as indicated in 4.38.
Let us consider now the affirmative imperative sentences in which one
or more words follow V-(null) or V-e'x. In some
of those instances the formula for the construction is
V(-e'x) IU-i(’). Here,
'V(-e'x)' stands for the 2nd. pers. sing. form
V-(null) and for the 2nd. plur. V-e'x. 'IU'
stands for an intervening unit the last component of which is one of
these items: (1) a pronoun of Class C; (2) the word tun,
'therefore', 'so', etc.; (3) a phrase referring to the object of the
verb, and such that it does not contain any of the AEO-constructions.
When IU is a pronoun of Class C, the pronoun may perform the same
office as that of an indirect object pronoun in various languages, or
the pronoun may refer to the person or persons addressed; e.g., English
'you' in the imperative sentence 'You take it'.
Examples in which IU is, or contains, a pronoun of Class C, or the word
tun: 1. ts'a teeni, 'Give it to
me' (V PC-i). 2. ts'ae'x
tooni’, 'You (plur.) give it to us'
(V-e'x PC-i’). 3.
ts'a tun teeni’, 'So, give it to me' (V
tun PC-i’). 4. uk'
tuuni, 'So, drink it'. 5. uk'
teechi’, 'Drink (some) yourself' (V
PC-i’).
Examples in which IU is other than tun or PC: 6.
ts'a ti a sukuuni, 'Give (some) to your elder
brother'; sukuun, 'elder brother'. 7. ts'a
u lak' k'ak'i’, 'Give it some more fire';
u lak', 'another', 'its other', 'some more';
k'ak', 'fire'.
In the imperative sentences ordering or requesting that a 3rd. pers.,
or a non-particular 2nd. pers. (4.38) act, the
rules for the use of -i(’)
are similar to those just dealt with. Specifically, when the sentence
consistes of a single word containing a pronoun of Class B, the
construction is V-(a)k-PB-i(’). For
sentences consisting of the verbal unit followed by one or more words
(IU), the form is V-(a)k IU-i(’), and the
specifications for IU are the same as those given above for the 2nd.
pers. imperative.
Examples: 1. hok'ok hun tuli, 'Let one
(of you or of them) come out' (V-ok IU-i);
hun, 'one'; tul, classifier for animate (4.68). 2. hok'ok hun tul waatal
yaalan maakani, 'Let some one come
out and stand under the shed'; makan, 'shed', a sort
of canopy made of poles, vines, and leaves (Spanish enramada). 3.
ts'aabak tu k'ab yum batabi,
'Let it be placed on the hand of the honorable batab
(in this context, in a ritual)'.
Case 6. The suffix
-i(’)
is affixed to any interrogative substitute (4.31)
when the word thus
formed is the sole component of an interrogative sentence.
Examples: 1. baaxi?, 'What?' 2.
maxi?, 'Who?' 3. bixi?,
'How?' When the interrogative sentence consists of the interrogative
substitute and the word tun, 'so', 'therefore', 'then',
-i(’) is affixed to the last component of the
sentence, which in such cases is always tun.
Examples: 4. baax tuuni?, 'What,
then?' 5. max tuuni?, 'Who, then?'.
Case 7. Certain expressions
are found with and without the suffix -i(’) depending
on the sense in which they are used, or on the manner of uttering the
sentence that contains them.
The following are the most common: 1.
xiykeni, 'I am going'; and
xiykooni,
'We are going', when either is uttered upon leaving a house, or in
similar circumstances. Sometimes the expression to announce that one is
leaving is xiyken tuuni, 'Well, I am
going'; xiyko'n tuuni, 'Well, we
are going'. 2. The Spanish word adios, 'goodby', is used with the pronoun
-ech when addressed to a single person, and with
-e'x when addressing more than one. In
circumstances which we are unable to specify, the suffix
-i(’) is affixed to those constructions. Thus, for
'goodby' the expression is sometimes
adyosechi’ and
adyose'xi’, and sometimes simply
adyosech, adyose'x,
or with tun, 'so', 'well', adyosech
tuuni, adyose'x
tuuni. 3. The expression for 'Thank you' is dyos
bootik tech ('God reward you'). If the
interlocutor replies 'Thank you', the pronoun tech, 'to you' is
uttered in a certain manner, and the expression is dyos
bootik teechi’. 4.
-i(’) is found constantly in the expression hun
puli and hun pulaki, both
signifying 'at once', 'altogether', 'definitely'; and in
tanili’ (tan-il-i’),
'first', as the first component of a sentence; e.g.,
tanili’, xen a ch'ae,
'First, go and get it'.
The verbal constructions for which 'X' stands in Cases 1, 2, and 3, and
also the imperative constructions of Case 5, occur in various instances
in which -i(’)
is not the last component of the sentence. It is probable that such
exceptional instances are due to the manner of uttering the sentence
when the verbal unit or some other component to which
-i(’)
is affixed refers to an item which is the dominant topic of the
sentence. This inference rests on our observations on the texts that
were recorded phonographically. We find in the exceptional instances in
question that the sentence is uttered with a ceratin intonation, and
there is a pause between -i(’) and the rest of the
sentence (cf. 4.58). In the sentence ka
kinsaabi le ookolo’, 'And the
thief was (finally) killed', we find -i(’) affixed
otherwise than at the end of the sentence. In other sentences with the
same construction -i(’) is not used at all; for the
last portion of the sentence contains one of the AEO-constructions,
le ... -o’. As we hear this sentence in the
phonographic record, the portion of the sentence ending with
-i is uttered almost as if it were the end of the whole
sentence, and the last phrase, le ookolo’,
is uttered in a Yucatec manner characteristic of instances in which a
reference is made by way of elucidation, or as it is said, as an
afterthought. Even in those cases, -i(’) could be said
to
signify something, only in the special sense in which one could say
that a certain facial expression signifies displeasure. The suffix
-i(’) is doubtless one of the linguistic devices
which, like the augment in some tenses of the Greek verb, are
untranslatable.
Certain words which contain the suffix -il (4.60) in polychronic references (4.6), and in references to contemporary occurrents (4.3), require the affixation of -i(’)
when they occur in monochronic references to past or future occurrents.
Of that sort are the following: tanili, 'at once';
ts'ookili, 'beforehand';
ma’ili, 'before';
leyli, 'even so', 'once again', 'as before';
hun pakili, 'without further delay', 'without
hesitation', 'without regard for the consequences'. The following
contained -i in all the instances in which they occurred in
our texts: haali, 'only', 'except that ...',
'however'; sukili, 'it is customary'; hun
pulili, 'finally', 'absolutely', 'resolutely'. Both
suffixes -il and -i(’) are affixed to the
component he(l) of construction he + IKAL +
-e’ (4.16) in emphatic promises;
e.g., helili k tal
okk'iine’, 'We will surely come this
evening'.
If the phrase 'the suffix -il' is understood as
referring to any Modern Yucatec suffix phonologically describable by the
phonetic notation [il], we have to say that some of the
uses of the suffix -il have already been dealt with. For,
thus understood, the suffix -il is one of the members of
the class of suffixes we have conveniently referred to by the notation
'-(a)l' (4.52). The
-(a)l-class
of suffixes may be said to be a 'constructional class' in attention to
the fact that it is definable in terms of certain rules of
construction: to put it briefly, we have found that a set of rules can
be formulated which applies to various uses of suffixes phonologically
describable by five combinations of phonetic notations: [al], [el], [il], [ol], [ul].
If each of these phonologic units had been dealt with separately, the
same set of rules would have been given five times. It has been
considered preferable to say that there is a class of suffixes whose
uses conform to the given set of rules; that those suffixes consist of
a vowel followed by the consonant l; and that the vowel is in each
instance a, e, i, o, or u, depending on certain specifiable
circumstances (4.52). The members of this
constructional class (the -(a)l-class) are not homophonic,
since their vocalic constituents differ. We are now to deal with another
constructional class: the -il-class. The members of the
-il-class are homophonic, for each one of them is
phonologically describable by this combination of phonetic notations:
[il]. Consequently, in the present description, the
phonologic unit /il/ can in a given instance be a
member of the constructional -(a)l-class; and in another
instance, a member of the constructional -il-class. This is
a convenient way of saying that in one instance the occurence of the
phonologic unit /il/
conforms to one set of rules, while in the other instance its
occurrence conforms to another set of rules. Let us agree now to
understand the phrase 'the suffix -il' as referring to a
member of the constructional -il-class.
The suffix -il
occurs in nominal constructions of various sorts. In some cases, it may
be said to be a constant component of certain Yucatec nouns; in others,
it should be said that it is required by the nominal construction of
which the noun is a component. It does not seem feasible to formulate a
single set of rules that can apply to all its uses. As in other cases,
one must resort to grouping analogous instances.
1. The suffix -il
serves to convert verbal constructions into nominal constructions, and
to form Yucatec nouns with stems which are also used otherwise than in
nominal constructions. Thus, corresponding to the verbal construction
k'ohaan, which in some contexts can signify 'he is
sick', we find k'ohaanil, 'sickness'. Similarly,
sahak, 'He is afraid', and sahkil
(elision of unstressed vowel) 'fear'; ch'ak, 'to
chop', 'to cut by hitting with cutting tool', and
ch'akil, 'action of chopping',
ch'uy, 'to hang' (transitive); and
ch'uyil, 'the action, manner, or effect of
hanging something'. hat', 'make groove or scratch with
pointed tool', and hat'il, a noun designating
collectively scratches or grooves. The number of nouns thus formed is
considerable.
2. Let 'N' stand for a given simple or composite stem used as a Yucatec
noun; and let 'N-il' stand for the same stem with the
suffix -il. There are numerous pairs of nouns in Yucatec
which correspond structurally as N and N-il; and such that
for each pair, what N designates differs from that which is designated
by N-il. The difference, however, is not the same sort for
all pairs; as shown in the following examples:
k'in, 'day', 'sun'; k'inil, 'time',
'occasion'.
yum, 'sir', 'honorable' (before a person's name or word
referring to office), Old. Yuc., 'father'; yumil,
'owner'.
na, 'house' (without specifying who lives in it);
nail, 'one's dwelling', 'home'.
luum, 'ground'; luumil, 'region',
'country', 'soil', 'removed earth'.
xib, 'male', 'man'; xiybil,
'manhood'
wakax, 'cow', 'cattle',
wakxil, 'cow-like', having the properties or
appearance of a cow.
kuuk, 'squirrel'; kuukil, name of
a game in which the participants imitate squirrels.
It is convenient, though by no means elucidating, to say that in
each case, the stem N is used in a derived sense when -il
is affixed to it. But no useful generalization can be made as to what
sort of sense is the derived sense in all instances. One sort of
derived sense which is subject to rule is as follows: By affixing
-il to the name of a village, town, or region, a noun
referring to its inhabitants can be formed; e.g.,
yok'-ts'onotilo'b, 'inhabitants of Yok
Dzonot'; le san-antonyoyloobo’,
'those from San Antonio'; hun tul le
nohiloobo’, 'one of the Southerners'
(people of Quintana Roo).
The word k'inil, signifying 'time' or 'occasion', is
always preceded by the 3rd. pers. pron., u, even in such
expressions as chen hun p'el u k'inile’,
'once upon a time', 'on a certain occasion'. On the other hand, the
adopted Spanish words hora,
'time', 'hour', and mes,
'month', are used without u or -il when
preceded by a numeral, but -il is affixed to them when the
reference requires the use of u; as in u
yoorail in weenel, 'my sleeping time (the
time of my sleeping); tu meesil
abrile’, 'in the month of April'. The
distinction between na, 'house', 'a building' and
nail, 'one's dwelling', is made in some localities by
means of the words na, 'house' and
otoch, 'one's dwelling'. Thus, for such a
statement as I see a house,
na seems to be used throughout the Yucatec speech-area, but
for I went to his house,
binen tu nail or binen tu
yotoch would be used, depending on the locality. In
some localities, tu nail, 'to his dwelling', is
sometimes replaced by tu tana. The expression
tana seems to contain the word na,
'house', but we are unable to identify the component ta in
any other combination. Furthermore, various tests indicated that
tana may be used only in reference to a 3rd. person's
dwelling, and only in the expression tu tana, 'to his
dwelling', 'to his home'.
3. Construction u N-il. The components of
this construction are u,
3rd. pers. sing. pron. of Class A; N, a simple or composite stem
commonly used as a noun. The objects, persons, or other items referred
to by construction u N-il are of the same sort
as those referred to by N. Take, for example, the stem
kax, signifying 'chicken'. In many contexts, the two
phrases u kaxi lo'b and le
kaxoobo’,
signifying 'the chickens', are interchangeable. Evidence of their
equivalence comes not only from the reactions of the native speaker to
our tests, but from the many instances in which the same items are
referred to by both constructions in the same discourse. It is
observed, however, that a given item is referred to by construction
u N-il
only after it has been mentioned in a previous reference, and only if
the particularity of the item is not the dominant topic (4.8). Thus, in
a description of a ceremony, it is first stated that chickens have to
be procured. In describing further what is done with the chickens,
construction u N-il is frequently
employed, but not exclusively. In contrast with this, we observe that
when an item is the dominant topic of the discourse, construction
u N -il is not employed. In the cases just
spoken of, if we try to understand the pronoun u
as signifying that the item spoken of belongs to someone, we frequently
fail to find a possessor, in the grammatical or in the strict sense of
the term 'possessor'; and the native speaker is perplexed if he is
asked whose item he refers to. In those cases the pronoun u
cannot be said in any useful sense to operate as a possessive pronoun.
In other instances its use is like that of the genitive case in various
European languages. That is the case in reference to a part of a whole,
or origin, or material of which something is made, or an accessory of a
contrivance, or the various articles or other items habitually utilized
or in some way involved in the performance of a common activity, i.e.,
items pertaining to that activity.
Examples: u yitil ex, 'the seat of the pants'.
u suumil le kampanao’, 'the
cord of the church bell'. u pachil u kal, 'the
back of the neck'. u tanil u hool, 'the
forehead (the front of the head)'. u misil u k'ab,
'the muscles of the arm'; u han'lil le
'tso’o’, 'the turkey dinner'; literally: 'the food
(han-al-lil) (made) with the turkey'. u taanil
le nao’, 'the ashes of the house' (after the
house was burned down). u waahil le
mahanoobo’, 'the tortillas for the helpers' (the ones usually furnished
for those who help without remuneration). u
ts'opcheil u pak'al buul, 'the
stick for planting beans'. u chukwail le
ts'ookol beelo’, 'the chocolate
for the wedding' (that usually prepared for the celebration).ku
t'aabal u kibil, 'the candles are (then)
lighted' (the candles that are habitually used in the ceremony).
With respect to the parts of the body, it is observed that construction
u N-il is used for parts of parts, but not for
the whole part. Thus, for 'his foot' we find u yok; but for
'the skin of the foot', we find u k'ewelil yok
in some localities and u k'ewilel yok or
u k'ewilel u yok in others.
Some references which require construction u
N-il
are comparable with those that are made in other languages by means of
the so-called "collective nouns", and by various devices termed
"partitive genitive", or "the use of a noun in partitive sense" such a
use of the construction, however, is permissible only with certain
nouns. The restrictions appear to be as arbitrary as that which forbids
us to use the plural ending in such Englisch nouns as sheep, deer, etc.
The Yucatec nouns are for the most part those which designate
aggregates of particles, as ash, earth, dust. Others are of a
different sort, and are subject to very special rules. Among the
latter we find the names of such common items as wah, 'tortilla' (corn cake), and
chamal, 'cigarette'. luch,
'gourd' (of a certain kind and size used as plates) falls in the same
class, but only when it is referred to as being a container, or to
specify quantity, i.e., as much as a gourd of that kind generally
contains, similar to 'spoonful' in English. The plural suffix
-o'b is sometimes used with wah, but it
must follow -il; e.g., kan p'el u luchil
yetel u wahilo'b, 'four gourds with (containing)
tortillas'. The use of
ixim, or ixi’m, or
xi’m,
'maize', is governed by special rules, which differ from one locality
to another. For 'one grain of maize' we found in some localities
hun p'el ixi’mil; and in others hun
p'el u xi’mil. Since the initial sound of the
word ixim is a vowel, it would be expected (3.2) that y- be prefixed to it when the
pronoun u
precedes. This is avoided in some localities by not using the pronoun,
and in others by dropping the initial vowel. On the whole, it seems
that an adequate treatment of the nouns which require construction
u N-il
in partitive or collective references would necessitate dealing
separately at least with each of the names of the most common items of
food.
The foregoing is not a complete account of the instances in which the
suffix -il
occurred. We estimate that it excludes about 20% of the total number of
its occurrences in our texts. It seems to be true of many of the
instances excluded that the suffix -il is used as a sign of
unknown delimitation or identity; as in he
baax meyahil tu
beetahe’, 'whatever be the work he did'. But the
evidence is equivocal in many cases, and there is the further difficulty
that -il
did not occur in many references which were definitely of that sort.
Many more samplings would be necessary to warrant generalization upon
those doubtful cases, and upon the rest which were excluded from this
description for similar reasons.
The documentary data on Old Yucatec clearly show that
yan (yan in
previous writings) consists etymologically of a stem an,
and the prefix y-,
which was in Old Yucatec a 3rd. person pronoun required in some
constructions before words with initial vowel or the consonant which
some writers called "weak h".
In Modern Yucatec there are only sporadic indications that this word
was formerly analyzable into two components. In texts from individuals
whose speech was predominantly of Type A, an has occurred
without the prefix y- in the form anhi,
'it came to be', 'it came to pass', and in aˈnil, 'being (in a
specified condition)'; see 4.60. But in both
speech-types yanhi and yanil are
the usual forms. At present, yan is the stem for all
persons; e.g., ti’ yaanen
teelo’, 'I was there'; ti’
yaanech teelo’, 'you (sing.) were
there'; way yaanoone’, 'here we
are'. In a description of Modern Yucatec, therefore, the omission of the
y- of yan has to be classed as an
irregularity. At present, yan is conjugated in conformity
with formula V-PB of intransitive verbs in the AHAB-constructions (4.9). But yan is exceptional in that its
V-PB form is used for all chronologic specifications. For example,
yaanen occurs in these three references:
ti’ yaaneni (for the final -i
see 4.59), 'I was there'; way
yaanene’ (for the final -e’
with way see 4.51), 'Here I am', in
reply to the question tuuxech?, 'Where are
you?'; ti’ yaanen samal
teelo’, 'I'll be there tomorrow'. With the
irregular AHAB-construction, yanhi or
yanchahi (3.58), signifying
'it came to be', 'it came to pass', 'it so happened that...',
yan is used in references to discrete-past occurrents (4.4, Case 1), as the AHAB-constructions are most
frequently used.
The uses of yan are here grouped under six headings.
Usage A was dealt with in 4.18, where it was shown that construction
yan
+ IKAL is commonly equivalent to the English construction 'to have to
(infinitive)', signifying need or obligation of some sort, as in 'I
have to do it'.
Usage B. yan
serves to specify location. In such specifications, yan is
preceded by ti’ (variants: ti,
te), signifying 'there' or 'at'; or the whole sentence is a
component of the AEO-construction way ... -e’, 'here';
or he ... -a’, approximately, 'here, look at it'; or
he ... -o’, 'look, there it is' (4.51). When ti’, or one of its
variants, precedes yan, the location must again be referred
to after yan, except when it has been specified in the
preceding sentence; e.g., ti’ yan tu
yotochi, 'It is (was) in his house';
ti’ yan teelo’, 'It is there'
(pointing to the place); ti’ yani, 'It is (was)
there', (referring to a place previously mentioned); ti’
yan teela’, 'It is here', (pointing
to the place); way yane’,
'it is (was) here', (said without pointing, and in reference to the
spot or locality, or region, where the speaker is). For a better
understanding ot these expressions, the discussion of the
AEO-constructions (4.51) should be taken into
account.
With way ... -e’ and the first person pronoun
-en two equivalent constructions have occurred: way
yaanene’ and wayen
yaane’, both signifying 'Here I am' in answer to
the question tuuxech?, 'Where are you?'.
Usage C. This usage may be
adequately specified by saying that the English equivalents to the
verbal unit with yan are: 'there is', 'there was', 'there
will be', 'there are', 'there were'. In such references,
yan is seldom preceded by ti’, or any of
its variants, ti, te, as in Usage B; and it
has not occurred as a component of way ... -e’. If
way is used in the sentence, it occurs after
yan and its subject; e.g., yan hun tul winik
waye’, ku ..., 'There is (was) a man here who ...'.
The simple word yan serves both for present and
contemporary-past. In reference to future time we find bin
yanak, 'there will be' (4.42).
Usage D. The phrases ka
yanhi and ka yanchahi
are frequently used to introduce a new episode or incident in a
narrative. They are rhetorical devices of a sort comparable to 'And it
came to pass that ...'.It is observed that ka
yanchahi is used more frequently than ka
yanhi
when it is evident that the incident thus introduced is detrimental or
highly beneficial to the hero of the story. For the suffixes see 3.31 (-h), 4.59
(-i), 3.27
(-cha).
Usage E. Followed by a pronoun
of Class C, or by ti’ and a noun, yan
is equivalent to 'to have', denoting what is commonly referred to in
grammars by the vague word 'possession';as in 'He has two sons',or
'He has a job', or 'It has four legs'. That is to say, in Usage E,
yan
serves to assert all that is asserted subordinately by pronouns of
Class A when they are equivalent to the English possessive pronouns.
Examples: yan ten hun tul tsimin, 'I have a
horse', or 'I had a horse'. yan hun tul tsimin
tio'b, 'They have (had) a horse'; yan hun tul
tsimin ti hwan, 'John has (had) a horse'. Occasionally
the possessor is referred to before yan; e.g., le
xiipalo’ yan hun tul tsimin,
'The young man had a horse'.
Usage F. Before a verbal unit,
yan can be equivalent to 'some' in the sense of 'more than
one', or 'a certain quantity'. Thus, yan tin bootah
holhiak, 'I bought some yesterday'; without
yan, this sentence would be equivalent to 'I bought it (or
them) yesterday'.
It should be noted that in order to negate what can be asserted by
yan in Usage B, C, E, the special verb
minaan, 'not to be at a place', 'not to exist', 'not
to have', is required. But for Usages A and D, the common negative
ma(’) is used before yan. Thus, the negative of
ti’ yan teelo’, 'He is (was) there',
is minaan teelo’. Similarly,
corresponding to yan ten taak'in, 'I have
money', or 'I had money', we find minaan ten
taak'in, 'I have no money', or 'I had no money'. Other
data concerning minaan are given in 4.53.
There are three homophonic devices whose phonologic constituents are as represented by this phonetic notation: [ka]. One of them consists of the component k- of the k-IKAL-constructions (4.27) and the 2nd. pers. pron. a. A second device is a fusion of a non-composite ka and the pronoun a, a fusion that occurs, though not prevalently, when non-composite ka precedes the 2nd. pers. of the transitive NULLAK-construction (4.37). We are concerned at this point with the uses of the non-composite ka, referred to in this discussion simply as ka. This word is in some cases equivalent to the English conjunction 'and'; in others, it can be rendered by the conjuction 'that'; and in a third group of instances it is untranslatable into English. Translating English into Yucatec, the conjunction 'and' would be rendered in some cases by yetel, 'with', 'in the company of'; by ka, in others; and in a third group of instances, what is indicated by 'and' would be indicated by the circumstance that a certain Yucatec sentence occurs after a certain other, or by such expressions as xan, 'also'; bey xan ... -e’ (4.51), 'in like manner'; leyli or layli, 'still' (in other contexts: 'even so', 'once again'). Our conjunction 'and' can be rendered by the subordinate verbal unit yetel only between two Yucatec nouns or nominal constructions; e.g., hwan yetel u yatan, 'John and his wife'. Between two constructions, each of which can be a non-elliptical Yucatec sentence, ka indicates, as 'and' does in English in compound sentences, that the assertion that follows has some bearing on the preceding assertion, or simply that the declarative value which the speaker assigns to the first assertion is assigned also to the second. This holds for most of the uses of ka even when it cannot be rendered by English 'and'. ka, however, differs from the conjunctions which signify 'and' in many other languages in that ka is used only before certain constructions, and never before a negative sentence. The instances in which ka was found in our texts may be classified as follows:
It is unnecessary to specify that the NULLAK-construction stands for
an affirmative assertion, because those constructions are never used
otherwise. With regard to the first two classes of instances specified
above, it would be justifiable to say that ka is a
component of the AHAB and hoop' + IKAL constructions,
were it not for the fact that ka
does not precede them when either of those constructions is used as the
first component of the first statement of a discourse, or of the first
sentence uttered in answer to a question. Thus, in answer to a
question, or to announce an occurrence, one can say simply,
kimi, 'He died'. But ka kimi would
be used when any other item of information concerning the occurrence
precedes; e.g., ku k'uchul tun ayle’, ka
kimi. 'Upon arriving at his house, he died'. Consequently,
after the first statement of a narrative, we find ka before
every AHAB and hoop' + IKAL construction that is not
the main verb of a negative sentence. In some instances, ka
is the first component of five or more consecutive clauses or sentences,
as in this passage: ka
tu yuubah le taatatsilo’, ka tu
ts'ah taak'in ti t'up. ka tu machah
le taak'in t'uupo’, ka bini. ka
k'uch ti hun p'el nohoch kah, ka
heeli’. 'The father heard it, and he gave some money
to the
youngest son. (And) the youngest son took the money and went away.
(And) he arrived at a city, and he tarried.' In such cases, as in many
others, a basis for deciding whether two given units of discourse
constitute a compound sentence or two simple sentences has to be sought
in the elocutionary manner in which they are uttered. If such a basis
can be found, it is doubtful that the matter will turn out to be as
simple as orthographic conventions in written languages assume it to
be.
To facilitate generalization upon the uses of ka with the
verbal units of the NULLAK-constructions, we found it convenient to
speak of the ka-Forms and the (No ka)-Forms of
the NULLAK-constructions, as shown in 4.37. Those
are the constructions in which ka can frequently be
rendered by the English conjunction 'that'
In 4.33 it was said that temporal clauses of the
form le + (verbal unit) + -e’
assert that a very brief interval is concerned in the sequence of the
two or more occurrents spoken of. That is to say, an interval
between x and y such as would be asserted in
English by saying 'As soon as x
occured, y occured', or 'No
sooner x occured, than y
occured.' That interval is evaluated as being still briefer by using an
AHAB-construction in the temporal clause; in which case, ka
precedes the AHAB-construction. The construction of the temporal clause
has in such cases this form: le ka AHAB (...)
-e’; e.g., le ka tu yilahe’,
'The very moment he saw him'. Sometimes le is omitted;
e.g., ka k'ucheene’,
'When I got there', 'No sooner had I arrived'. Aside from the
characteristic intonantion of such temporal clauses, the use of the
suffix -e’ (4.33; 4.58) is the only difference from ka
k'uchen, 'And I arrived'; and ka
k'ucheene’, 'When I arrived'.
This suffix has occurred in the texts only as a component of an intransitive construction with a reduplicated verbal stem. The verbal unit of which -ki is a component serves to assert a contemporary condition or circumstance, or to generalize upon the properties of objects. It is a construction that is permissible only with certain verbs. No rule can be given to distinguish the verbs that can be so used from those which cannot. In our texts this construction was used only with 3rd. pers. subject. Inquiries as to what is said in references to the 1st. and 2nd. persons disclosed that such references are either unusual or are not made by means of the constructions in question. Some informants dropped the -i of -ki upon affixing the pronouns -en and -ech, for 1st. and 2nd. pers., respectively; others retained it. The fact is that nearly all the verbs observed with this construction designate properties and changes in plants and in non-biological objects. Examples: henhenki, 'It splits easily'; hanhanki, '(cord or thread) is easily broken'; ch'ech'ebki, '(pot or gourd) is easily tipped over'; kakachki, '(stick, wood) is easily broken', 'it is brittle'; hehelki, 'it changes (in form or condition)'; chuchulki, '(wood) is full of knots'; babayki, '(hair) is smooth, is combed'; banbanki, '(fruit, ears of corn) are scattered on ground'; bibilki, 'It is filthy', 'it is full of trash'; bibit'ki, 'it has a very sharp point'; chachaki, '(rope, knot) is very loose'.
In Modern Yucatec, lah occurs most frequently before
the stem of a verbal unit. Hence, its usual position is that of an
adjunct verbal stem (4.50). In that position it is
used with
transitive, passive and intransitive constructions. With
intransitive and passive constructions it is also found, as in Old
Yucatec, affixed to the stem of the verbal unit, and preceding any
other components of the unit. In either position, it signifies 'all',
'totally', 'completely'. The main stress of the verbal unit is on
lah when it occurs before the verbal stem. In its affixed
position, -lah is unstressed. Stressed lah
is used when that which it specifies is a dominant topic (4.8) of the
communication. When that is not the dominant topic, we find either the
independent expression tu lakal, 'all', 'entirely',
or the unstressed suffix lah.
We do not know what determines the choice of the latter in intransitive
or passive constructions. In emphatic utterance, both the stressed
lah and tu lakal are frequently found in
a sentence.
Examples:
This suffix may be said to be a sign of polychronic reference (4.6) used in constructions which are ordinarily employed in monochronic references, or which are ambiguous as to whether the reference is monochronic or polychronic. It is used when each of two or more individuals performs one or more acts, the acts being performed contemporarily (4.3), or one after another. It occurred in the texts only in transitive and passive constructions. Worthy of note is the circumstance that the formative -t is required after -lan, as though the combination of -lan with a simple stem constituted a composite stem. The following formulas indicate how this rule applies:
Construction | Simple or Composite Stem | With -lan |
AHAB | t-PA V-ah | t-PA V-lan-t-ah |
IKAL | PA V-ik | PA V-lan-t-ik |
With the composite stem chukpach-t, 'to pursue', 'overtake', -lan is placed between the two components of the stem chuk, 'catch', and pach, 'behind', 'back'; chuk-lan-pach-t.
Examples:
The suffix -ma occurs mainly in these two equivalent constructions: PA V-ma and PA V-ah-ma. The latter was the prevalent construction in Old Yucatec. It occurs frequently at present with some stems, and infrequently with others. The choice of one or the other of those two constructions is about as inconsistent in speech of Type A as in Type B. Strict adherence to the use of V-ah-ma with certain stems and not with others was observed only in the texts dictated by comparatively young informants whose speech was prevalently of Type B. It seems adequate to say that PA V-ma and its variant are the transitive constructions corresponding in referential usage to the intransitive and passive V-aan (4.53). In references with PA V-ma, it is clearer than in references with V-aan that what is spoken of as a dominant topic (4.8) is a contemporary (4.3) circumstance which is a consequence of an occurrent of the sort denoted by the V-component of the construction. Thus, in k'alma, signifies coincidently both that the speaker locked up someone, and that the person referred to is still locked up. But there is unequivocal contextual evidence that the dominant topic is the assertion that the person is locked up at the time the communication is made. In agreement with this is the fact that bilingual informants having a good command of Spanish, rendered in k'alma by lo tengo encerrado and not by lo he encerrado, or lo encerré. Although the statement is vague, it may be useful to say that PA V-ma is used when the consequent circumstance has a bearing on some topic that is being dealt with. For example, in a discussion of one of the revolutions in Yucatan, one of the interlocutors is contradicted by another. Thereupon, the one contradicted argues that he knows he is right, because he saw the beginning of the revolution. For 'I saw' he says in this case in wilahma (variant PA V-ah-ma). The speaker proceeds to enumerate what he saw, and every one of the sentences of this enumeration begins, not with in wilahma, but with the AHAB-construction tin wilah, 'I saw'. It may be objected that if his seeing the beginning of the revolution has a bearing on the topic discussed, his witnessing of each of the incidents he enumerates must have also a bearing on that topic; for it so happens that all he does in the enumeration is to itemize what was covered by the assertion 'I saw the beginning of the revolution'. We would say that when dealing with such phases of discourse as the one we have termed topical distinction (4.8), we observe that it is generally more feasible to make statements of the form 'When device D occurs, x is the case' than of this form: 'When x is the case, device D occurs'. In fact, this is likely to be true of most phases of discourse, excepting formal and phonologic phases.
Examples:
The notation 'NP' stands for (1) a word which in a given sentence is a Yucatec noun; or (2) a phrase consisting of a noun, or a pronoun, and another or other words describing, delimiting, or specifying the item or items (persons, animals, or non-animals) referred to by the noun or pronoun; or (3) for a pronoun which stands for the item or items spoken of in a given sentence. To facilitate a comparison of the NP-constructions with certain English constructions, let us write 'is(&)' to indicate that 'is' can be replaced by 'am', 'are', or 'was' or 'were'. Using 'NP' for English as specified above for the Yucatec devices, we can now say that what is communicated in Yucatec by means of the NP-constructions is generally equivalent to that which can be communicated in English by means of this construction NP is(&) NP; e.g., 'John is a carpenter', 'They are the men I saw', 'What he saw was a raccoon'. That which is signified in English by 'is(&)' in NP is(&) NP is in some cases signified in Yucatec by the construction and intonation of the sentence together with a brief pause between the two NP-components. We have used a comma to indicate the pause and the intonational differentiation of the two components, thus: NP, NP; e.g., leelo’, le p'ok tin manaho’, 'That is the hat I bought'; word for word: 'That, the hat I bought'. le mak ta wilahe’, ten, 'The person you saw was I, (The person you saw, I)'. The Yucatec construction of such sentences differs according to whether NP is a single word or a phrase; a pronoun or a noun; a 3rd. pers. pronoun or some other. The pronouns involved are PC (pronoun of Class C) and -PB (pronoun of Class B). If we let 'N' stand for a simple or composite stem used as a noun; and 'PHR' for a nominal phrase, the NP-constructions that occurred most frequently may be indicated by the following formulas:
Common | Variants | |
1. | N-PB | 1(a). PC, N-PB |
2. | PHR, PC | 2(a). PC, PHR |
3. | PHR¹, PHR² | 3(a). PHR¹, PC, PHR² |
4. | PHR, N |
In forms 1 and 1(a), -PB is a 1st. or 2nd. pers. pronoun, sing. or
plur., inclusive of plural (-o'n-e'x), or
exclusive of plural and inclusive of singular (-o'n).
For example, with the word polche’,
'carpenter', we have: polche’en, 'I am
a carpenter'; polche’ech,
'you are a carpenter'. For the 3rd. persons, form 1(a) applies if we
take into account that the 3rd. pers. sing. pron. of Class B is a null
sign (2.5): leetie’,
polche’, 'he is a carpenter'. Form 1(a) is
used also for 1st. and 2nd. pers. in certain contexts: ten,
polche’en,
'(as for myself), I am a carpenter'. In a few instances, -PB has been
affixed to the noun component of a phrase consisting of a pronoun of
Class A and a noun. That is to say, instead of PC, N-PB, we have found
PC, PHR-PB, but only when the construction of PHR is PA N. In
those cases PA is equivalent to an English possessive pronoun;
e.g., ten, u taataen, 'I am his father'.
tech, in wichamech, 'You are my
husband'. In the instances conforming to form 3(a), that is, PHR¹, PC, PHR², the reference made by
PC may be said to be a repetition of that made by PHR¹,
and what is asserted is that PHR¹ is(&)PHR². For example: le kan
takinsahe’, leeti’,
u yalak', 'The snake you killed was his pet (The snake you
killed, that one, his pet)'.
When the NP-constructions are used in negations, the negative sign
ma(’)
appears sometimes before the first of the two main units composing the
sentence, and sometimes between the first and the second. Roughly, it
is like saying 'It is not x
that is y', or 'x is not y'. The use of ma(’)
with one or the other of the components depends mainly on what is the
dominant topic (4.8). In conformity with what is
said in 4.59, the
suffix -i(’) is required in many of the negations with
the NP-constructions. The NP-constructions most commonly found with the
negative ma(’) and the suffix -i(’)
are:
Miscellaneous examples:
The Old Yucatec numerical system is at present obsolete expect for
the first four or five numbers. Still in current use are the numerals
hun (in some localities un),
kaa, ox, kan, 'one,
.., four'. ho’,
'five', is known to many, but it cannot be said to be a word of their
ordinary vocabulary. The old folk of some localities remember the Old
Yucatec numerals to 20, hun k'al, and know how to proceed
combining the first 19 numerals with the vigesimal unit
k'al; but upon reaching 20 times 20, few seem to remember
the second vigesimal unit, hun bak', '400'. All this,
however, is old lore to them, and not the ordinary way of counting.
The first four or five numerals that are still in current use, are
always followed, as in Old Yucatec, by the words we term here numerical classifiers.
These words designate various kinds of units is a special
classificatory system which is in evidence only when the Yucatec
numerals are employed. The use of the numerical classifiers is
comparable to that of the English word 'head', such as in 'a hundred
head of sheep'. The
total number of numerical classifiers is not known. Despite the long
lists in Beltrán's grammar, and in other books, one can find even
at
present some which no author, so far as we know, has mentioned. Some
seem to be used only in certain communities. The two which have the
broadest application are tul, for animate referents,
and p'el, for any inanimate item for which there is no
special numerical classifier in the speaker's own vocabulary.
p'el
is used also when counting without mentioning what is counted. There
are individual and local differences with respect to the kinds of
objects to which some numerical classifiers are applicable. Thus,
ts'it
is generally used for counting ears of corn, bananas, candles, short
pieces of bamboo, and other objects similar in form and size to some of
these. In some communities it is applied to shot-guns; saying, for
example, hun ts'it ts'on, 'one gun', whereas in
others the general inanimate p'el is used for a single gun,
at least when the number of guns is not the topic in question; but for
more than one gun ts'it is commonly employed.
kul
is generally applicable to bushes and corn-stalks. In some communities
it is also applicable to hair, but not in others. The numerical
classifiers are not used before words which vaguely or otherwise
designate quantity or plurality; as kuch, 'load',
much', 'heap', 'group'; luch, 'gourd',
when referring to as much as a gourd of the kind called
luch can contain; p'it, 'a little (of
liquid)'; wuts', 'measure of pozol usually carried when traveling';
puk', the quantity of pozol usually served in a gourd. Nor are they used in
any case after the adopted Spanish numerals.
As a rule, the plural suffix -o'b is not used when
the noun is preceded by a Yucatec numeral and the classifier; e.g.,
hun tul pek', 'one dog', 'a dog'; ox tul
pek',
'three dogs'. But many exceptions to this rule are found in the
discourse of individuals whose speech is predominantly of Type B,
particularly if they are bilingual. When the adopted Spanish numerals
are employed, the use and omission of the plural suffix are subject
either to extremely complex rules, or to none at all, so far as we have
been able to disclose. For 'ten men', for example, one finds dyes
winik, dyes winiko'b, and even
dyes ombreso'b, adopting in the last
phrase the Spanish plural hombres, and adding to it the Yucatec plural
-o'b.
As already stated (4.6), the device of repeating the first two sounds of a stem (reduplication), and that of repeating the whole stem (duplication) serve the same usage. Letting 'C' stand for a consonant, and 'V' for a vowel, the rules governing the two devices can be indicated as follows:
Reduplication | ||
Case 1. | When C2 is not m or n | |
Stem | Reduplication | |
C1VC2 | C1V-C1VC2 | |
Duplication | ||
Case 2. | When C2 is m or n | |
Stem | Duplication | |
C1VC2 | C1VC2-C1VC2 | |
Case 3. | C is any consonant | |
Stem | Duplication | |
CV | CV-CV | |
VC | (No instance observed) |
Case 4. Diphtongs: the first vowel is repeated; e.g.,
Cay; CaCay.
Due to the greater number of stems of the form CVC, reduplication
occurs much more frequently than duplication. There are a few
exceptions to the formulation under Cases 1. and 2. The following have
been observed: hun, 'one'; hunun, 'one
by one', 'each one'. han, 'in a hurry' (4.50); hanan, 'in a great hurry',
'recklessly', etc. man, 'pass';
mamansah, 'pass repeatedly' (transitive).
mum, 'not ripe', 'tender';
mumumkintah, 'make very tender'.
Examples of instances supporting the formulation under Case
2:chinchin, 'inclined', 'not vertical',
not firmly set'. chinchinpol or
chunchunpol, 'upside down', 'standing on
head'. ch'amch'am(-ah), 'to dent hollow
objects', (like Spanish abollar);
ch'enchenki, 'solitary',
'in silence'. ch'inch'in(-ah), 'throw
repeatedly'. henhen(-ah), 'crack or split in several
parts'. homhom(-ah), 'submerge repeatedly'.
lamlam(-t-al) or
lamlamts'a(-h), 'sink repeatedly in mud'.
tantanbuh, 'a half to each'.
tumtumolal, 'caution'.
Reduplication and duplication occur in verbal constructions and in a
few expressions derived from them and constructed at least in part like
verbal units. The two procedures are employed chiefly to signify a more
or less rapid repetition. With some stems it signifies distribution;
e.g., ku xoxolkintiko'b,
'they kneel down here and there' (not at once, and each wherever he may
be standing during the ceremony). With a few stems it stands for a
considerable magnitude, but not excessive; e.g.,
nanaach, 'rather far'; naach,
'far'. ts'ets'ek,
'quite a few'. From special inquiries and tests, we infer that the old
use of reduplication as a sort of diminutive is at present obsolete in
the localities we visited. Miscellaneous examples of reduplication will
be found in 4.63.
Depending on the sentence of which it is a component, the word
wa
is equivalent to 'if', 'whether', or 'or', aside from what it may
signify in interrogative sentences. In exclamatory sentences having the
construction of interrogative sentences, wa has a sense
similar to 'really?'. Its use in the protases of conditional sentences
has been shown in 4.11, 4.35,
and 4.44. With the sense of 'whether' it
is found mainly in reported disjunctive interrogative sentences (4.31)
subordinate to k'at, 'to ask'; e.g., tu k'atah
tie’ wa ts'ook u tasik, 'He asked him
whether he had brought it'. xen a k'at tie’ wa
ts'ooku tasik, 'Go and ask him whether he has
brought it'. Indicating alternative possibilities or any other sort of
disjunction, wa can occur between any two components of a
sentence with the sense of 'or'; e.g., ku ts'aabal
tio'b hun tul ulum wa hun tul kax, 'They
are given a turkey or a chicken' (customarily).
In disjunctive interrogative sentences (4.31),
wa occurs immediately after the first assertive word of the
sentence, except in interrogations beginning with the negative sign
ma(’). About 40% of the disjunctive interrogative
sentences in our texts contained wa. The difference in
sense between those which contained wa
and those which did not is difficult to disclose in most cases. The
explanations offered by bilingual informants are to the effect when one
doubts that the person addressed can answer the question,
wa is used. This explanation holds for some of the contexts
in which wa
was used, but it certainly does not hold for many others. It seems to
account for the frequent occurrence of wa when the question is
introduced by the phrase a woohel wa ..?, which
at least
in some cases could signify 'Do you know perchance...?'. But it has
occurred also in instances in which an interrogative sentence
(interrogative in construction) is a persuasive request; e.g.,
maa tan wa a ts'ayk ten?,
'Aren't you going to give it to me?' and in the sort of interrogative
constructions known as rhetorical questions, as a variant of which we
may regard those which serve to express gladness or surprise, as in
this case: One who has been pursuing an enemy brings the welcome
news, ts'ookin chukik, 'I have just
caught him'. His interlocutor reacts by repeating the component
ts'ook (4.15) followed by
wa; viz.: ts'ook wa?, 'You have?',
'Really?', or some other utterance of the sort with an intonation
suitable to the context.
The suffix -tsil is a component of a number of
words used either as Yucatec nouns, or as Yucatec intransitive verbs of
the sort that are equivalent to English adjectives or to English verbal
units consisting of a form of the verb 'to be' followed by an adjective;
viz.: 'a tall man', 'a man who
is tall', 'that man is tall'. Many Yucatec nouns
containing -tsil stand for persons and other referents
respectfully evaluated; e.g., ts'ayatsil,
'mercy', 'charity', 'grace'; ts'a
('give')-ya ('bounteous',
'repeated')-tsil; as in the obsolescent ritualistic
reference to maize: u ts'ayatsil hahal
dyos, 'the merciful gift of the true God'.
kolel, 'lady';
koleltsil, 'highly respected lady';
yumtsil, 'respected gentleman'. Such evaluation,
however, is absent, or not evident, in quite as many words that contain
the suffix -tsil; e.g.,
ki’o(l)tsil,
'merry';ki’o(l)tsilil,
'merriment'; o(l)tsil, 'poor', (worthy of
sympathy, or destitute); o(l)tsilil,
'poverty'; hak'o(l)tsil, 'frightful'. The
preceding words contain the stem ol, 'mind', 'sentiment',
etc., whose consonant l is generally omitted in those
compounds. Other compounds with ol take -al
instead of -tsil; e.g.,
ki’makolal, 'happiness'.
Excepting terms denoting kinship and marital relationship, it is not
feasible to specify what kinds of nouns require the suffix
-tsil. It is true that all the words that contain
-tsil
stand for items which can be said to be "abstract" in some sense or
other of this vague term. But quite as many "abstract" items are
referred to by words which do not contain this suffix. With terms of
kinship and marital relationship, however, this rule is observed: Every
one of these terms requires the suffix -tsil when it is
not preceded by a pronoun of Class A specifying whose relative is spoken
of. Thus, u taata, 'his father'; le
taatatsilo’, 'the father', 'that
father'. u yicham, 'her husband'; le
ichantsilo’, 'the husband'. tu
lakal lak'tsilo'b, 'all relatives';
hun tul lak'tsil, 'a relative', 'someone's
relative'.
To the earliest investigators the words Maya and Yucateco
were
synonymous. In fact, it is probable that at least in the eighteenth
century the language was more commonly referred to by the Spaniards
as Yucateco than as Maya. Beltrán entitles his
grammar Arte del Idioma Maya y
semiléxicon Yucateco. Nevertheless, four of the
dignitaries of the church refer to his work in the official approval
contained therein as Arte del Idioma
Yucateco, while
one of them, Fr. Felipe Santiago Maria de la Madera, evidently
specifies what the less common term designates when he writes,"...
siendo Maestro de la lengua Maya, que es el Idioma Yucateco."
Beltrán
himself, notwithstanding the title of his book, begins the introduction
(Prólogo al lector) with these words: "Es el Yucateco Idioma
garboso en
sus dicciones, ..." Another book of his is entitled Declaración de la Doctrina
Christiana en el Idioma Yucateco. In the seventeenth century,
Juan de Acevedo is said to be the author of Principios elementales de la gramatica Yucateca.
Earlier, perhaps, Francisco de Torralva writes sermons en lengua Maya ó Yucateca, and
Villalpando, the earliest writer on the language, so far as the records
show, wrote in the sixteenth century on Doctrina Christiana en idioma Yucateco o Maya. Those
two ways of referring to the language are found in Spanish writings
throughout the three centuries preceding the twentieth, and also
thereafter, though less frequently.
The circumstances which
brought about the use of those two names are not known. We do not know
whether the natives themselves referred to their language by more than
one name. To call the "same language" by different names in different
localities where it is spoken is by no means a rare circumstance among
illiterate peoples. In fact, within the Maya area it is the most
prevalent practice at present. For example, our Tzeltal informants in
the Bachajon region knew that their speech differed only slightly from
that of Ocosingo. But they claimed that the name 'Tzeltal' applied to
the latter, and not to their own vernacular. A name that would apply to
both vernaculars was not known, nor did they have any need of it.
Instances of that sort are common in Guatemala. In pre-Columbian times,
the Quiche-speaking peoples may have been aware of constituting at
least a political unit, regardless of the differences between local
vernaculars, which may have existed then, as they exist now, not only
there, but almost everywhere else on earth. At present, however, if
individuals from different localities within the Quiche region say that
they all speak Quiche, it would be by no means a common occurrence, and
it would be very probably due to information obtained directly or
indirectly from someone who has read about it. Some of our Quiche
informants in Chichecastenango thought that their language was called
Cakquichel, perhaps in view of the fact that the Whites referred to
several other Indian vernaculars by that name. All this is quite
natural, for the grouping of different local vernaculars under the name
of "one language" is generally the work of individuals devoted
professionally or otherwise to historical studies.
It is true that such conditions do not exist at present in the
Yucatec area, but we lack unequivocal information as to what was the
case when the Spaniards came to Yucatan. In the chronicles of Ah Naum
Pech edited by Martinez Hernandez (Cronicas Mayas, Merida, 1926, p.25), the country is
called yucal peten, and the
people maya uinic. The language
is known to have been called maya
than, as at present. In these phrases, the word peten means 'country' or 'region',
and than, pronounced
t'an at present, signifies, 'speech' in this context. But
so far as the present writer knows, the combination yucal than, which
would conform to the rules of Yucatec morphology and syntax, is not
found in the extant literature. Had it occurred, it would have seemed
plausible to conjecture that Yucatan is a Spanish corruption of yucal than,
allowing, of course, for the possibility that the first Spaniards who
inquired what the country was called mistook the name of the language,
or one of the names of the language, for the name of the country. In
the chronicle referred to, it is explicitly stated that Yucatan was the name given by the
Spaniards to the region (peten)
known to them as yucal
peten. The word yucal is
evidently an adjectival form of the word yuc,
the name of a species of deer which abound in Yucatan. The epithet "the
land of the deer and the turkey", whatever its origin, is familiar in
references to Yucatan.
An extensive bibliography and much valuable information concerning books and manuscripts about Yucatec, or written in Yucatec, will be found in Alfred M. Tozzer's A Maya Grammar, Papers of the Peabody Museum, Vol. IX, 1921. Since the publication of Tozzer's book, an edition of the Motul dictionary by Juan Martinez Hernandez, Merida, Yucatan, 1929, and William Gates' A Grammar of Maya, Baltimore, 1938, have appeared. All the works and authors mentioned in the Introduction and in the Notes there referred to are listed in Tozzer's bibliography.
The chief source of information on the sounds of Old Yucatec is,
of course, what the writers of the sixteenth and seventeenth centuries
tell us about them. A knowledge of Modern Yucatec pronunciation is of
but minor service in this inquiry. That may not be clear to those who
have been misguided by the circumstance that the alphabet which the
Spaniards devised to write Old Yucatec serves fairly well to write
Modern Yucatec. This circumstance may indicate that so far as the
number of sounds is concerned Yucatec has not changed much, but nothing
can be reliably inferred from it as to what each sound was like. The
fact that a word was written in previous times exactly as we
would write it now does not necessarily imply that it was pronounced
then as we pronounce it now. This is too obvious to require
further comment. We offer the following illustration of this point
mainly because of its bearing on subsequent remarks. In the sixteenth
century the Spanish word for 'son', hijo,
was written exactly as at present, but it is rather unlikely that a
Spaniard of this day would understand it if he heard it pronounced as
during the first half of that century. While the spelling has remained
unaltered, the sound of the initial consonant has dropped out, and the
sound for which j stood has
undergone a series of rather divergent changes. The h in the word hijo represented, at least according
to one writer, some sort of "guttural" sound, and the j stood for some sound similar to
that denoted by English j as in
John.
Incidentally, it is pertinent to note that those changes, and a few
others which are by no means of the sort that requires a trained ear to
notice the differences, occurred in less time than that during which
the Yucatec sounds are assumed by some writers to have remained
practically unaltered.
It is well known that the Spanish
pronunciation has changed considerably since the time when the
Spaniards began to use some letters of their alphabet to represent
Yucatec sounds. This, however, does not seem to have been taken into
account by some who wonder why the early writers employed for this
purpose certain letters rather than others. For example, in a note to
the second edition of Beltrán's grammar (p.2), the editor says,
"No sé
que fundamento tuvieron los que formaron el alfabeto de la lengua Maya
para darle á la h el
sonido de j, cuando pudieron
usar de la misma j y suprimir
la h." That writer obviously
assumes that h was
always a silent letter in Spanish orthography. Laboring under the same
erroneous impression, Pio Perez concludes that the difference between
Old Yucatec hula, 'guest', and
Modern Yucatec ula
is solely orthographic. In his comment on these words under "J" in his
dictionary, we read, "Los primeros ortógrafos del idioma cuando
aun
vacilaban sobre el uso de la h,
escribían hula,
por el huésped, hulul
ó hulel por estar
presente ó llegado por ulul ó ulel que se pronuncian suaves: esto prueba que la h no
tenía el sonido fuerte que después le atribuyeron." In
view of such
confusions, it has seemed justifiable to deal with the whole matter as
much in detail as has been done in this note. The set of characters and
combinations of characters referred to in these paragraphs as the Old Yucatec alphabet is as
follows:
a | b | c | ç | tz | ɔ | ch | cħ | e | h | y | i |
k | l | m | n | o | p | pp | t | th | v (u) | x |
It is certain that this alphabet was in use in 1567, for February, 1567 is the date on five of the letters addressed to Philipp II in Yucatec by several Yucatec chieftains, the original manuscripts of which are kept in the Archivo General de Indias in Seville. Examining the photographic copies, we find that all the characters listed above, and no others, have been used. Furthermore, their uses conform to the orthography of the manuscript of the Motul dictionary. We need not consider whether the Old Yucatec alphabet was devised by Villalpando, who, according to various accounts, wrote the first Yucatec grammar and a dictionary, or by Landa, or by some other member or members of the Franciscan mission. It is sufficient to know that the one or ones who used letters of the Spanish orthography to write Yucatec were Spaniards who had learned to write their own language in the second or third quarter of the sixteenth century. Hence, that is the period in the history of Spanish sounds and orthography with which we shall be chiefly concerned later.
We find the Old Yucatec alphabet used without alterations in
Coronel's grammar (1620) and in San Buenaventura's grammar (1684).
Beltrán suggests in his grammar (1746) that the character z should replace ç in
Yucatec orthography in order to prevent certain errors resulting from a
careless omission of the mark that distinguishes ç from c.
It is possible that he did not follow his own suggestion in his
grammar, but we cannot be certain. The only edition known to the
present writer is the second. There we find that the letter z
is used throughout the text, but not in the chapter dealing with the
sounds. One suspects that the notorious practice of modernizing old
writings upon editing them, or quoting from them, may have led the
editor to substitute z for
ç except when the substitution
would have rendered Beltrán's statements nonsensical.
The sounds of Old Yucatec may have changed by the time Beltrán
wrote,
but that is not necessary implied by the orthographic reform he
proposes. His, as well as later proposals to reform the Yucatec
orthography, evidently reflect the changes which had occurred in
Spanish. Thus, when Beltrán wrote, the Spanish Academy has
already
decided to exclude the letter ç
from Spanish orthography. In their first dictionary, usually
referred to as Diccionario de
Autoridades (1726), their decision reads in part as follows: "...
porque haviéndose inventado la ç unicamente para suplir el defecto de la
combinación del Ce, Ci
en las tres vocales a, o, u,
à fin de pronunciar ça, ço, çu en lugar de Ca, Co, Cu: lográndose esto
mismo, y con la misma igualdad y blandura el dia de oy con la z, realmente se puede reputar por
supérflua la ç" (p.
LXXIII). By that time the distinction between the old Spanish sounds of
ç and z
was no longer observed, and, as many books and manuscripts amply show,
few Spaniards could use those two letters consistently. By the first
half of the nineteenth century, writers on Yucatec make no use of the
character ç. Similarly, the use
of u in Yucatec orthography
where the old writers used v
ceased
at approximately the time that a corresponding reform was introduced in
the Spanish orthography. We repeat that the orthographic changes which
have been made since the Old Yucatec alphabet was devised do not
necessarily indicate that the sounds of the language changed. Whether
they changed or not is to be inferred from other observations.
It
may facilitate further discussions if we indicate at this point what
phonetic values are ascribed to the characters of the Old Yucatec
alphabet by those who have assumed explicitly or otherwise that the
sounds of Yucatec have undergone no change since that alphabet was
devised. In the following tabulation, the consonants are grouped, not
according to any phonetic order, but in a way which may facilitate
their discussion. The phonetic value ascribed to each character of the
Old Yucatec alphabet is indicated by the IPA notation (notation of the
International Phonetic Association) written under it, each IPA notation
having the specific value described in Part 1.
CONSONANTS
Group 1 | |||||||||
OY alphabet | b | c | ch | y | l | m | n | p | t |
Phon. value | b | k | ʧ | j | l | m | n | p | t |
Group 2 | |||||
OY alphabet | ç | tz | h | v (u) | x |
Phon. value | s | ʦ | h | w | ʃ |
Group 3 | |||||
OY alphabet | ɔ | cħ | k | pp | th |
Phon. value | ʦ' | ʧ' | k' | p' | t' |
VOWELS
OY alphabet | a | e | i | o | u (v) |
Phon. value | a | e | i | o | u |
It is probable that the phonetic values of the characters of Group 1 were approximately as indicated above. The argument in support of this probability is as follows. Various writers inform us that in the combinations ce, ci the letter c was to be pronounced as in ca, co, cu. In the Motul dictionary it is explained that y was used as a consonant, and stood for the sound heard in the Spanish words ya, yerno, yo, yunque, yugo. The fact that nothing is said about the rest of the characters of Group 1 seems to imply that they were to be pronounced more or less as in the Spanish of that time. If that is true, the Yucatec sounds for which those nine characters stood may have been similar to nine sounds in present-day Spanish. For the latter are assumed by all authorities on Spanish philology to be similar to nine sounds represented by those letters in the Spanish of the sixteenth century. In support of all this we find that the nine sounds of Modern Yucatec traditionally represented by those characters are similar to nine sounds of modern Spanish represented by those letters. Roughly outlined, the argument amounts to this: If A and B were similar at one time, and if neither A nor Bchanged much, then A and B must be similar now. And we do find that they are similar. This, of course, tells us nothing about the degree of similarity. Granting that the evidence is conclusive with respect to the preservation of the nine Spanish sounds in question, the possibility that the Yucatec sounds differed more from the them than they do now is not excluded. For the present similarity is compatible with this argument: A and Bdiffered at one time; A has not changed, but B has so changed that it is now quite similar to A. Against this it can be said that, if the difference was considerable, it is improbable that in as many as nine instances the sounds of the two languages changed, let us say, in the same direction. Of assimilation of the Yucatec sounds to those of Spanish there is no evidence at present. The assimilation observed is rather the converse; for, so far as the writer is aware, the Spanish pronunciation that resembles most closely that of Modern Yucatec is that which is prevalent in Yucatan. The argument receives some support also from the fact that the nine sounds in question occur in those languages of the Maya family which seem to be most closely related to Yucatec, as well as in some which seem to be less closely related, as Mam and Huastec. This, however, does not mean much until it can be shown that those sounds correspond etymologically among the various languages of the Maya family in which they occur. In conclusion it should be noted that the above form of argument is applicable only to the consonants of Group 1, and to the vowels used singly or in diphthongs, but it is not applicable to the double vowels. It does not apply to the other characters because some of the them were not characters of the Spanish orthography; others were used in the sixteenth century otherwise than in modern Spanish; one of them, ç, is no longer a character of Spanish orthography; and the sound it represented at the time the Old Yucatec alphabet was devised no longer occurs in Spanish.
Let us consider now the characters of Group 2. The phonetic value of ç in the Old Yucatec alphabeth has been supposed to be like the s-sound one hears now in Modern Yucatec and in the Spanish spoken in most parts of Spanish America. There are reasons for concluding that this supposition rests on erroneous premises. It has been supposed that çand z always stood for the same sound in Spanish. The z of modern Spanish orthography is now pronounced like s in Spanish America and in some parts of Spain. It has been supposed that it was so pronounced also in those parts of Spain, particularly in Andalusia, at the time the Spaniards invented the Old Yucatec alphabet. It has been noticed that the character ç stands for an s-sound in French, which, of course, is quite irrelevant. And it is observed that Modern Yucatec has an s-sound where Old Yucatec written words have ç, which by itself proves nothing at all. But, contrary to some of these suppositions, it can be shown (1) that ç and z did not stand for the same sound in the Spanish orthography of the period that concerns us; (2) that it is probable that ç and z came to be pronounced like s in Andalusia about the time that the phonetic distinction between ç and z began to disappear in Castile; (3) that there is no reason to assume that the one or ones who devised the Old Yucatec alphabet were Andalusian. Full credit for the invention of the Old Yucatec alphabet has been given to Villalpando, who was Castilian. Landa tells us that Villalpando began to learn the language by means of gestures and other devices, and ended by writing a grammar. Landa could possibly have had something to do with the invention of this alphabet, and he, also, was Castilian. There is no disagreement as to the birthplace of these individuals, and the authoritative Espasa encyclopedia expresses no doubt upon this point.
To offer some evidence in support of our statements concerning the old Spanish pronounciation of çand z, as well as to prepare the ground for further remarks on the Yucatec sound in question, we will quote a few statements from the following works: Nebrija's Grammatica Castellana (1492), E. Walberg's edition (Reproduction phototypique de l'édition princeps, Halle, 1909.); and R. J. Cuervo, "Disquisiciones sobre antigua ortografía y pronunciación castellanas," Revue Hispanique, March 1895. In that thorough inquiry into the sounds of old Spanish, Cuervo quotes from numerous sources. We transcribe here a few of his quotations from works pertaining to the particular period that concerns us.
I. Statements indicating that the Spanish sound for which ç stood at the various times specifeid was neither an s nor the theta-sound of modern Castilian.
1. In 1492
Nebrija says that the Spanish ç-sound
occurred neither in Latin nor in Greek. He spent ten years in Italy
studying these languages. He wrote about the Hebrew language in Latin.
That he knew how the Greek theta was pronounced is shown by his description of its
articulation in Chapter IV of his grammar. Concerning the Spanish sound
of ç he
writes as follows: "La c tiene tres oficios: uno propio, cuando despues
della se siguen a, o, u, como en las primeras letras destas diciones:
cabra, coraçon, cuero. Tiene tambien dos oficios prestados: uno, cuando
debaxo della acostumbramos poner una seńal, que llaman cerilla, como en
las primeras letras destas diciones: çarça, çevada; la cual
pronunciacion es propia de judios e moros, de los cuales, cuanto io
pienso, las recibio nuestra lengua, porque ni los griegos ni latinos
que bien pronuncian, ni sienten ni conocen por suia."
2. In 1560, M.G. Mario Alessandri d'Urbino equates the Spanish ç with the ʦ-sound of Italian z. "Si pronuntia come la nostra z quando ha gagliardo spiritu, onde la forza che ha la nostra z in questi voci ... confidenza, scherzo, zuccaro ... si possede dalla ç Castigliana in ... çaragoça, caça, oluidança ... et altri simili." (Il paragone della lingua Toscana et Castigliana. Zeitschrift für rom. Phil., XI, 419).
3. Twenty-two years later, Juan Lopez de Velasco indicates that at least to him the Italian z was not an acceptable substitute for the Spanish ç. "El sonido y voz que la ç con cedilla haze, es el propio que la de su nombre, que se forma con la estremidad anterior de la lengua, casi mordida de los dientes, no apretados, sino de manera que pueda salir algun aliento y espiritu: como en lo alto del paladar se forma la s, de donde nace la dificultad que los estrangeros sienten en pronunciar la ç cedilla, diziendo siempre se por ce, y assi no hay en el Latin, Griego, Italiano ni otras lenguas vulgares, con que poder escreuir los nombres de personas, linages y otros que en el Castellano tienen ça, ço, çu, cuyo espiritu en el pronunciar a de ser blando y lleno, porque si se esfuerça, y adelgaçandose sale con algun zumbido o siluo: conuiertese en la voz y sonido de la z, que se forma arrimada a los dientes, pero no metida entre ellos." (Ortographia y Pronunciacion Castellana, Burgos, 1582).
4. In 1623, John Minsheu implies that the sound of Spanish ç was similar to, but not quite like,
that of English th. "Ç is sounded by putting the tongue to
the rankes of the teeth, as the french ç Viença, or
very near: the italian z, as
diligenza, scienza. This ç must be so pronounced, whether it
be at the beginning, end or middle of a word, though a, o, u follow,
and is sounded as in English ths, as çaraguelles ... çoçobra ...
çufre: pronounce thsaraguelles, thsothsobra, ..."
(A Spanish Grammar, London,
1623). Authorities on the history of English sounds do not doubt that
English th as in 'thin' has
always been articulated as at present.
II. Statements which show that ç and z were not equivalent.
1. According to Cuervo, in Nebrija's De literis hebraicis, ç is used to transcribe the Hebrew letters samekh and tsadi, while z is used for zayin.
2. In addition to what was quoted above under I.3., Lopez de Velasco proceeds to describe the difference between ç and z as follows: "...arrimada la parte anterior de la lengua a los dientes, no tan pegada como para la ç, sino de manera que quede passo para algun aliento o espiritu, que adelgaçado o con fuerça salga con alguna manera de zumbido, que es lo que difficiere de la ç."
3. From various statements and observations, Cuervo draws this conclusion: "De estas explicaciones, aunque contradictorias algunas en la expresión, resulta que la ç se pronuncia con toda su fuerza y que en su duración equivale a media z; que ésta va acompańada de un zumbido o ruido que hace cosquillas, saliendo el aire con más suavidad y dulzura que en la otra, mas blanda y amorosamente, como si fuese una ç blanda y comedida. Difícilmente pudieran caracterizarse mejor una plosiva y una fricativa en tiempos en que no había fonética; me parece claro tambíen que la fricativa debía ser sonora, circunstancia que cuadra mejor con su predominio en medio de dos vocales y al fin de palabra."
III. Statements concerning the disapearance of the distincion between ç and z.
1.In the first quarter of the seventeenth century, the distinction is observed by some, but not by all. Miguel Sebastian says, "La consonante zeta componen vnos de las t y s, los mas de las d y s; pronunciase en el mesmo lugar que la ç algo mas blando, y como en las palabras siguinentes zaino, zenon, zimara, zorro, zagal. Parientes muy cercanas son la ç y la z, tanto maior cuidado deve haver de no poner vna por otra. Como los que escriuen Zaragoça por Çaragoça, Zarça por Çarça." (Ortographia y Orthologia, Zaragoza, 1619). 2. By 1651, the phonetic distinction is entirely gone, or little is left of it. For this reason Spanish writers could no longer depend on their own pronunciation to decide when they should write ç or z. Juan de Villar clearly reflects the chaotic condition of the orthography of his time with respect to those two letters: "Pues como toda la dificultad nazca de la poca, o ninguna diferencia que ay en la pronunciacion, quando se escrive con la una, o con la otra, esso mesmo da licencia para escrivir con lo que mas presto a la memoria venga: y a lo sumo solamente seńalara yo a el uso de la z el principio de las diciones zelo y sus derivados zelar, zeloso, y en el medio quando se escriben plurales de nombres que el singular le tuvieron por final, como Cruz, cruzes, luz, luzes, voz, vozes, y tambien quando se halla entre dos vocales, como dezir, hazer, induzir, etc., esto es inteligible, y como tal puede guardarse, lo demas es adivinar." (Arte de la lengua espańola, reducida a reglas y preceptos de rigurosa gramatica, Valencia, 1651).
IV. Statements showing (a) that it is unjustifiable to assume that at the time the Old Yucatec alphabet was devised the speech of Andalusia differed from that of Castile with regard to the pronunciation of ç and z; and (b) that in Andalusia the Castilian sounds of ç, z, and s converged into the Andalusian s.
1. As late as 1589 the older generation in Seville preserved the Castilian pronunciation. Cuervo comments as follows on a quotation from Arias Montano's De varia Republica, siue Commentaria in librum Judicum, Antwerp, 1592: "Benito Arias Montano, el célebre director de la Políglota de Amberes, conocida con el nombre de Biblia Regia, nos refiere en su comentario sobre el libro de los Jueces que, siendo él nińo, se pronunciaba todavía en Andalusía, y sobre todo en Sevilla, exactamente lo mismo que en Toledo y Castillia la Vieja, y que a la vuelta de unos veinte ańos se trocó de tal manera la pronunciación que apenas se distinguía un sevillano de un valenciano, tan completamente confundía la z y la ç con la s. Sabido es que los valencianos, sin duda por efecto de su parentesco con los catalanes y provenzales, jamás han acertado a distinguir exactamente dichas letras. Ahora bien, habiendo nacido Arias Montano por los ańos de 1527, puede suponerse que todavía en 1540 subsistía la antigua pronunciación, la cual conservaban los viejos cuando él escribía, que era como en 1589."
2. In 1609, the famous author of Guzman de Alfarache, the Andalusian Mateo Aleman, comments at length on the confusion concerning the use of the letters ç, z, s, and shows not only by what he says, but by the words he writes incorrectly in his critisism, that in his pronunciation there was no distinction between the sounds of ç and z, nor between either of them and s: "... pues poniendo una letra por otra, no solo se trueca el sonido, mas aun se altera el sentido diziendo à la braza [sic] braça, ò al contrario; la braza es la que llamamos ascua, que se haze de la lumbre; y la braça es una medida de dos varas, que se mide con los braços abiertos. Caça, es de aves ò animales de la tierra; i casa, la en que vivimos. Consejo, el que se da ò se recibe; i consejo[sic!], la junta de rejidores de algun pueblo." (Ortographía castellana, Mexico, 1609).
We take no account of any Spanish dialectal pronunciation other than that of Andalusia, because there is no reason to suspect that any other is relevant to this discussion. At least one writer on Yucatec has supposed that the Spaniards used the letter x for a ʃ-sound in several American Indian languages because, according to him, the Spaniards who settled in America or came as missionaries or soldiers were mainly from nothern Spain. I find no evidence in support of this assertion. Moreover, it has no bearing on the particular question that concerns us, because in the Spanish dialects of the north the s and the θ-sound are distinguished exactly as in Castile. In fact, such is the case even in Galician, except near the Portuguese border.
Before considering in the light of the preceding quotations what may
have been the Yucatec sound represented by the character ç, something should be said about the
Castilian s. For this question
readily suggests itself: Why did the Spaniards not use the letter s in writing several American Indian
languages which now have s-sounds?
It would be a most rare coincidence if even in geographically separate
ans historically unrelated languages an s-sound had developed
independently in each language since the Spaniards wrote about them.
The s-sound one hears now in at least 15 aboriginal languages of Mexico
and Central America, as well as in the Spanish spoken there, is the
common sort of s, such as occurs in the English word 'six', and in
other European languages. For convenience of reference, let us call it
'Common s'. One need not be a phonetician to hear the difference
between the Common s and the present Castilian s. A technical
description of the modern Castilian s, comparing it with the Common s
of other European languages, is given by Thomas Navarro Tomas in his
Manual de pronunciación
espańola, second edition, Madrid, 1921, pp.83-87. About its
distribution in Spain Ramon Menendez Pidal says: "La s castellana
es cóncava, ápico-alveolar; el ápice de la lengua,
vuelto hacia arriba,
forma una estrechez contra los alvéoles. Esta variedad de s
se extiende por todo el norte de Espańa (incluso por Galicia, norte de
Portugal, Provincias Vascongadas y Cataluńa). Al sur de la
Península
(incluyendo la mayor parte de Portugal) la s es
convexa, dorso-alveolar; puesto el ápice de la lengua en los
incisivos
inferiores, el predorso de la lengua forma una estrechez contra los
alvéolos y dientes superiores. Esta s, propria de Andalucía, y por lo tanto de
América, es una s
semejante a la francesa, italiana o alemana, más dental que la
castellana, la cual bien pudiera llamarse prepalatal, como hacen
algunos fonetistas." (Manual de
gramática histórica espańola, 4th edition, Madrid,
1918, p.87)
What we need to know, of course, is whether in the sixteenth century
there was at least as much difference between the Castilian s and the
Common s as there is now. Both Navarro Tomas and Menendez Pidal say
that those to whom the Castilian s is not familiar hear it at present
as some sort of ʃ. Castilians who have lived in Spanish America may
have observed that when their pronunciation is ridiculed, the natives
exaggerate by substituting ʃ for s. The same sort of substitution
seems
to have occurred in the Moorish pronunciation of Spanish previous to
the discovery of America. The Spaniards represented the Moorish
pronunciation of the Castilian s by the letter x,
which, as is well known, stood then for a Castilian ʃ-sound.
Menendez
Pidal speaks of this in the work quoted above, and gives this specimen:
"xean llevadox todox estox" (se han llevado todos estos). The Spaniards
brought cattle to America in the early colonial period, and several
Indian languages adopted the Spanish word vacas,
'cows', to refer indiscriminately to cattle, 'cows', or 'a cow'. With
the stress on the last syllable, as is the rule for the native words in
most of the Maya languages, this word is now pronounced
wakax (uacax,
in present Yucatec orthography). The word castellano,
'Castilian', may also have been learned by the Indians not long after
their first contacts with the Spaniards. This has become in
several of the aboriginal languages kaxlan, and the
name Tomás, 'Thomas',
has been reduced to max.
This reduction to one syllable is not a serious objection in
identifying the word; for the same thing has occurred in a number of
Christian names, as Pedro,
'Peter', which became pelu, and finally,
lu’,
at least in Quekchi. I know of no unequivocal description of the
Castilian s in the literature of the period that concerns us, but the
above remark (I.3) by Lopez de Velasco, "como en lo alto del paladar se
forma la s", does not seem to
refer to the articulation of a Common s. If it is accurate, it
indicates rather that the Castilian s differed more from the Common s
than it does now.
From the foregoing one may infer that the Castilian s was such that some peoples who had both Common s and ʃ-sounds in their languages classed it rather as a variant of the latter than of the former. But from this we cannot conclude that the difference between the two kinds of s-sounds was such that the Spaniards heard the Common s otherwise than as an s of some sort. At present it is rather unlikely that a Castilian would not class the Common s as a variant of his s. The reason, however, is likely to be that there is at present no other sound in his speech that strikes him as being akin to it. In the sixteenth century, and perhaps later, at least one phase of the articulation of Spanish ç may have had an acoustic effect which to the Castilian ear was closer to the Common s than to the Castilian s. Cuervo infers in the above passage (II.3) that the articulation of ç was plosive. It is possible that he does not use this term strictly in the sense in which phoneticians understand it at present. All the evidence he presents indicates rather that the articulation of ç was either affricate or fricative. Referring to the statements quoted above, we find that it is compared with a ʦ-sound in I.2. In I.3 we are told that the contact of the tongue with the teeth is not tight, so that the air be allowed to pass as in the articulation of s. In I.4 it is compared with the combination of the two English fricatives θ and s. In III.1 we are told that those who confused ç and z pronounced both as ts or as ds. These and other writers, although of different nationalities, agree in that at least the second phase of the articulation of ç was fricative, and that it was dental. And as a dental fricative one could class the most audible effect of the Common s, particularly the variety which is most prevalent now in the Maya languages. In twelve of those languages, the s is articulated with the upper and lower incisors in contact, or almost in contact, and the tip of the tongue next to the lower incisors near their edges.
These observations seem to account for those instances in which the Spaniards did not use the letter s in writing American Indian languages which had s-sounds. But, needless to say, this does not enable us to conclude with any degree of confidence that if a Spaniard of the sixteenth or seventeenth century used ç to write for the first time a given language, that language had an s-sound. Perhaps we should mention the fact that a single s written between two vowels stood in Spanish for a voiced sound similar to that of the English or French s in 'rose'. To represent the Castilian s between two vowels they wrote ss, as in assi, possession, necessidad, etc. We have not taken this into account in the preceding discussion of the letter s because it could hardly have been an obstacle for using this letter for the Common s-sound. If the voiced sound of s between two vowels offered any difficulty, the Spaniards could have used ss between two vowels, as they habitually did when their s-sound occurred in this position in Spanish words.
In view of the foregoing remarks on the history of the Spanish sounds and orthography, let us try to understand what some of the early writers said about the Yucatec sound in question. In his discussion of the hieroglyphs, Landa includes "S" among the sounds (letras) which did not occur on Yucatec. His statement would be nonsensical if in that context the word letras does not refer to sounds, as it did frequently at that time, and does even now when it is not used by a phonetician. On the basis of the above observations on the Castilian s and the Common s, Landa's statement may be interpreted as asserting that Yucatec had no s of the Castilian sort. But, of course, it does not follow that if it had no Castilian s, it had a Common s. The earliest statement on the phonetic value of ç as a character of the Old Yucatec alphabet, so far as the extant literature is concerned, is that made by San Buenaventura in his grammar (1684). He says, "La letra ç se pronuncia de la misma manera que la letra z, v.g. cambeç o cambez, enseńa tu." In interpreting this statement, two main possibilities may be considered. By that time, sundry writers were perhaps using ç and z to write Yucatec. San Buenaventura may explain to the reader that no phonetic difference was implied by the use of those two letters. If that is the case, his statement tells us nothing concerning the articulation of the Yucatec sound. The second main possibility is that his aim was to indicate what sort of sound the letter ç stood for in Yucatec writing. San Buenaventura was a Frenchman, but since he wrote in Spanish, and was supposed to write chiefly for the benefit of the Franciscan friars in Yucatan, it seems reasonable to proceed on the assumption that he tells the reader to pronounce ç in Yucatec as z was pronounced then in Spanish. How was z pronounced at that time? The evidence presented above (III.2) indicates that by 1651 either there was no difference between the sounds of ç and z, or the difference was so slight to the Spanish ear that the author of a grammar is in doubt as to whether there was any difference at all ("la poca o ninguna diferencia que ay en la pronunciacion"). That holds for the speech of Castile. It would have been senseless for San Buenaventura to tell the Andalusians to pronounce ç as they pronounced z; because by the year 1609 they evidently pronounced ç, z, and s without making any distinction between any two of them. This is shown above in IV.1, and particularly in IV.2. The Castilian pronunciation of z is, therefore, the one to be taken into account, even if San Buenaventura's aim was to tell the Andalusians and their descendants in America how the Yucatec ç was pronounced. The fact that he was a Frenchman would have led him to regard a Common s as a regular sort of s. Indeed, if Yucatec had a Common s at that time, as it has now, a Frenchman might have been more inclined to regard ç as the proper character to indicate the articulation of a Common s; for such was the phonetic value that ç had in his native language. But he evidently says that the Yucatec sound is to be pronounced "in the same manner" as z was pronounced then in Castilian; if that is not the case, he does not tell us anything about its pronunciation. There is no doubt that in Castile the old sounds of ç and z converged into the present θ-sound. Suppose that by the time San Buenaventura wrote the convergence had not quite produced the present θ-sound. Was the sound in this transitional phase more like that of the old ç or that of the old z? We could say that there is only a rather remote possibility that it was more like that of the old z. This may be inferred from III.1 and from the circumstance that the change was toward an interdental voiceless fricative, and all the evidence available indicates that by San Buenaventura's time the articulation of ç was both voiceless and interdental. It was already so about 1623, as evidenced by the fact that an Englishman used his th to indicate how at least one phase of it was articulated (I.4). From all the foregoing we conclude that it is doubtful that the Yucatec sound San Buenaventura speaks of was an s-sound.
This doubt increases rather than decreases when we consider what Beltrán says about the Yucatec sound for which the letter ç stood in the first half of the eighteenth century. In his grammar (1746), he takes special care to explain that Yucatec ç was to be pronounced, not with an s-sound, but as ç was pronounced in Castilian: "Asi mismo careciendo de s, usa por ella la ç con cedilla; pero no con sonido de s, sino como el castellano la pronuncia en estos vocablos: çiceron, çapato, çinco, çorra." We are aware of the fact that the word castellano is used now in Spanish America to refer, not exclusively to the speech of Castile, but to Spanish in general. We do not know whether it was so used in Beltrán's time, but if it was, what we said above in San Buenaventura's case applies with even more certainty in Beltrán's time. Beltrán's explanation is futile if it is addressed to readers who do not know how Castilian was pronounced. And if his word castellano does not refer to the speech of Castile, what he tells us is not that there was no Castilian s in Yucatec, but rather that there was no s at all. Being a native of Yucatan, Beltrán's ordinary pronunciation may not have been Castilian, but it does not follow that he knew nothing about Castilian pronunciation. He was educated by Spanish friars, and from them he got the knowledge of Latin he so frequently displays. His command of Spanish at the time he wrote may not have been as good as in previous years, but, as he himself says (p.46), it was simply a question of forgetting words during the time he had but little occasion to speak Spanish. As already shown, the Spanish Academy had by this time excluded the character ç from the standard orthography. Even before their decision, the z was used much more frequently than the ç when writers deviated from the previous uses of these letters. Beltrán's examples, çapato, çorra, and particularly çiceron and çinco, exhibit an orthography which was no longer sanctioned, and for other reasons was becoming, or had become, antiquated. Of course, since he spoke of ç and not of z, it is natural that he should take advantage of such orthography. But, whatever may be the case with regard to the orthography, those words were doubtless pronounced with a θ-sound at his time. Carlos de Tapia Zenteno wrote about the same time as Beltrán. In fact, the date of three of the official approvals (privilegios) in Beltrán's Yucatec grammar is 1743, and that in Tapia Zenteno's Huastec grammar is 1746. Huastec has now, and it doubtless had then, a θ-sound, for which Tapia Zenteno used the letter z. He explains that this z is to be pronounced exactly (con todo rigor) as in Spanish. His description of the articulation of the Huastec sound is quite unambiguous: "La z se pronuncia con todo rigor, con la lengua algo fuera de los dientes, pegada à ellos. Hallase en principio, medio, y fin de Vocablos, y en todos se pronuncia sin diferencia, como Zipac, Zamzul, Tuz, Iziz. Y en este (como en los demas) de darle à cada termino su propio sonido, pende el hablar perfectamente."
Let us now consider the hypothesis that the letter ç stood for a θ-sound in Old Yucatec, and let us see how this hypothesis agrees with the foregoing statements and observations. None of the assertions and implications that the sound in question was not s needs any special interpretation if we assume that it was a θ-sound. At the time the Old Yucatec alphabet was devised, there seems to have been no sound in Castilian as similar to θ as that of ç. The latter hardly differed more from θ than it differed from the Common s, according to what may be inferred from the above quotations. San Buenaventura's statement does not offer any difficulty if the sound he speaks of is θ. The tendency to write z instead of ç, rather than the converse, was already in evidence. At the end of the Motul dictionary, instructions are given to enable the reader to find the words he hears. For z the reader is directed to the portion of the dictionary where the words beginning with ç are entered. That seems to provide for instances in which a reader might assume that a θ-sound had been represented by z. In view of this, San Buenaventura's statement that ç was pronounced as z was would be helpful to those who more frequently used z to represent the Castilian θ-sound. Then, Beltrán's object in emphasizing the assertion that ç was not to be pronounced as s becomes clearer. The Andalusian and Spanish American pronunciation was doubtless known to him, and may have been his own. Those who so pronounced might ascribe an s-phonetic value to the ç in Yucatec written words. Beltrán warns them that it was pronounced as Castilian θ. From these agreements with the hypothesis, it seems justifiable to conclude that it is more probable that ç stood for a Yucatec θ-sound than that it stood for an s-sound.
If Yucatec had formerly a θ-sound, by the first half of the nineteenth century this sound had already changed to s. Pio Perez' proposal that the letter s be used instead of z definitely shows that the Yucatec sound was s in his time. About one century had elapsed since Beltrán wrote. One century is not too short a time for θ to change to s. According to the above account (IV.1) a more complex change occurred in Seville in less time. If ç stood for a θ-sound in Old Yucatec, the phonologic system of this language seems to have been analogous to that of Huastec on all points, excepting the Yucatec pp, the two sounds of h, and the double vowels. Huastec has an h-sound like Modern Yucatec, but no p' or double vowels. It is pertinent to note at least that these two languages may have agreed on the following points of their phonologic systems:
Old Yucatec (OY alphabet) | ç | tz | ɔ |
Huastec (IPA notations) | θ | ʦ | ʦˈ |
For the sake of brevity, we shall not consider in detail the
evidence for regarding it probable that the phonetic value of the
character tz was
ʦ in Old Yucatec. That it was not interdental is
indicated by the fact that the Spaniards used t to represent the plosive phase of this affricate. The
fact that they did not represent its fricative phase by s
may be accounted for by what was observed above with regard to the old
Castilian s. The combination of t and Castilian s might have had an
acoustic effect similar to ʧ, if the s was so much like ʃ.
San Buenaventura's description of the articulation of the sound
represented by tz supports this
probability, and Beltrán gives an unusually unambiguous and
detailed description of how the tz
was pronounced. In his time it doubtless stood for a ʦ-sound. It is
of
interest to note that although Tapia Zenteno used the letter z for the Huastec θ-sound, he
used tz for a ʦ-sound. His
description definitely shows that tz did not stand for an affricate composed of t and
θ: "La tz
se pronuncia cerrando los dientes, y difundiendo por todos ellos la
lengua, formando un sybilo sin violencia." The teeth are in contact
also at present in the articulation of the Huastec ʦ-sound.
Proceeding now to the rest of the characters of Group 2, let us
consider what is known about h.
In the Motul dictionary, as well as in San Buenaventura's grammar, we
are told that there were two kinds of sounds which those writers
referred to as "sounds of h".
One of them is called "h
simple" and the other "h
rezia".
We will say untechnically 'weak h' and 'strong h', for a technical
rendering would necessitate more information about these sounds than is
now available. According to the Motul dictionary, the weak h was hardly
audible, and was even omitted in some words when certain pronouns
preceded them. No other information is given there about the sound of
the strong h than that which is vaguely suggested by contrasting it
with the weak h. The distinction between these two kinds of so-called
h-sounds is not indicated in the letters to Philip II mentioned above.
The words hibici, hahal, hach,
and hunal
which according to the Motul dictionary had strong h, are written in
those letters with the same character as all the others which are
listed in the Motul dictionary as having weak h. Nor are these sounds
distinguished in the dictionary by different characters. Which words
had intitial weak h and which had initial strong h is shown by entering
them separately. But, so far as I know, there is no information in that
work, nor in any other, as to whether the distinction between these two
sounds applies only to h in initial position. We do not know whether
the h in other than initial position was always strong, or always weak,
or strong in some words and weak in others. This is not a negligible
item, if we consider the large number of Yucatec words which have h in
other than initial position. In Modern Yucatec, the final h is more
prevalently omitted in some morphemes than in others. The initial weak
h is consistently absent only in the root al, 'to say' or
'tell', and in the words mentioned above in Pio Perez' statement. That
much is in agreement with the distinction between weak and strong h,
but, obviously, nothing can be inferred from it as to what may have
been the case with regard to the words in which both the weak and the
strong h are preserved.
It has been suggested that the strong h
may have been the voiceless velar, or uvular, fricative of other
members of the Maya family which has been represented by the letter
j
with one ore another of its phonetic values in modern Spanish. But no
valid reason has so far been given to lead us to suppose that it was,
nor have we so far disclosed any clue in the etymologic correspondence
between those velars or uvulars on the one hand, and the weak or the
strong h on the other.
The uses of the letters h and
j in
the Spanish orthography of at least the first two-thirds of the
sixteenth century account for the fact that the Spaniards used h, and not j, to represent the Yucatec h-sound or h-sounds. The
h was then silent in the
syllable hue,
and in words in which it was written simply because the ones from which
they were derived, or which were borrowed and Hispanized by various
writers, had h in Latin. On
the other hand, it was not silent, and stood for a special Spanish
sound wherever this special sound had developed from a Latin f. This arbitrary imitation of the
Latin orthography developed mainly after the fifteenth century. Nebrija
writes ombre, onestas, istoria,
and even Omero; not hombre, honestas, historia, Homero,
as is done now. But he wrote hazer, 'to do' or 'make', and hijo, 'son', for example, because they were pronounced
with the initial consonant which developed from the Latin f. It may be readily seen that from
the fact that j
was not used for the Yucatec sound in question nothing can be inferred
as to whether this sound was like the present Yucatec h, or like the
present pronunciation of the Spanish j. Nor do we know precisely what sort of sound the old
Spanish h stood for when it was
not silent. Nebrija says, "La h
entre nosotros tiene tres oficios: uno propio, que trae consigo en las
diciones latinas, mas non le damos su fuerça, como en estas: humano, humilde, donde la escrivimos
sin causa, pues que de ninguna cosa sirve; otro, cuando se sigue u despues della, para demonstrar que
aquelle u no es consonante,
sino vocal, como en estas diciones: huesped, huerto, huevo; lo cual ia no es menester, si
las dos fuerças que tiene la u
distinguimos por estas dos figuras: u, v. El
tercero oficio es cuando le damos fuerça de letra haziendola sonar, como
en las primeras letras destas diciones: hago, hijo; e entonces ia no sirve por si, salvo por
otra letra, e llamarla emos he,
como los judios e moros, de los cuales recebimos esta pronunciacion."
(Gramatica, 1492).
San Buenaventura reports in 1684 that the Yucatec strong h was then
pronounced almost as Spanish j.
By that time, j
was pronounced more or less as at present, according to the evidence
presented by Cuervo. From this remark of San Buenaventura nothing can
confidently be inferred as to the articulation of the Yucatec h in his
time. Even at present some assert that the Modern Yucatec h sounds like
Spanish j, although the
former hardly differs from English h. It resembles a Spanish sound only
if we specify that we refer to the Spanish spoken in this or that part
of Spanish America. Furthermore, we do not know how the Spanish j was pronounced in its transition
from something like the present sound of English j to something like that of modern
French j, and from this to the
present sound. It may not have reached the last stage of its development
when San Buenaventura wrote.
It is not clear whether Beltrán draws a distinction between the
Yucatec h-sound and the Castilian pronunciation of j, or whether what he says is simply
that the letter jis not used in
Yucatec writing. We refer to this statement: "Esto supuesto se advierta,
que la h se pronuncia con
aspiración, porque la usa el idioma en lugar de la j, que no tiene." The situation with
respect to the Spanish h in
Beltrán's time is described in the Diccionario de Autoridades as follows: "... pues los
Castellanos jamás usan de la H,
y aunque precisamente la pidan diferentes palabras, en su boca no se
oye el mas leve indicio de aspiración: lo que no sucede en
Andalucía, y
en casi toda la Extremadura, donde se habla con tan fuerte
aspiración,
que es dificultoso discernir si pronuncian la H o la J"
(p.LXVII). Thus, it is possible that in the Spanish known to
Beltrán there may have been a difference between the sound for
which j stood then and an
"h-sound" such as occurred in some parts of Spain, and similar perhaps
to that which still occurs in those parts and outside of the
Peninsula.
It should be noted incidentally that in some editions of Old Yucatec
manuscripts, j has been used
where the original has a special form of te letter i after another i.
In so doing, the editors conform to precedent, but in this case it is
misleading. For the reader may be in doubt as to whether this j stands for a Yucatec sound other
than i, or whether it is the old way of writing i at the end of a word, and even in Roman numerals. In
the manuscript of the Motul dictionary, the way the second i of the double vowel ii is written differs appreciably in
form from the regular j used
there in Spanish words. This explains our exclusion of j from the list of the characters of
the Old Yucatec alphabet.
The phonetic values of the other two characters of Group 2 can
justifiably be assumed to be as heretofore supposed. The v
was used only in initial position, and stood for a vowel sound when the
next letter was a consonant, but it stood for a semivowel when the next
letter was a vowel. This conformed to the Spanish orthography of that
time so far as the u-sound and the w-sound are concerned. At that time,
v and u
were merely two ways of writing the same character. So much so that as
late as the eighteenth century there seems to have been no standard
name for the v, as may be
inferred from this statement in the Diccionario de Autoridades:
"El medio para separar en lo escrito entrambos oficios es usar de la
regla ya comunmente recibida de substituir, quando son consonantes, en
lugar de la I la Y, y en lugar de la U abierta o cuadrada la V cerrada, que llaman de
corazoncillo." Even now, it can hardly be said that there is a standard
name for the v in Spanish.
The characer x was doubtless
used to represent a Yucatec ʃ-sound. Such was also the phonetic
value of x in Castilian. There
is no need of pointing out how the letter x
is used at present to write Asturian, or Galician, or Catalan, as
various writers have done, in order to account for the use of x
in the various alphabets devised by the Spaniards to write the
aboriginal languages of America. Castilian had a ʃ-sound which
after
the sixteenth century converged, together with the old sound of j, into the present sound of Spanish
j.
The characters of Group 3 obviously stood for sounds which differed
from those of the Spanish language in a way that all writers found
difficult to explain. It is quite certain that those sounds were
ejective (using Daniel Jones' terminology) or glottalized (as is
usually said, though ambiguously). In this instance, the etymologic
correspondences observed between Modern Yucatec ejective sounds and the
ejective sounds of other Maya languages enables us to infer with a high
degree of confidence what was the case in Old Yucatec.
In the development of the present Maya languages from their common
ancestor or ancestors, I have observed only one exception to the rule
that ejective articulation has remained ejective; and this exception
can justifiably be explained as a case of assimilation. I refer to the
word for 'blood', which has two ejectives in some languages, and only
one in others. In the languages and dialects in which I have heard it,
this word is as follows:
Modern Yucatec | kik |
Lacandon | kik-el |
Mopan (British Honduras) | kik |
Tzeltal (Bachajon variant) | chich |
Quiche | kik |
Cakchiquel | kik |
Tzutuhil | kik |
Quekchi | kik |
Pokomam (Mixco variant) | kik-el |
Pokomam (Chinautla, Palin) | kyek |
Mam | chik |
Solomec | chik |
Aguacatec | sich |
Huastec (Veracruzano) | xich |
Huastec (Potosino) | xits |
The etymologic correspondences show definitely that the sounds
represented by the characters of Group 3 were ejective, and indicate
besides that it is far more probable than improbable that some were
plosive and others frivcative, as they are now supposed to have been.
That they were voiceless is implied by saying that they were
ejective.
With respect to the vowels which compose the last group of characters
tabulated above, we shall raise no question. But something should be
said concerning the combinations aa,
ee, ii, oo, uu. In
Part 1 we describe the sounds for which the double vowels stand in this
description of Modern Yucatec. The words which in the Motul dictionary
are written with double vowel followed by one or more consonants have
double vowel in Modern Yucatec. But in nearly all cases in which no
consonant follows the double vowel, as the words are written in that
dictionary, Modern Yucatec has a single vowel followed by a glottal
stop. For example, haa,
'water', is now pronounced ha’; and cii, 'firewood', is now
si’.
So far as I know, the frst instance in which a writer has alluded to
the glottal stop in Yucatec is found in Pio Perez' dictionary. Under
the first entry in the dictionary he discusses the pronunciation of the
vowel a in these terms: "Esta
vocal se pronuncia de dos maneras, una suave que puede ser larga
ó
breve, y otra fuerte en la que como que se contiene el aliento ó
sonido
repentinamente al mismo tiempo de emitirlo: como en na, casa y na, madre; el primero tiene el sonido suave y el segundo
fuerte."
Those words are now pronounced thus: na, 'house',
na’,
'mother'. Thus, what Pio Perez considers to be a difference of vocalic
quality is clearly a difference consisting of ending or not ending the
vowel with a glottal stop. He calls what is now a’
"the Maya a", and whenever he
says that a word is to be pronounced with Maya a, or Maya i,
or o,
etc., we find at present a glottal stop; and in the Motul
dictionary we find the word written with double vowel. It is quite
certain that Old Yucatec had a glottal stop in those words. That can be
inferred with the highest degree of probability permissible in
historical linguistics. Hundreds of words which have a final glottal
stop in Modern Yucatec have a final glottal stop also in other
languages, however else they may differ. We give below three sets of
examples from the languages whose sounds we have investigated. We use
IPA notations except for Old Yucatec.
water | metate | firewood | |
Old Yucatec | haa | caa | çii |
Mod. Yucatec | ha’ | ka’ | si’ |
Lacandon | ha’ | ka’ | si’ |
Mopan | ha’ | ka’ | si’ |
Quekchi | xa’ | ka’ | si’ |
Quiche | xa’ | ka’ | si’ |
Cakchiquel | ya’ | ka’ | si’ |
Tzutuhil | ya’ | ka’ | si’ |
Aguacatec | a’ | ka’ | si’ |
Solomec | a’-ex | ka’ | si’ |
Pokomam | ha’ | ka’ | si’ |
Mam | a’ | ka,ka’ | si, si’ |
Huastec (Potosino) | ha’ | tsa’ | θi’ |
The Mam words ka’ ('metate, grinding stone for maize') and si’ occur in at least two localities: Tacana and San Pedro Necta (Guatemala). ka and si occur in Ostuncalco, Palestina, and San Pedro Sacatepequez. Taking account of only two possibilities (glottal stop, and no glottal stop) so that the estimate may be extremely conservative, and taking account of the number of languages and the number of words in which correspondences like the above are observed, we estimate that the chances that there was a glottal stop in Old Yucatec are more than 3,000 to 1. But that degree of probability does not hold for the supposition that those words did not have two vowels besides the glottal stop. That is to say, the combination aa, for example, could possibly have stood for a’, or for a’a, or for aa’. Nor have we studied the matter sufficiently to decide whether in other than final position the aa, ee, ii, etc. of the Old Yucatec orthography stood for a’a, e’e, i’i, etc. In emphatic speech they are so pronounced at present.
It seems that the only evidence that a so-called "Peten" or "Itza"
dialect is spoken in El Peten is the material collected there in
1866-67 by Dr. Hermann Berendt. We observe that all but five of the
words of this questionable dialect are found in Yucatec dictionaries or
occur in our field notes on the Mopan spoken in San Antonio, British
Honduras. Needless to say, we cannot assert that those five words do
not occur in Mopan, particularly since we have studied only the Mopan
spoken in San Antonio. Especially curious is the fact that in some
instances Berendt seems to give the Yucatec and the Mopan words as
alternative terms of the dialect he claimed to have discovered. For
example, 'white' is said to be sac
or sök. The former
is Yucatec, and the latter could very well be the way in which the Mopan
word sək sounds to one acquainted with German sounds
and unacquainted with phonetics.
The work which has been most influential in adding the name "Peten" or
"Itza" to the list of Maya dialects is Otto Stoll's Zur Ethnographie der Republik
Guatemala,
Zürich, 1884. Nearly 200 of the words of Berendt's vocabulary are
included there in the parellel lists of words of a number of Maya
languages. Those lists should not be trusted in deciding to what extent
this "Peten" or "Itza" differs from Yucatec, for there are several
instances like the following. Under the word for 'nothing', Stoll has
mabal for Yucatec and mixbaal for "Peten". But mixbaal
happens to be one of the common words for 'nothing' in Modern Yucatec.
These observations are in accord with the objections made by J. Eric
Thompson in his monograph Ethnology of
the Mayas of Southern and Central British Honduras,
1930, p.38. Thompson says: "He [Berendt] groups a number of villages as
speaking the dialect, which he calls Peten. This group includes the
villages of San Jose, Dolores, San Luis, Yaxche, San Toribio, Santa
Barbara Poctun, and Santa Ana. Now San Jose certainly speaks a
different dialect to that spoken in San Luis, Dolores, and San Toribio.
Furthermore the vocabulary and few sentences, that Dr. Berendt gives,
show that he has obtained a mixture of the two dialects. All the
phrases with one exception are San Jose Maya, and not the Maya of San
Antonio. On the other hand a few of the words are definitely San
Antonio Maya. The manuscript was apparently written in Sacluc, and
possibly the vocabulary and phrases were obtained there, too. Sacluc,
which lies northwest of Flores, is right outside Mopan territory.
Possibly Dr. Berendt obtained some of his information in some villages
of the Mopan-Pasion divide, and the greater part in the village of
Sacluc. Hence the confusion."
Of course, we do not know whether
since 1866 whatever differences there may have been between the speech
of those localities and that of Yucatan have been obliterated, leaving
no decisive evidence of the dialect in question. However, so far as
Berendt's material shows, it could hardly have been more than a local
variant of Yucatec. At any rate, the information available does not
seem to justify the inclusion of the name "Peten" or "Itza" in the list
of Maya languages or dialects. The number of dialects in the present
list could easily be doubled if one chose to include as a newly
discovered dialect the vernacular of every locality or group of
villages differing appreciably from that of others.
The following remarks concerning description may render more
understandable the discussion of the devices dealt with in this note.
A summary of what authoritative dictionaries say about describing is to
the effect that we describe something by stating what are its
"characteristics", and a "characteristic" is said to be a "distinctive
feature". Needless to say, none of the definitions of the words
'distinctive' and 'feature' gives any clue as to how much information
about that which is described should be included in its description.
The term 'feature' seems to be applicable to almost any constituent,
property, or phase, of whatever one chooses to describe. If
"distinctive features" are those features which suffice to distinguish
that which is described from everything else of its kind, then either
the lexicographer's definition of the term 'description' does not
conform to common usage, or most descriptions are superfluously
informative. On the other hand, if the "distinctive features" include
all the respects in which a given object differs from any other object
of its kind, who can claim to have ever described anything on earth?
Guided by what is usually done, rather than by what is said about
it, we come to the following conclusions. It seems to be generally true
that a description is not expected to tell us how that which is
described came to be what it is, nor why it is where it happens to be,
nor why it is there at the time it happens to be there. Aside from
that, a description of x,
regardless of what we let 'x'
stand for, is expected to inform us about x to an extent that may be adequate to our needs or aims
in describing x. It is true
that when x
is something of academic interest, academic conventions and traditional
habits may determine the kind and amount of information expected, but
insofar as such conventions and habits are not aimless the preceding
statement takes account of them. Usage is extremely erratic with
respect to what can or cannot be properly said to be describable, but
it is clear at least that is does not confine the application of the
expression 'to describe' to that which is visible. Indeed, even
emotions are not infrequently spoken of as being describable. To speak
of describing language, as some of us do at present, seems rationally
justifiable.
We shall try now to indicate what sort of description we will say, for
lack of a better term, to be statistical. For convenience, let us call an item that
which we choose to describe in a given instance. The task of describing
two items can be accomplished by describing each separately. Or, if the
two items have something in common, a single description can serve for
both, if we are not concerned with their differences. But even if we
are concerned with their differences, the statements which hold for
both items can be supplemented by statements dealing with their
differences to whatever extent may be feasible and desirable. Suppose
now that we have to describe a million items. Needless to say, it might
be neither feasible nor desirable to give one million separate
descriptions, nor is it likely to be feasible or desirable to
supplement an account of what a million items have in common by adding
detailed information on the differences between each and the rest. The
larger the number of items, the more is one compelled to resort to a
common-sense procedure which is essentially like, or roughly like, the
method of sampling in statistical investigation. That is our excuse for
calling the result a statistical
description. The procedure is quite familiar: a number of items
termed samplings
are studied. It is found that certain statements can be made which hold
for them, and it is assumed that with some degree of probability those
statements will hold also for all other items concerned in the
investigation, or for a certain percentage of them. Of course, the more
detailed the information, the less likely it is that the description
can consist entirely of statements which hold for all the items to
which the description is expected to apply. Hence, when detailed
information is needed, the description may have to contain statements
which are not expected to apply to all the items concerned. In such a
case it is desirable to be able to specify to what sort of items such
statements are more likely to apply, and to what sort they are less
likely to apply.
The foregoing is assumed to account for the use of the operational devices we proceed to explain. Let us call a speech-community the population whose language or dialect or vernacular a given investigator proposes to describe. A section of a speech-community will be said to be any portion of it that may be
adequately delimitable with respect to locality, or age, or occupation,
or speech, or in any other way. The number of sections into which it is
desirable that a given speech-community be divided by the investigator
depends both on the variability of speech and on how detailed an
account the investigator plans to give in his description. The
speech of a section of a speech-community will be called a speech-type.
The description of a language or dialect as spoken by a given
speech-community could consist of separate descriptions of the
speech-types into which it is divided by a given investigator. However,
due to the numerous repetitions that would be made, such a plan is not
economical. A more convenient plan is to describe one of the
speech-types, and to specify the deviations of the other speech-types
from it. The speech-type with reference to which the deviations are
specified will be called Type
A. The other speech-types can be labeled Type B, Type C,
etc. For obvious reasons, it is generally preferable to choose for Type
A the speech of whatever section of the speech-community includes more
population than any other, but technical considerations may make it
more desirable in some cases to do otherwise. Any choice is compatible
with this method of procedure, provided the investigator specifies to a
desirable extent what portion of the population is included in each of
the sections into which he divides the speech-community. If such
specifications are adequate, the facts would not be misrepresented even
if the speech labeled 'Type A' were avowedly that of one, and only one,
individual.
It may be evident that the distinction between the
two Yucatec speech-types labeled 'Type A' and 'Type B' rests on the
distribution of variants. Variants which are common in Type A and not
common in Type B are referred to as a 'A-variants'. Similarly, those common in Type B and not
in Type A are called 'B-variants' Variants which are not classed either as
A-variants or as B-variants are called 'X-variants'. A variant whose
occurrence in one of the speech-types is said to be common
satisfies these conditions: (1) the total number of its occurrences in
our samplings is at least 100; (2) it has occurred in the samplings
from at least three mutually distant localities; (3) it has occurred
only in the samplings of the speech-type in which it is said to be
common, or the number of its occurrence in those samplings is at least
90% of the total number of its occurrences. We class as an X-variant any variant which does not
satisfy those three conditions. Some of the X-variants which
have occurred less than 100 times are found only in the sampling of
Type A.This and other observations concerning X-variants are mentioned in the text at the various
places where the deviations from Type A are dealt with.
Some of the city residents of Yucatan seem to believe that there are
localities in the peninsula where "pure Maya" is still spoken. A few of
them hold that this "pure Maya" is a language like that known to them
through the literature of previous centuries, while others claim simply
that it is Yucatec with no Spanish admixture. These reports generally
disagree as to the places where this "pure" language is still spoken,
and, so far as I recall, the ones who propagate these reports have
never been in the places they recommend. Accompanied by a native of
Sotuta who gave credence to these rumors, we visited some of the
localities which had been most frequently mentioned. In each of the
localities visited, inquiries were made as to the speech of the
surrounding region, and occasionally we were able to test the speech of
transients from places not covered by this survey.
So far as Spanish admixture is concerned, the reports proved not to be
entirely groundless, particularly with regard to the speech of the
villages of Chemax and Chaczinkin, State of Yucatan, and Lunkini in the
State of Campeche. Use of antiquated speech to an extent worthy of note
was observed chiefly in Chemax, but only among the oldest members of
this community. The speech of the main body of the population hardly
differs from that of other parts of the peninsula in this respect.
Some data on speech-differences were obtained through the kindness of
Professor Fernando Ximiello, superintendent of the federal schools in
Yucatan, whose office needed some information of this sort. The
writer was given the privilege of preparing a questionnaire based on
previous observations, and this was sent officially to the teachers of
the rural schools with detailed instructions for selecting informants
and securing the desired information. The answers were obtained from at
least two of the members of each community to which the questionnaire
was sent. Each of the individuals selected as prescribed in the
instructions was to be interviewed separately, and his answers were
listed separately under the name of the informant. The aim of the
questions was to disclose the various respects in which the speech of
the localities known to the informant differed from the speech of his
native place. The answers showed that either the teachers or those who
helped them could use fairly consistently a certain orthography
prevalent at present in Yucatan, and known to most literate individuals
at least from its use in writing family names, and place names, most of
which are Yucatec throughout the rural districts. As a rule, the
teachers were natives of Yucatan and spoke Yucatec.
Particularly reliable were the instances in which the information given
in one locality was supported by that given in another. For example,
from a given locality it is reported that xectaba is a way to say 'sit down' in another, and from
the latter it is reported that culen
is the way to say 'sit down' in the former. In other cases the reports
of two localities agree in that a certain expression is used in a
third; 53% of the answers were comparable in this manner, and 79% of
the pairs thus comparable were not contradictory.
In contemporary writings on language, the terms 'tense' and 'aspect'
are
used to refer to at least two kinds of items. Formerly, the word
'tense' seems to have been used most commonly as the name of a set of
discoursive devices, rather than as the name of the items signified by
the discoursive devices. It was taken for granted, either explicitly or
implicitly, that the non-discoursive items signified by those
discoursive devices were time items such as present, past, or future
time. Such was the situation until some linguists pointed out that the
discoursive devices which had been called 'tenses' did not stand
exclusively for time items of the present-past-future sort. It was said
that they stood also for other kinds of items. We will call them
'X-items' to facilitate further remarks. If the word 'tense' were still
understood to be the name of certain discoursive devices, it would
be quite proper to say that the tenses stand for X-items as well as for
items of the present-past-future sort. That way of putting it is
unintelligible at present. The reason is that the time items of the
present-past-future sort are now called 'tenses'. That is to say, the
name of the symbols has come to be the name of what the symbols stand
for. The X-items have been called Aktionsarten
by German writers, and 'aspects' by English writers. In some statements
it is difficult to decide whether the writers refer by the word
'aspect' to the X-items, or to the discoursive devices, or to both. But
it is rather clear that when a linguists says, for example, 'In this
language, tense and aspect are expressed by means of suffixes',
the words 'tense' and 'aspect' do not stand for discoursive devices. In
such cases, the writer evidently refers to the items for which the
suffixes stand, if he refers to anything at all.
Let us now see
what sorts of items, other than discoursive devices, have been called
'aspects' by various linguists. According to Sapir (Language,
p. 114) those items are "the lapse of action, its nature from the
standpoint of continuity." This, of course, is just an incidental
remark of the loose sort frequently made in footnotes. It is not
intended, I think, to cover the whole range of Sapir's application of
the term 'aspect'. As evidence of this, we notice that among the
various "aspects" he mentions in that footnote there is one he calls
"resultative", and which he exemplifies by the expression "to wear a
coat". We presume that it is called "resultative" in consideration of
the circumstance that in order to wear a coat one must first put it on.
This example is preceded by "to put on a coat", apparently to contrast
the "resultative" with the "momentaneous" aspect. Without stopping to
consider the matter carefully, one may see that "lapse of action" has
something or other to do with the comparatively short time it takes to
put on a coat; but a considerable degree of tolerance must be granted
in order to admit that "lapse of action" or "continuity" have anything
to do with the circumstance that having a coat on is a result of
putting it on. According to Sapir and many other linguists, another
"aspect" (the "iterative" or "repetitive") is demonstrated by doing
something repeatedly; and still another (the "inceptive" or
"inchoative") is exemplified by beginning to do something. This may be
sufficient to illustrate how diverse are the items which have been
called
'aspects'. What have they in common? If we do not know what they have
in common, and in what respects they differ from the items which should
not be called 'aspects', how can we determine whether or not the term
is applicable to such items as rapidity, acceleration, reaction, cause,
aim, and whatever else may pertain to action or have something to do
with it? Should someone assert that all these items can be called
'aspects' if a given language has a special kind of devices to refer to
them, then this question seems pertinent: What must those devices be
like? That is to say, must they be prefixes, or suffixes, or
reduplications, or special words? Must they precede, or follow,
specifiable devices -- specifiable in such a way that they can be
identified in whatever language they may occur? We suspect that it is a
futile to try to define "aspects" in terms of linguistic devices, as it
is to attempt to define them in terms of what the X-items have in
common. With regard to defining the X-items, Bloomfield says: "... the
definer, after stating the main principles, cannot do better that to
resort to a demonstration by means of examples." (Language,
1933, p.280). We agree that demonstration would have to be resorted to,
but we wonder whether it is feasible to state any main principles which
can account for classing as "aspects" all the items which have been so
called.
This may be taken to be a mere convention in the use of our notations, or it can be defended on the ground that 't₁-t₂' stands for the time during which the hands of a clock are on certain lines painted on the fact of the clock. Even if the thickness of those lines were one millionth of an inch, some time would be "occupied" by the motion of the hands across them, or while they are "at" those lines. That is to say, we have proceeded on the assumption that if it is asserted that the occurrence of something, x, "occupies" no time, the assertion implies that x is nothing at all.
The term "equipollent" is borrowed from logic. In The Logical Syntax of Language,
Carnap explains its use as follows:
"We call sentences or classes of sentences having the same content
equipollent.
Two sentences are obviously equipollent when and only when each of them
is a consequence of the other". The use of this term in the description
of natural languages is similar but not identical. Carnap's use of the
term is possible because in his artificially constructed language of
science all terms are defined and therefore always occur with the same
designation, with no context to modify it. In its present use the word
refers to discourses asserting identical occurrents with the same
declarative values and space-time specifications. "I hit him" and "He
was hit by me" are equipollent in this sense. It is not asserted that
the communications made by these devices do not differ in some respect.
To what extent the communications made by the use of equipollent
sentences can be said to be alike would depend on the degree to which
our description abstracts from what we have called "topical
distinction" (4.8).
It is quite probable that the tan which is a component of construction tan + IKAL is etymologically identical with the phonologically identical tan which signifies 'in the presence of', 'about the middle of', 'in the midst of'. One of the entries in the Motul dictionary is "tan a beelel: en medio de tu camino, or de tu caminar," which, as we understand it, signifies approximately 'when you are about half way (to a certain place)'. In Old Yucatec we find tan used occasionally in a way which has some analogy to its present usage in construction tan + IKAL, particularly Usage A; but other constructions were then employed in most of the references in which tan + IKAL is now commonly found. Pio Perez apparently attempted to define the Modern Yucatec usage when he says in his dictionary (1866-77) that the impersonal verb tan signifies "el acto o capacidad de hacer or ejecutar." This definition can hardly serve to distinguish the uses of this verb from those of many others, since it is applicable to most verbs; but his example "tan u tal, está viniendo" ('He is coming') conforms to present Yucatec usage even to the extent that in the construction u tal the verb tal, 'to come', is not talel, as it was in Old Yucatec and is still at present in some expressions in speech of Type A.
When confronted with the difficulty mentioned in the text, the expert in the sort of mythical grammar we have all been taught is expected to repeat what he has been trained to say; namely, that when I assert that I have done something I speak of something that stands completed or perfected at the time I speak of it. Let us consider an instance of a rather common sort. A friend of mine who is looking for his child asks me "Have you seen Johnny?" And I reply "I saw him in the yard a while ago." According to the traditional grammatical myth, my friend asked me whether a certain "action" stood completed or perfected. If my answer would had been "I have seen him" or simply "I have", I would have said something about the completion or perfection I am supposed to have been asked about. But as I choose to include in my answers some information about where and when I saw Johnny, it seems that I was compelled by the rules of the language to say nothing as to whether the "action" stood completed or perfected, although, according to the grammarian, that was precisely what my friend asked me. It need scarcely be said that this is a piece of folklore and of a rather dull sort. If when I say 'I have done it' I assert that a certain action stands completed or perfected at the time I say it, then that is also what I assert when I say 'I did it'. For it is obvious (1) that I did whatever I have done; (2) that whatever I have done was done by me, and hence I did it; and (3) that whatever I did is done. Obviously, it is not what I did, or how I did it, or where or when I did it, that determines whether I should say 'I did it' or 'I have done it'. Those who speak at present about "aspects of action" seem to claim that in 'I have done it' I talk about a certain "aspect" of the action. Presumably, the action I refer to when I say 'I did it' has the same "aspect" but I do not talk about it in that sentence. We do not know what evidence can be adduced in support of that claim, but we will assume for the sake of argument that the claim is valid, and proceed to ask this question: Is the speaker always at liberty to refer to any "aspect" of a given action, or must he refer to one "aspect" of it in some cases, and to another "aspect" in others, if he conforms to the linguistic habits of his speech-community? If there are no linguistic restrictions of that sort, the question of what determines the choice falls within the field of some discipline other than linguistics. But if it happens to be the case that there are such linguistic restrictions, then it is pertinent to ask further: Under what conditions do the English habits of speech require that the speaker talk about a certain "aspect" of a given action, and not about another "aspect" of it? If this question cannot be answered, what have we gained by calling "aspects" and "tenses" what were formerly called "tenses"? We notice that it does not conform to prevalent habits of speech to say, for example, 'I have seen him yesterday'. That is obviously a restriction of a linguistic sort. If I saw him yesterday, any "aspect" of the "action" of seeing him was an "aspect" of an "action" that occurred yesterday. But apparently I must not allude to the "perfective aspect" of that "action" in a sentence in which I say that the action occurred yesterday. On the other hand, it is proper to say 'I have seen him several times', referring to the fact that I saw him yesterday and on several other occasions.
There are words and other devices in many languages, if not in all, which could be called contextual definitives. We would call a given symbol, S, a contextual definitive if and when S satisfies these three conditions:
English expressions which satisfy those conditions in many instances are: the demonstratives 'this', 'that', 'those'; the "adverbs" 'here', 'there', 'now', 'then', 'today', 'yesterday', 'next year'; the personal pronouns 'I', 'you', 'he', etc. It is obvious, for example, that the word 'this' can refer in one instance to one thing and in another instance to something else; but in each instance it refers to a particular item, and no other. What particular item it refers to in each instance has to be inferred from what is said before it, or after it, or both, or from the circumstance that the speaker is pointing to something, or that he holds it in his hand, or some other circumstance or circumstances. When I said 'now' last week I referred to a certain time; and I can say 'now' at this moment to refer to another time. In each instance a certain period contemporary with the communication, and no other, can be referred to by the word 'now'; what period is referred to is readily inferred from the discoursive and circumstantial context, a constant contextual item being the very time occupied by the utterance.
Suspecting that Usage E of bin was determined by what the speaker chose to communicate, rather than by any constructional requirements, we experimented in this instance as follows. When the informant finished dictating the story, the text was read to him omitting the word bin in every instance in which it had been used as a sign of declarative value. The informant objected to this omission, but his corrections agreed only in part with what he had originally dictated; for he asked us to insert bin in a number of sentences in which it had not been used when the story was dictated. At one point he sternly objected that if bin was omitted, those who would read his account would think that he knew that all that he related has actually happened. His reply to our question as to whether he thought such things could have happened was hesitantly in the affirmative, but he repeated that he did not know whether they had happened in the particular instance referred to in the story.
1. April 1980